Sociology and Sociological Imaginations

Daily writing prompt
Describe your most ideal day from beginning to end.

By Kavita Dehalwar

Sociology is the scientific study of society, human social behavior, and the structures and processes that shape and influence it. It is a discipline that seeks to understand the patterns and dynamics of human interaction, social institutions, and the broader social forces that impact individuals and groups. Sociology examines how societies are organized, how they change over time, and how individuals are shaped by their social environments.

One key concept in sociology is the sociological imagination, which was introduced by American sociologist C. Wright Mills in his 1959 book of the same name. The sociological imagination encourages individuals to connect their personal experiences to larger social issues and historical contexts. Mills argued that people should be able to see the intersection between their private lives and the broader social structures in which they exist. This perspective helps individuals understand how personal troubles are often connected to public issues and how societal factors influence personal experiences.

The sociological imagination involves the ability to view one’s own life and the lives of others from a sociological perspective. It requires considering the broader social, historical, and cultural context in which individuals live. This perspective enables individuals to move beyond personal anecdotes and recognize the social forces at play in shaping their lives.

Key components of the sociological imagination include:

  1. Biography and History: Understanding the interplay between personal experiences (biography) and historical and social contexts (history). It involves recognizing that personal choices and experiences are influenced by societal structures and historical developments.
  2. Social Structure: Examining the overarching patterns and structures that organize society, such as institutions, social classes, and power dynamics. Social structure influences individuals and shapes their opportunities and constraints.
  3. Culture and Society: Recognizing the role of culture in shaping values, beliefs, norms, and practices within a society. Sociological imagination involves understanding how culture influences individual behavior and societal trends.
  4. Critical Thinking: Developing a critical and reflective mindset to question assumptions, challenge common beliefs, and analyze social phenomena. This involves looking beyond individual experiences to identify broader social patterns and inequalities.

Sociological imagination is a powerful tool for both sociological research and personal development. It encourages individuals to go beyond individualistic explanations for their circumstances and consider the broader social context. By understanding the societal forces at play, individuals can develop a more informed and critical perspective on their own lives and the world around them.

In the field of sociology, researchers use the sociological imagination to conduct studies and analyze social issues. Sociologists explore topics such as inequality, crime, education, family dynamics, and more, aiming to understand the underlying social structures and processes that contribute to these phenomena. This sociological perspective is crucial for developing insights into societal problems and proposing solutions that address root causes rather than merely addressing symptoms.

References

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fate of Slums of Bhopal-A Tale of Struggle and Resilience.ย Think India Journal,ย 26(4), 12-18.

Harvey, D. (2005). The sociological and geographical imaginations.ย International journal of politics, culture, and society,ย 18, 211-255.

Hughes, E. C. (1963). Race relations and the sociological imagination.ย American Sociological Review, 879-890.

Mills, C. W. (2023). The sociological imagination. Inย Social Workย (pp. 105-108). Routledge.

Sharma, S. N. (Ed.). (2016).ย New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd.

Thomson, R. (2014). Generational research: between historical and sociological imaginations.ย International Journal of Social Research Methodology,ย 17(2), 147-156.

Unveiling the Power of STEM: A Journey into the Heart of Innovation

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Science, Technology, Engineering, and Mathematics, collectively known as STEM, form the bedrock of innovation and progress in our modern world. From groundbreaking discoveries in medicine to the latest advancements in artificial intelligence, STEM fields play a pivotal role in shaping the future of humanity. In this article, we’ll delve into the significance of STEM and explore how it drives innovation across various sectors.

Science:

Photo by Andrea Piacquadio on Pexels.com

At the heart of STEM lies scienceโ€”the pursuit of knowledge through observation, experimentation, and analysis. Scientific discoveries have transformed our understanding of the natural world and led to revolutionary breakthroughs. From Isaac Newton’s laws of motion to the discovery of DNA structure by James Watson and Francis Crick, science lays the foundation for technological advancements and drives innovation by answering fundamental questions about the universe.

Technology:

Technology is the application of scientific knowledge for practical purposes, and it permeates every aspect of our daily lives. The rapid evolution of technology has given rise to the digital age, with innovations like smartphones, the internet, and artificial intelligence becoming integral parts of society. STEM professionals in the field of technology are instrumental in developing new software, hardware, and systems that enhance efficiency, communication, and overall quality of life.

Engineering:

Engineers are the architects of the technological landscape, translating scientific principles into tangible solutions. Whether it’s designing sustainable infrastructure, creating cutting-edge medical devices, or developing renewable energy sources, engineers play a crucial role in addressing global challenges. STEM-driven engineering fosters creativity, problem-solving, and a commitment to building a better future.

Mathematics:

Mathematics serves as the language of STEM, providing the framework for scientific theories and technological applications. From cryptography algorithms to predicting climate patterns, mathematics is the invisible force that underpins many advancements. Mathematicians contribute not only to theoretical frameworks but also to practical solutions in various fields, including finance, cryptography, and data analysis.

STEM in Action:

STEM education and research are essential components for nurturing the next generation of innovators. Initiatives promoting STEM in schools, colleges, and universities aim to equip students with the skills and knowledge needed to tackle complex problems. Hands-on experiments, coding workshops, and collaborative projects cultivate a passion for STEM disciplines and prepare future leaders for the challenges of tomorrow.

Challenges and Opportunities:

While STEM has propelled humanity forward, it also faces challenges such as gender and racial underrepresentation. Efforts are being made to bridge these gaps and create a more inclusive environment. Additionally, the ethical implications of technological advancements, such as privacy concerns and the impact on employment, demand careful consideration and responsible innovation.

Conclusion:

STEM is more than just an acronym; it is a dynamic force that drives progress and shapes the world we live in. As we continue to explore the frontiers of science, technology, engineering, and mathematics, the possibilities for innovation are boundless. By fostering a culture of curiosity, collaboration, and inclusivity, we can unlock the full potential of STEM and build a future that embraces the limitless opportunities it presents.

References

Bongso, A., & Richards, M. (2004). History and perspective of stem cell research.ย Best practice & research Clinical obstetrics & gynaecology,ย 18(6), 827-842.

Breiner, J. M., Harkness, S. S., Johnson, C. C., & Koehler, C. M. (2012). What is STEM? A discussion about conceptions of STEM in education and partnerships.ย School science and mathematics,ย 112(1), 3-11.

Brown, R., Brown, J., Reardon, K., & Merrill, C. (2011). Understanding STEM: current perceptions.ย Technology and Engineering Teacher,ย 70(6), 5.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Exploring the Distinctions between Quantitative and Qualitative Research Methods.ย Think India Journal,ย 27(1), 7-15.

English, L. D. (2016). STEM education K-12: Perspectives on integration.ย International Journal of STEM education,ย 3, 1-8.

Sharma, S. N., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). Council of Planning for Promoting Planning Education and Planning Professionals.ย Journal of Planning Education and Research,ย 43(4), 748-749.

Unlocking Opportunities: The Numerous Benefits of Internships

By Kavita Dehalwar

Internships serve as invaluable stepping stones for students and young professionals, offering a bridge between academic learning and real-world application. These structured work experiences provide a myriad of benefits that extend far beyond the confines of a classroom. In this article, we will explore the advantages of internships and how they contribute to personal and professional development.

Photo by fauxels on Pexels.com
  1. Real-world Experience:

Internships provide an opportunity for individuals to apply theoretical knowledge gained in classrooms to real-world scenarios. The hands-on experience gained during internships equips individuals with practical skills, enhancing their understanding of industry-specific practices. This exposure is often instrumental in shaping a well-rounded and competent professional.

  1. Skill Development:

Internships act as incubators for skill development. Beyond the technical skills related to a specific industry, interns also develop soft skills such as communication, teamwork, problem-solving, and time management. These skills are crucial in any professional setting and contribute significantly to one’s employability.

  1. Networking Opportunities:

Internships offer a unique chance to build professional networks. Interns interact with industry professionals, colleagues, and mentors, creating connections that can prove beneficial throughout their careers. Networking not only opens doors for potential job opportunities but also provides insights into industry trends and best practices.

  1. Resume Enhancement:

Having internship experience on a resume sets candidates apart in a competitive job market. Employers value practical experience, and internships demonstrate a candidate’s commitment to gaining real-world exposure and the ability to apply academic knowledge in a professional setting. A well-structured resume with relevant internships often catches the eye of recruiters.

  1. Career Exploration:

Internships provide a firsthand look into various industries, roles, and organizational cultures. For students and young professionals, this exposure is invaluable in making informed career choices. Internships allow individuals to explore their interests, discover their strengths, and identify areas for further development, ultimately guiding them towards a fulfilling career path.

  1. Confidence Building:

The challenges and responsibilities faced during an internship contribute to personal growth and confidence building. Overcoming obstacles in a professional setting instills a sense of accomplishment and resilience. Interns learn to navigate workplace dynamics, communicate effectively, and adapt to new situations, enhancing their self-assurance.

  1. Job Placement:

Internships often serve as a pipeline for future employment opportunities. Many organizations use internships as a talent acquisition strategy, hiring interns who have proven their capabilities during their time with the company. For interns, this can lead to a smoother transition from student life to the professional workforce.

Conclusion:

In conclusion, internships are invaluable experiences that bridge the gap between education and the professional world. They offer a wealth of benefits, from hands-on learning and skill development to networking opportunities and career exploration. As individuals seek to distinguish themselves in a competitive job market, internships stand out as an essential and transformative component of personal and professional growth.

References

Binder, J. F., Baguley, T., Crook, C., & Miller, F. (2015). The academic value of internships: Benefits across disciplines and student backgrounds.ย Contemporary Educational Psychology,ย 41, 73-82.

Metzger, S. V. (2002).ย Employers’ perceptions of the benefits of college internship programs. University of Idaho.

Seibert, J. H., & Sypher, B. D. (1989). The Importance of Internship Experiences to Undergraduate Communication Students.

Wolinsky-Nahmias, Y., & Auerbach, A. H. (2022). Evaluating the Design and Benefits of Internship Programs.ย Journal of Political Science Education,ย 18(4), 584-604.

Best Practices for Ensuring Total Sanitation in Bhopal

Bloganuary writing prompt
Write about a few of your favorite family traditions.

By Kavita Dehalwar

Bhopal, the capital city of Madhya Pradesh, is a thriving metropolis with a rich cultural heritage. While the city has seen significant growth and development, ensuring total sanitation remains a crucial challenge. Adopting best practices for sanitation is essential for the well-being of its residents and the overall development of the city. This article explores some key strategies and initiatives that can be implemented to achieve total sanitation in Bhopal.

  1. Community Engagement and Awareness:
    • Develop comprehensive awareness campaigns to educate residents about the importance of sanitation and its impact on public health.
    • Encourage community participation in cleanliness drives and waste management initiatives.
    • Establish partnerships with local NGOs, schools, and community leaders to amplify the reach of sanitation awareness programs.
  2. Proper Waste Management:
    • Implement a robust waste management system that includes waste segregation at source, efficient collection, transportation, and disposal.
    • Promote the use of composting and recycling to reduce the burden on landfills.
    • Enforce strict penalties for illegal dumping and encourage responsible waste disposal practices.
  3. Public Toilet Facilities:
    • Increase the number of public toilets in key areas to provide accessible and clean facilities for residents and visitors.
    • Regular maintenance and cleanliness checks should be conducted to ensure the hygiene of public toilets.
    • Implement community-led initiatives for the maintenance and upkeep of public toilet facilities.
  4. Promote Sustainable Practices:
    • Encourage the use of eco-friendly products and packaging to reduce environmental impact.
    • Initiate tree plantation drives to enhance green cover and improve air quality.
    • Implement water conservation measures to ensure sustainable use of water resources.
  5. Smart Technology Integration:
    • Utilize technology for monitoring and managing sanitation services, such as smart waste bins that send alerts when they are full.
    • Implement a city-wide sanitation app to report issues, request services, and provide feedback on sanitation conditions.
    • Use data analytics to identify areas with high sanitation needs and optimize resource allocation.
  6. Collaboration with Stakeholders:
    • Collaborate with local businesses, industries, and educational institutions to create a unified approach to sanitation.
    • Engage with government agencies, civic bodies, and private sector organizations to pool resources for large-scale sanitation projects.
    • Foster partnerships with international organizations and experts to gain insights into global best practices.
  7. Regular Monitoring and Evaluation:
    • Establish a monitoring system to track the progress of sanitation initiatives regularly.
    • Conduct periodic assessments of sanitation infrastructure, services, and public satisfaction.
    • Use feedback from residents and stakeholders to make continuous improvements to sanitation programs.
  8. Legislation and Enforcement:
    • Develop and enforce strict sanitation regulations to ensure compliance with cleanliness standards.
    • Impose fines for violations and non-compliance to create a deterrent for irresponsible sanitation practices.
    • Regularly update and adapt legislation to address emerging sanitation challenges.

Conclusion:

Achieving total sanitation in Bhopal requires a concerted effort from the government, businesses, communities, and individuals. By implementing these best practices, Bhopal can work towards creating a clean, healthy, and sustainable environment for its residents, setting an example for other cities to follow. Total sanitation is not just a goal; it’s a collective responsibility that, when achieved, contributes significantly to the overall well-being and progress of the city.

References

Agarwal, S., & Sharma, S. N. Universal Design to Ensure Equitable Society.ย International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR),ย 1.

Ayub, J. (2022, December 13). Garbage piles up as Bhopal Municipal Corporation workers go on indefinite strike over vacant posts. Times Of India. https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/city/bhopal/garbage-piles-up-as-bmc-workers-go-on-indefinite-strike-over-vacant-posts/articleshow/96186484.cms

Bathran, R. (2011). Indian sanitation.

Dehalwar, K., & Singh, J. (2015). A Critical Evaluation of the main Causes of Water Management Problems in Indian Urban Areas.ย International Research Journal of Environment Sciences. 4,ย 8.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fate of Slums of Bhopal-A Tale of Struggle and Resilience.ย Think India Journal,ย 26(4), 12-18.

Pardeshi, G. (2009). Women in total sanitation campaign: a case study from Yavatmal district, Maharashtra, India.ย Journal of human ecology,ย 25(2), 79-85.

Galvin, M. (2015). Talking shit: is Communityโ€Led Total Sanitation a radical and revolutionary approach to sanitation?.ย Wiley Interdisciplinary Reviews: Water,ย 2(1), 9-20.

Pardeshi, G., Shirke, A., & Jagtap, M. (2008). SWOT analysis of total sanitation campaign in Yavatmal district of Maharashtra.ย Indian journal of community medicine: official publication of Indian Association of Preventive & Social Medicine,ย 33(4), 255.

Sharma, S. N. (2014). Fate of Rural Sanitation Scheme.ย International Journal of Research (IJR),ย 1(2).

Sharma, S. N., & Biswas, A. (2016). Best practices for ensuring total sanitation.ย International Journal for Social Studies, ISSN, 2455-3220.

World Health Organization. (2020). Achieving quality health services for all, through better water, sanitation and hygiene: lessons from three African countries.

Understanding the Distinction: Quantitative vs. Qualitative Research

Bloganuary writing prompt
If you could make your pet understand one thing, what would it be?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Research is a fundamental component of advancing knowledge and understanding various phenomena. In the realm of research, two primary methodologies, quantitative and qualitative, serve distinct purposes and contribute uniquely to the exploration of diverse topics. This article aims to delve into the differences between quantitative and qualitative research, highlighting their characteristics, methodologies, and the advantages they bring to the research process.

Quantitative Research:

Quantitative research is a systematic, empirical investigation that employs statistical, mathematical, or computational techniques to collect and analyze numerical data. This method aims to quantify relationships, patterns, and trends within a population or sample. Key characteristics of quantitative research include:

  1. Objective Measurement: Quantitative research relies on objective measurement and numerical data. Researchers use structured instruments such as surveys, questionnaires, or experiments to gather information.
  2. Statistical Analysis: Data collected in quantitative research is subjected to statistical analysis. This involves the use of mathematical models to identify patterns, correlations, and trends in the data.
  3. Large Sample Sizes: Quantitative studies often involve large sample sizes to ensure the generalizability of findings to a broader population.
  4. Replicability: The emphasis on numerical data and statistical analysis allows for the replication of studies by other researchers to validate or challenge the initial findings.

Quantitative research is particularly valuable in fields such as psychology, economics, and public health where numerical data can provide precise insights into patterns and trends.

Qualitative Research:

Qualitative research, on the other hand, focuses on exploring and understanding the complexities of human experiences, behaviors, and social phenomena through non-numerical data. This method aims to uncover the underlying meanings, motivations, and cultural contexts associated with a particular subject. Key characteristics of qualitative research include:

  1. In-depth Exploration: Qualitative research emphasizes in-depth exploration and understanding of the subject matter. Researchers use methods like interviews, focus groups, and participant observation to gather rich, descriptive data.
  2. Subjectivity and Context: Qualitative research acknowledges the subjective nature of human experiences and considers the influence of context on behaviors and perceptions.
  3. Emergent Design: Unlike the rigid structure of quantitative research, qualitative studies often have an emergent design, allowing researchers to adapt their approach based on ongoing analysis and findings.
  4. Small Sample Sizes: Qualitative studies typically involve smaller sample sizes, allowing for a detailed examination of individual cases.

Qualitative research is particularly valuable in fields such as anthropology, sociology, and psychology where a deep understanding of human behavior and social phenomena is essential.

Comparative Analysis:

While both methodologies contribute valuable insights to the research landscape, they have distinct strengths and limitations. Quantitative research provides objective, generalizable data suitable for statistical analysis and hypothesis testing. In contrast, qualitative research offers a nuanced understanding of complex human phenomena, capturing the depth and context often missed by quantitative methods.

Below is a comparative table highlighting the key differences between quantitative and qualitative research methodologies:

AspectQuantitative ResearchQualitative Research
Data TypeNumerical data (quantifiable and measurable)Non-numerical data (textual, visual, narrative)
ObjectiveObjectively measures relationships, patterns, and trendsSubjectively explores meanings, motivations, and contexts
MethodologyStructured and standardized instruments (surveys, experiments)Unstructured and flexible methods (interviews, focus groups, observation)
Sample SizeLarge sample sizes for generalizabilitySmall sample sizes for in-depth exploration
Statistical AnalysisExtensive use of statistical analysis for patterns and correlationsLimited or no statistical analysis; emphasis on interpretation
ReplicabilityHighly replicable due to standardized methods and statistical rigorLimited replicability; context-dependent findings
PurposeTesting hypotheses, making predictions, establishing causationExploring complex phenomena, understanding context and meaning
ValidityHigh internal and external validity due to controlled environmentsHigh ecological validity, capturing real-world contexts
FlexibilityRigidity in research design and data collection proceduresFlexibility in research design, allowing for emergent insights
Research SettingsOften conducted in controlled settings (labs, surveys)Conducted in natural settings (fieldwork, real-world contexts)
Common FieldsPsychology, economics, public healthSociology, anthropology, psychology, humanities
Data RepresentationCharts, graphs, statistical tablesQuotes, narratives, themes, visual representations
Ethical ConsiderationsFocus on confidentiality, informed consent, and protection of participantsEmphasis on participant voices, ethical considerations in interpretation

This table provides a concise overview of the main distinctions between quantitative and qualitative research methodologies. It’s important to note that researchers often choose a methodology based on the nature of their research questions and objectives, and a combination of both methods (mixed methods) is increasingly common in contemporary research practice.

Conclusion:

In conclusion, the choice between quantitative and qualitative research depends on the research question, objectives, and the nature of the phenomena under investigation. Researchers often employ a mixed-methods approach, combining both methodologies to gain a comprehensive understanding of their research topic. The dynamic interplay between quantitative and qualitative research continues to shape our understanding of diverse disciplines, fostering a holistic approach to knowledge generation and advancement.

References

Clark, V. L. P., Creswell, J. W., Green, D. O. N., & Shope, R. J. (2008). Mixing quantitative and qualitative approaches.ย Handbook of emergent methods,ย 363, 363-387.

Cook, T. D., & Reichardt, C. S. (Eds.). (1979).ย Qualitative and quantitative methods in evaluation researchย (Vol. 1). Beverly Hills, CA: Sage publications.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies.

Dehalwar, K., & Singh, J. (2015). A Critical Evaluation of the main Causes of Water Management Problems in Indian Urban Areas.ย International Research Journal of Environment Sciences. 4,ย 8.

Gerring, J. (2017). Qualitative methods.ย Annual review of political science,ย 20, 15-36.

McEvoy, P., & Richards, D. (2006). A critical realist rationale for using a combination of quantitative and qualitative methods.ย Journal of research in nursing,ย 11(1), 66-78.

Punch, K. F. (2008). Quantitative and qualitative approaches.ย The Sociology of Healthcare: A Reader for Health Professionals, 51.

Roessner, D. (2000). Quantitative and qualitative methods and measures in the evaluation of research.ย Research Evaluation,ย 9(2), 125-132.

Sechrest, L., & Sidani, S. (1995). Quantitative and qualitative methods:: Is There an Alternative?.ย Evaluation and program planning,ย 18(1), 77-87.

Sharma, S. N., Chatterjee, S., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Challenges and Opportunities.ย Think India Journal,ย 26(1), 7-15.

Sharma, S. N. (2016). Introduction to Sociology.ย New Perspectives in Sociology and Allied Fields, 1.

Sharma, S. N. Techniques of Meta-Analysis for Unlocking Knowledge.

Sharma, S. N. (2015). Introduction to Sociology.ย Journal for Studies in Management and Planning,ย 1(8), 32-36.

Watzlawik, M., & Born, A. (Eds.). (2007).ย Capturing identity: Quantitative and qualitative methods. University Press of America.

Yousefi Nooraie, R., Sale, J. E., Marin, A., & Ross, L. E. (2020). Social network analysis: An example of fusion between quantitative and qualitative methods.ย Journal of Mixed Methods Research,ย 14(1), 110-124.

Increasing Institutional effectiveness in Higher Education Institutions: Meaning Perspectives Vs Transformative strategiesย 

By Chengalroyen N.

MSc, University of Pretoria, South Africa.

Summary/Abstract

Those who are interested in educational pedagogy are most likely familiar with the term โ€œTransformative learningโ€, it is a widely accepted approach to adult education. But what does it really mean? And how do we get past the jargon and theory to put into practice? Letโ€™s explore it a bit more and consider practical applications for individuals, institutions and learning environments. The speaker will outline how transformative learning pairs with an educational theory (how does teaching fit into a studentโ€™s world view) and will explore concrete ways to address transformative learning strategies: 1) problem-solving; 2) training and education; 

  • Institutional culture; 4) personal development; and 5) leadership) directly correlated to student performance in line with organizational goals.

Lets firstly understand the term Institutional Effectiveness ?

Acc toย ย The Society for College and University Planning(SCUP):

Is a Higher Education Institutions effort to organize assessment, evaluation and improvement initiatives so that the institution can determine how well it is fulfilling its mission and achieving its goals.

Vision                         Mission                                  Objectives                           Goals

What are Meaning Perspectives: How is this aligned with an Educational Theory

Is an overarching term that describes a collection of theories that explain the application, interpretation and purpose of learning(Acc to Mezirow: 2023).It pairs a Constructivist learning perspective- the idea that meaning is constructed from experience and internal understanding- with the importance of communication and reflection.

Soโ€ฆ.

As educators, How do we put this in practice?

We develop a โ€œTEACHING PHILOSOPHYโ€(TP)-which is a โ€œBelieve Statementโ€ in which we use theoretical concepts that help to explain the learning processes we wish to utilise and this will have the potential to inform educational approaches, curricula and assessments.

What must the TP should stateโ€ฆ.?

Must motivate the teacher to learn about the subject matter?

What are the expected outcomes of your teaching?

Teacher โ€“ student relationship you hope to achieve?

How do you measure if your lessons are successful?

What values do you impart on your students?

What code of ethics guides you?

What themes pervades your teaching?

What are the 3 types of TP that Educators can utilize to increase Institutional effectiveness?

Acc to the teaching Academy..

  1. Perennialism

Values knowledge that transcends time.This is a subject -centered philosophy.The goal of a perennialis educator is to teach students to think rationlly and develop minds that can think critically.

  • Progressivism

Progressivists believe that individuality,progress and change are fundamental to one education.They believe that students learn best from what they consider most relevant to their lives, centre their curricula on the needs,experiences, interests and abilities of students

  • Essentialism

Is also subject-centered aimed at teaching basic skills.This philosophy advocates training the mind focussing on transmiitting a series of progressively difficult topics and promotion of students to the next level.

Soโ€ฆ.

How does this then add value to โ€œTransformational Learningโ€?

The Educator must then align his/her Teaching Philosophy to that of transfomational teaching and learning approaches expained bt the following Model Strategies.

A Transformative Model of Strategies?: Approach to teaching and learning that can increase Institutional Effectiveness

  • Problem Solving:

Do an initial brainstorm.

Be open to making mistakes.

Challenge personal assumptions about the โ€œright wayโ€ of doing things.

Look for novel solutions from other sources, especially those outside of the field/culture.

Reflect on what worked , what didnโ€™t  and why?

Know sooner, Act faster approach.

Address administrative challenges promptly(trigger events).

Provide tools/opportunities for discussion and debate.

  • Institutional Culture

Create mentoring and job shadowing programs.

Enhance commitment for the development of synergetic actions.

Encourage collaboration across teams to broaden perspectives.

Encourage individuals and teams to take risks: treat failure as progress and growth.

Engage employees in activities that challenge the status quo such as thought provoking documentaries, annual field trips  and experiential learning games.

Provide safe spaces for employees to voice their say but must be done democratically.

Transformative re-design of educational curriculums into community engagement.

Integrating student development into academic activities.

Interconnected technology systems.

  • Personal development

Be open to changing your personal perspectives.

Push your personal boundaries through travel, trying new activities, meeting new people.

Keep up to date with new evidence-based practices

Keep a journal for ideas and reflection.

Growth of leadership skills.

Strengthening emotional intelligence.

  • Leadership and Governance

Strengthen gaps in policies.

Advance best practices.

Promote transdisciplinary approaches .

Embrace team efforts.

Collaborate with different groups with a diverse set of peers to share and brainstorm ideas.

Advocate professional development opportunities.

Attend skills development opportunities.

Adopt practices that force you to rethink your methods and beliefs on a regular basis.

  • Training and Education

Ask students to share their initial thoughts on the subject(pre knowledge).

Use engaging activities and /or rich media to further connect with students.

Ask students to reflect on the activities and discussion and how those may have impacted their thoughts on the topic.

Conclusion

This pendulum represents a balance, and to have harmony, one side must not out way the other.Therefore, to maintain constant Institutional Effectiveness in Higher Education there must be a balance by what the educator believe statement meets effective teaching and learning approaches. 

References

  1. Mezirow, J. 2023: Transformative learning: Theory to Practice; New directions for adult and Continuing Education; No 74(11): 5-6.

Guidelines for Writing Articles on Track2Training Portal

By Track2Traing Editorial Team

Photo by Lisa Fotios on Pexels.com

Introduction: Writing articles for the Track2Training portal is an excellent opportunity to share your knowledge and expertise with a broader audience. To ensure a smooth and efficient publication process, please follow these guidelines.

1. Length and Format: Articles should be comprehensive, with a minimum length of 500 words. Ensure that your article is well-organized, using headings and sub-headings for clarity and improved readability.

2. Author Information: Include your full name in bold italics just below the article title. Additionally, provide your affiliation to give readers context about your background.

3. Submission and Review Process: Submission of quality articles will be followed by a review process. If the reviewer approves the article, it will be published within 7 days of submission.

4. Originality and Plagiarism: All submissions must be original work. Avoid plagiarism by properly citing sources. Use your own words to convey information and cite any external content appropriately.

5. Theme or Topic: Stick to one theme or topic per article. This ensures clarity and allows readers to focus on a specific subject. Each author is allowed a maximum of four articles per month.

6. Use of Images: Enhance the attractiveness of your article by including royalty-free images. Images should be relevant to the content and sourced appropriately.

7. References: Include at least five references at the end of your article. Use APA or MLA format for citations. This adds credibility to your work and allows readers to explore further.

Sample References (APA Format):

  1. Last Name, F. M. (Year). Title of the Article. Title of the Journal, Volume(Issue), Page Range. DOI or URL
  2. Last Name, F. M., & Last Name, F. M. (Year). Book Title. Publisher.
  3. Last Name, F. M., Author, A. A., & Author, B. B. (Year). Title of the Chapter. In Book Title (pp. Pages). Publisher.
  4. Author, A. A. (Year). Title of the Report. Publisher. URL
  5. Last Name, F. M. (Year). Title of the Conference Paper. In Proceedings of the Conference Name (pp. Pages). DOI or URL

Conclusion: Writing for Track2Training is an opportunity to contribute valuable insights to the community. By adhering to these guidelines, you can ensure a smooth submission and publication process, ultimately sharing your expertise with a wider audience. We look forward to your contributions!

Send your write-up to contact@track2training.com

How to Write a Case Study Research

By Kavita Dehalwar

Writing a case study research involves thorough analysis and documentation of a specific subject, often focusing on a real-life situation or scenario. Here’s a step-by-step guide on how to write a case study research:

Photo by Ivan Samkov on Pexels.com
  1. Choose a Subject:
    • Select a case that is relevant and interesting to your target audience.
    • Ensure that your case study has a clear problem or issue to address.

Selecting an appropriate subject is the first crucial step in crafting a case study research. Opt for a case that holds relevance and interest for your target audience. Ensure that the chosen case encompasses a clear problem or issue that merits investigation and analysis.

  1. Define the Purpose:
    • Clearly state the purpose of your case study. What do you aim to achieve with this research? Is it to analyze a problem, propose a solution, or explore a particular phenomenon?
  2. Conduct Background Research:
    • Gather information about the subject, industry, and context.
    • Identify any relevant theories or concepts that will help frame your analysis.
  3. Identify the Key Issues:
    • Pinpoint the main problems or challenges faced by the subject.
    • Understand the factors contributing to the issues.
  4. Formulate Research Questions:
    • Develop specific research questions that guide your investigation.
    • These questions should be focused on the key issues identified.
  5. Choose a Case Study Type:
    • Decide on the type of case study you want to conduct. Common types include exploratory, explanatory, descriptive, or intrinsic.
  6. Collect Data:
    • Use various methods to gather data, such as interviews, surveys, observations, and document analysis.
    • Ensure your data collection is thorough and unbiased.
  7. Organize and Analyze Data:
    • Organize your data and categorize it according to themes or patterns.
    • Use appropriate analytical tools and techniques to interpret the information.
  8. Develop a Case Study Outline:
    • Create a clear structure for your case study, including an introduction, background, presentation of key issues, analysis, solutions, and conclusion.
  9. Write the Introduction:
    • Provide a brief overview of the case and its significance.
    • Clearly state the purpose and objectives of the case study.
  10. Present the Background:
    • Provide context by offering relevant background information.
    • Discuss any theories or concepts that are pertinent to the case.
  11. Describe the Case:
    • Present the details of the case, including the individuals or entities involved, the timeline, and the setting.
  12. Analyze the Issues:
    • Explore the key issues in-depth, using your research questions as a guide.
    • Apply relevant theories or frameworks to analyze the data.
  13. Propose Solutions:
    • Recommend practical solutions or strategies to address the identified issues.
    • Justify your recommendations with evidence from your analysis.
  14. Write the Conclusion:
    • Summarize the key findings and solutions.
    • Reflect on the implications of your research and suggest areas for further investigation.
  15. Include Citations:
    • Properly cite all sources used in your case study to give credit and provide a basis for further reading.
  16. Review and Revise:
    • Proofread your case study for clarity, coherence, and consistency.
    • Seek feedback from peers or mentors and make revisions accordingly.

Remember, each case study is unique, and the above steps provide a general guideline. Adapt them to fit the specific requirements and nuances of your case study research.

References

Brown, P. A. (2008). A review of the literature on case study research.ย Canadian Journal for New Scholars in Education/Revue canadienne des jeunes chercheures et chercheurs en education,ย 1(1).

Cousin, G. (2005). Case study research.ย Journal of geography in higher education,ย 29(3), 421-427.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies.

Hays, P. A. (2003). Case study research. Inย Foundations for researchย (pp. 233-250). Routledge.

What is Focus Group Discussion Research Technique

Bloganuary writing prompt
Think back on your most memorable road trip.

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Focus Group Discussion (FGD) is a qualitative research technique that plays a crucial role in exploring and understanding complex social phenomena. This method brings together a small, diverse group of participants to discuss a specific topic under the guidance of a skilled moderator. Through open and dynamic interaction, FGDs provide researchers with rich insights into participants’ perspectives, attitudes, and experiences.

Key Components of Focus Group Discussions:

  1. Participants:
    • FGDs typically involve 6 to 12 participants who share common characteristics relevant to the research question. Participants are selected to ensure diversity in opinions and experiences.
  2. Moderator:
    • A skilled moderator facilitates the discussion, guiding participants through the conversation while encouraging openness. Moderators use a predetermined set of open-ended questions to explore various aspects of the research topic.
  3. Focus Group Guide:
    • A carefully crafted set of questions, known as a focus group guide, serves as the backbone of the discussion. These questions are open-ended, allowing participants to express their thoughts freely.
  4. Setting:
    • FGDs are conducted in a conducive environment that promotes open communication. The setting should be comfortable, neutral, and free from distractions to encourage participants to share their thoughts openly.
  5. Recording:
    • Sessions are often recorded, either through audio or video, to capture the richness of the discussion. This allows researchers to revisit and analyze the data more thoroughly.

The Focus Group Discussion Process:

  1. Introduction:
    • The session begins with a warm welcome and an introduction to the purpose of the discussion. Participants are encouraged to express their opinions freely, creating a comfortable atmosphere.
  2. Warm-up Questions:
    • To ease participants into the discussion, moderators start with broad and non-threatening questions. This helps build rapport and sets the tone for more in-depth exploration.
  3. Main Discussion:
    • The moderator guides the conversation using the focus group guide, allowing participants to express their thoughts and react to each other’s comments. This interactive process often leads to the emergence of shared understandings and diverse perspectives.
  4. Probing and Clarification:
    • Moderators use probing techniques to delve deeper into participants’ responses, seeking clarification and encouraging a more detailed exploration of ideas. This helps uncover nuanced insights.
  5. Closing:
    • The session concludes with a summary of key points and a debriefing with participants. This provides an opportunity for participants to reflect on the discussion and ask any final questions.

Advantages of Focus Group Discussions:

  1. Rich Data:
    • FGDs generate in-depth qualitative data, capturing the complexity and nuances of participants’ perspectives.
  2. Group Dynamics:
    • Interactions within the group can reveal social dynamics, shared beliefs, and divergent opinions that may not surface in individual interviews.
  3. Real-time Insights:
    • The dynamic nature of FGDs allows researchers to capture real-time reactions and responses, providing a more authentic understanding of participants’ perspectives.
  4. Exploratory Nature:
    • FGDs are particularly useful in the early stages of research when exploring new topics or generating hypotheses.
  5. Cost-Effective:
    • Compared to one-on-one interviews, FGDs can be a more cost-effective way to gather insights from multiple participants simultaneously.

Challenges and Considerations:

  1. Group Influence:
    • Group dynamics may lead to conformity or hesitation in expressing dissenting opinions. Skilled moderation is crucial to mitigate these effects.
  2. Moderator Bias:
    • Moderators must be aware of their biases and strive to maintain neutrality to ensure the discussion remains participant-driven.
  3. Data Analysis Complexity:
    • Analyzing FGD data can be complex due to the multitude of perspectives. Thorough analysis involves identifying patterns, themes, and divergent viewpoints.
  4. Generalization Limitations:
    • Findings from FGDs are often context-specific and may not be easily generalized to larger populations. Therefore, researchers should complement FGDs with other research methods for a more comprehensive understanding.

In conclusion, Focus Group Discussions are a powerful qualitative research technique that provides valuable insights into the social, cultural, and behavioral dimensions of a research question. When conducted with careful planning, skilled moderation, and thoughtful analysis, FGDs contribute significantly to the depth and richness of qualitative research. Researchers across various disciplines continue to embrace this method as an essential tool in unraveling the complexities of human experience and perception.

References

Bohnsack, R. (2004). Group discussion and focus groups.ย A companion to qualitative research, 214-221.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies.

Dehalwar, K., & Singh, J. (2015). A Critical Evaluation of the main Causes of Water Management Problems in Indian Urban Areas.ย International Research Journal of Environment Sciences. 4,ย 8.

Hennink, M. M. (2013).ย Focus group discussions. Oxford University Press.

Moretti, F., van Vliet, L., Bensing, J., Deledda, G., Mazzi, M., Rimondini, M., … & Fletcher, I. (2011). A standardized approach to qualitative content analysis of focus group discussions from different countries.ย Patient education and counseling,ย 82(3), 420-428.

O. Nyumba, T., Wilson, K., Derrick, C. J., & Mukherjee, N. (2018). The use of focus group discussion methodology: Insights from two decades of application in conservation.ย Methods in Ecology and evolution,ย 9(1), 20-32.

Sharma, S. N., Chatterjee, S., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Challenges and Opportunities.ย Think India Journal,ย 26(1), 7-15.

Wong, L. P. (2008). Focus group discussion: a tool for health and medical research.ย Singapore Med J,ย 49(3), 256-60.

Conflict Theory of Social Change

By Shashiaknt Nishant Sharma

Conflict theory is a sociological perspective that emphasizes the role of conflict and competition in social processes and structures. It posits that society is characterized by various forms of inequality and social conflict, primarily driven by struggles for power, resources, and access to opportunities.

Conflict theory is a sociological perspective that examines society through the lens of power dynamics, social inequality, and the struggle for resources. Rooted in the ideas of Karl Marx, conflict theorists assert that society is marked by inherent conflicts arising from the unequal distribution of wealth, power, and social privilege. They contend that these disparities lead to ongoing struggles between different social groups, such as the bourgeoisie (ruling class) and the proletariat (working class). Conflict theory challenges the notion that society functions harmoniously, as suggested by functionalism, and instead posits that social order is maintained through the dominance of one group over another. The perspective emphasizes the role of social institutions in perpetuating these power imbalances, arguing that institutions such as education, law, and media often serve to maintain and legitimize the interests of the dominant class.

Central to conflict theory is the concept of class struggle, where economic disparities drive social conflict and shape the course of history. The theory extends beyond class conflict to include other forms of social inequality, such as those based on race, gender, and ethnicity. Conflict theorists view social change as a result of these ongoing struggles, with revolutions and social movements emerging as mechanisms for challenging existing power structures and fostering a more equitable society. By highlighting the role of conflict and tension in shaping social order, conflict theory provides a critical framework for understanding the complexities of societal dynamics and the interplay between different social groups.

Here are key points associated with conflict theory in sociology:

  1. Inequality and Power:
    • Society is marked by inherent inequality in the distribution of resources, wealth, and power.
    • Power is a central force shaping social relationships and structures.
  2. Social Classes:
    • Conflict theorists view society as divided into distinct social classes based on economic and social differences.
    • Class struggle is a fundamental aspect of social dynamics, with the bourgeoisie (owners) and proletariat (workers) being key classes in capitalist societies.
  3. Capitalism and Exploitation:
    • Conflict theorists critique capitalism, highlighting the exploitation of the working class by the capitalist class.
    • The profit motive and pursuit of self-interest contribute to social conflict.
  4. Conflict as a Driving Force:
    • Social change is often driven by conflict, as opposing forces struggle for dominance.
    • Contradictions and tensions within society lead to change and transformation.
  5. Institutions as Tools of Dominance:
    • Social institutions, such as education, law, and the media, are seen as tools that perpetuate and legitimize existing power structures.
    • These institutions may reinforce the interests of the dominant class.
  6. Ideology and Hegemony:
    • Conflict theorists explore how dominant ideologies serve the interests of the ruling class.
    • Hegemony refers to the ability of the ruling class to maintain its dominance by shaping societal norms, values, and beliefs.
  7. Social Change and Revolution:
    • Conflict theorists anticipate that societal conflict may lead to revolutionary change.
    • Revolutions are seen as mechanisms to overthrow existing power structures and create more equitable societies.
  8. Symbolic Interactionism:
    • In the realm of symbolic interactionism, conflict theorists focus on how symbols and language perpetuate and reflect power imbalances.
  9. Critique of Functionalism:
    • Conflict theory often contrasts with functionalism, which emphasizes the stability and equilibrium of society.
    • Conflict theorists argue that functionalism overlooks social inequalities and power struggles.
  10. Feminist Perspectives:
    • Feminist sociologists often draw on conflict theory to analyze gender inequalities and power imbalances between men and women.
  11. Global Perspective:
    • On a global scale, conflict theorists may analyze the dynamics of imperialism, neocolonialism, and global inequalities.

Understanding conflict theory provides insights into the dynamics of social change, inequality, and power struggles within societies. It offers an alternative perspective to functionalism, emphasizing the role of conflict in shaping social structures and institutions.

References

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fate of Slums of Bhopal-A Tale of Struggle and Resilience. Think India Journal26(4), 12-18.

Sharma, S. N. (2016). Introduction to Sociology. New Perspectives in Sociology and Allied Fields, 1.

The Power of Meta-Analysis in Research

Daily writing prompt
What is your mission?

By Kavita Dehalwar

Meta-analysis, a statistical technique that combines and synthesizes data from multiple independent studies, has become a cornerstone in scientific research. By aggregating findings from various studies on a specific topic, meta-analysis provides a more comprehensive and robust understanding of the subject matter. This article explores the concept of meta-analysis, its methodology, advantages, and limitations, emphasizing its crucial role in advancing research across diverse disciplines.

Understanding Meta-Analysis:

Meta-analysis involves the systematic review and quantitative synthesis of data from multiple studies. The primary goal is to pool data to draw more accurate and reliable conclusions than those possible from individual studies alone. This approach helps researchers overcome limitations associated with small sample sizes, variability in study designs, and potential publication biases.

Key Components of Meta-Analysis:

  1. Literature Review: Conducting a thorough literature review is the first step in meta-analysis. Researchers identify relevant studies, ensuring a comprehensive understanding of the existing body of work on the chosen topic.
  2. Study Selection Criteria: Establishing clear inclusion and exclusion criteria is crucial to ensure the selected studies are comparable and relevant to the research question. This step helps maintain the integrity of the meta-analysis.
  3. Data Extraction: Data from each included study are systematically extracted. This involves collecting information on study design, participant characteristics, interventions or exposures, outcomes, and statistical results.
  4. Effect Size Calculation: The effect size quantifies the magnitude of the relationship between variables or the intervention’s impact. Common effect size measures include odds ratios, risk ratios, and standardized mean differences.
  5. Statistical Analysis: Meta-analysis employs statistical techniques to combine the results of individual studies. Weighting is applied to account for study size, and heterogeneity tests assess the variability between studies.

Advantages of Meta-Analysis:

  1. Increased Statistical Power: Meta-analysis enhances statistical power by combining data from multiple studies, allowing researchers to detect smaller effect sizes that may be overlooked in individual studies.
  2. Generalizability: Pooling data from diverse studies increases the generalizability of findings, providing a more comprehensive understanding of the research question across different populations and contexts.
  3. Identifying Patterns and Trends: Meta-analysis enables the identification of patterns or trends that may not be evident in individual studies, offering a more holistic view of the research landscape.
  4. Resolution of Inconsistencies: Conflicting findings in individual studies can be reconciled through meta-analysis. By exploring sources of heterogeneity, researchers can identify factors contributing to discrepancies and refine their interpretations.

Limitations of Meta-Analysis:

  1. Publication Bias: Meta-analyses are susceptible to publication bias, as studies with significant or positive results are more likely to be published. This bias can distort the overall findings and affect the validity of the meta-analysis.
  2. Heterogeneity: Variability in study designs, participant characteristics, and methodologies can contribute to heterogeneity, challenging the synthesis of results. Researchers must carefully assess and address heterogeneity in their analyses.
  3. Quality of Included Studies: Meta-analyses are only as robust as the studies included. If the quality of the individual studies is low, the overall meta-analysis may be compromised.

Conclusion:

Meta-analysis stands as a powerful tool in the researcher’s arsenal, offering a methodical and quantitative approach to synthesizing evidence from diverse studies. While it has its limitations, when conducted rigorously, meta-analysis provides a valuable means of drawing more reliable conclusions and advancing our understanding of complex phenomena across various disciplines. As research methodologies continue to evolve, meta-analysis remains a key player in the pursuit of knowledge and scientific progress.

References

Dehalwar, K., & Singh, J. (2015). A Critical Evaluation of the main Causes of Water Management Problems in Indian Urban Areas.ย International Research Journal of Environment Sciences. 4,ย 8.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies.

Sharma, S. N. (2019). Review of most used urban growth models.ย International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET),ย 10(3), 397-405.

Sharma, S. N. Techniques of Meta-Analysis for Unlocking Knowledge.

Unpleasant happenings in a so-called ‘Culturally Developed State of Bhadraloks’

By Shankar Chatterjee

A great personality and freedom fighter once said, ‘What Bengal thinks today, India thinks tomorrow.’ Now, that sounds like a curse.
After 34 years of rule by the Left-front Government in West Bengal, industrial development suffered badly. One example I am citing out of many. “In the last three years (it means 2011,2012 & 2013), 90 large industries have closed down, including 26 jute mills and 28 tea gardens (Article by Sumit Mitra, The Economic Times, Aug 12, 2014).
Anyway, I visited WB for academic activities on a few occasions and came to know that, in general, the people are called โ€˜Bhadraloks,โ€™ meaning thorough gentlemen. The โ€˜Bhadraloksโ€™ with great hope, hype, and hoopla, changed the Leftist Government, and thus, the new Government has come to power, but from time to time, many leaders of the new ruling Government have proved that the State has been passing through awful days because of severe corruption. From time to time, different types of corruption have taken place in this State, which has penetrated deep roots. From the selection of teaching and non-teaching faculty in the schools, sand lifting, cattle sending to another country, coal scams, extortion (in Bengali called Tola Baji, which means earning easy money), etc., are now always in the news in the State. During Panchayat elections held in the State, unprecedented violence took place, including ballot boxes being found in the ponds. On the other hand, in recently concluded elections in different States, widespread violence didn’t occur, which the people of WB ( โ€˜Bhadraloksโ€™)should learn and know. Further, it seems ‘goonda giri,’ ‘rowdyism,โ€™ etc., have added another โ€˜feather’ to the so-called โ€˜culturally advanced State.โ€™ Several journalists were reportedly among those attacked and injured as violence broke out in West Bengal when voting took place for elections to 108 municipalities across 20 districts.
On January 5, 2024, many criminals attacked ED officials and CRPF officials in the State because they went to investigate corruption, for which the State is always in the news. The attack on the ED officials and CRPF is highly deplorable and seems law and order have collapsed in the State. We all know Bengal was divided on religious lines, and lakhs of refugees came to the State because of religious persecution. So, the State is burdened with a huge number of refugees.
Anyway, I visited across the country in recent years because of academic work and observed many Bengalis settled in different places, including Secunderabad and Hyderabad as the present places are better than their original place of residence, i.e., West Bengal. Various reports reveal that in Hyderabad and Secunderabad, around 7 lakh Bengalis are living.
Anyway, I think if this ruling Party of the State comes to the Central Government, Indians will watch the worst days. Like in WB, in almost all areas, to get a job, many have to pay a huge amount of money (in lakhs). Anyway, I hope one day, the State will be free from corruption.

S. Chatterjee, Hyderabad

References

Chakravartty, A. (2018). Understanding India: Bhadralok, Modernity and Colonial India.ย Indian Historical Review,ย 45(2), 257-285.

Chaudhuri, B. (1980). THE BHADRALOK AND RURAL DEVELOPMENT.ย Elite and Development, 149.

Guha, R. (1995). Subaltern and Bhadralok studies.

Sinha, S., & Bhattacharya, R. (1969). Bhadralok and Chhotolok in a rural area of West Bengal.ย Sociological bulletin,ย 18(1), 50-66.

A Note on Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana (SJSRY)

By: Kavita Dehalwar

Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana (SJSRY) is a government scheme in India aimed at promoting employment opportunities and improving the quality of life for urban poor individuals. It was launched on 1st December 1997, on the occasion of the 25th anniversary of India’s independence, and is part of the broader National Urban Livelihoods Mission (NULM).

Key Objectives of Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana:

  1. Employment Generation: The primary goal of SJSRY is to generate sustainable employment opportunities for the urban poor, with a specific focus on skill development and self-employment ventures.
  2. Skill Development: The scheme emphasizes the importance of skill enhancement and training for individuals from marginalized urban communities. By imparting relevant skills, the program aims to enhance employability and income-generating capabilities.
  3. Self-Employment: SJSRY promotes self-employment among the urban poor by providing financial assistance and support for starting small businesses or enterprises. This aspect of the program is crucial for fostering entrepreneurship and economic independence.
  4. Urban Poverty Alleviation: The scheme is designed to address the challenges of urban poverty by creating a conducive environment for income generation, thereby contributing to the overall improvement of living standards in urban areas.

Components of Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana:

The SJSRY is broadly divided into two sub-components:

  1. Urban Self-Employment Program (USEP): This component focuses on providing financial assistance and skill training to individuals interested in starting their own ventures. The financial aid is intended to cover a portion of the project cost.
  2. Urban Wage Employment Program (UWEP): UWEP is aimed at providing wage employment opportunities for the urban poor. This involves the creation of temporary employment through various community-based projects.

Implementation and Monitoring:

The implementation of the Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana involves collaboration between the central government, state governments, and urban local bodies. The program is monitored by the Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs, Government of India, to ensure effective implementation and adherence to the program’s objectives.

It’s important to note that policies and schemes may undergo changes and updates over time. For the most current and detailed information on the Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana, it is advisable to refer to official government sources or recent publications related to urban development in India.

References

Rajkonwar, A. B. (2005). Swama Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana: A study on effectiveness in Dibrugarh. SEDME (Small Enterprises Development, Management & Extension Journal)32(4), 23-42.

Sharma, S. N. (2020). A Review of Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana. Think India Journal23(1), 26-32.

Shobha, K. (2007). Performance of women beneficiaries of the Prime Minister’s Rozgar Yojana in Coimbatore City (Doctoral dissertation, Avinashilingam University for Women (India)).

Transforming Social Status: The Impact of Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme on Workers

By Kavita Dehalwar

This article explores the profound impact of the Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (MGNREGS) on the social status of rural workers in India. Launched in 2005, MGNREGS has emerged as a pivotal force in addressing unemployment and empowering marginalized communities. Through economic independence, inclusive opportunities, and a focus on gender equality, MGNREGS has catalyzed a positive shift in the social dynamics of rural areas. This abstract provides a concise overview of how MGNREGS has not only provided employment but has also played a transformative role in fostering skill development, women’s empowerment, and community cohesion. The scheme’s multi-faceted approach has contributed to breaking the cycle of poverty, challenging traditional norms, and creating pathways for sustainable development in rural India.

Introduction:

The Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (MGNREGS), launched in 2005, has been a landmark initiative in India aimed at providing employment opportunities to rural households, thereby enhancing their economic and social well-being. Beyond its immediate economic impact, the scheme has played a pivotal role in transforming the social status of workers, particularly those from marginalized and disadvantaged communities. This article delves into the ways in which MGNREGS has contributed to changing the social status of workers in the rural areas of India.

  1. Empowerment through Economic Independence:MGNREGS guarantees 100 days of wage employment per year to every rural household, with a focus on unskilled manual labor. This provision not only addresses the issue of unemployment but also empowers workers economically. By providing a steady source of income, the scheme contributes to breaking the cycle of poverty and dependency, allowing workers to achieve a certain level of financial independence.
  2. Inclusion of Marginalized Communities:One of the significant impacts of MGNREGS is the inclusion of marginalized communities, including Scheduled Castes (SCs) and Scheduled Tribes (STs), in the workforce. These communities, historically excluded from mainstream opportunities, have found a platform for social and economic mobility through the scheme. As a result, their social status has seen a positive shift, as they actively participate in the economic development of their communities.
  3. Gender Equality and Women Empowerment:MGNREGS has been instrumental in promoting gender equality and women’s empowerment in rural areas. The scheme encourages the participation of women in the workforce by providing equal wages for equal work. This not only enhances the economic status of women but also challenges traditional gender norms. As women actively engage in the workforce, they gain greater visibility and recognition in their communities, contributing to a gradual shift in social attitudes towards women’s roles and capabilities.
  4. Skill Development and Capacity Building:Beyond providing employment, MGNREGS focuses on skill development and capacity building of workers. Through the acquisition of new skills, workers can diversify their abilities and contribute to various sectors, potentially opening up avenues for entrepreneurship. The acquisition of skills not only improves their employability but also boosts their self-esteem and social standing within the community.
  5. Community Development and Social Cohesion:MGNREGS emphasizes community-driven development projects, fostering a sense of collective responsibility and social cohesion among workers. As communities come together to work on common projects such as water conservation, road construction, and afforestation, a shared sense of achievement develops. This collaborative spirit contributes to the overall social development of the community, breaking down social barriers and fostering a sense of unity among diverse groups.

Conclusion:

The Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme has gone beyond its primary objective of providing employment; it has become a catalyst for changing the social status of workers in rural India. By addressing issues of economic dependency, promoting inclusivity, empowering women, facilitating skill development, and fostering community development, MGNREGS has contributed significantly to transforming the lives of millions. As India continues to strive for inclusive and sustainable development, the role of schemes like MGNREGS becomes increasingly crucial in shaping a more equitable and empowered society.

References

Bhowmik, I., & Bose, P. (2014). Efficiency and Impact of MGNREGS in Tripura.ย Bhowmik I & P Bose, Efficiency and Impact of MGNREGS in Tripura, in Social Change and Development,ย 12(1).

Ghosh, S. (2017). Did MGNREGS improve financial inclusion?.ย Economic and Political Weekly, 106-114.

Pankaj, A. (2017). Shift in MGNREGS from UPA to NDA.ย Economic and Political Weekly, 59-68.

Sharma, S. N. (2016). Introduction to Sociology.ย New Perspectives in Sociology and Allied Fields, 1.

Sharma, S. N. (2014). Fate of Rural Sanitation Scheme.ย International Journal of Research (IJR),ย 1(2).

Sharma, S. N., Chatterjee, S., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Challenges and Opportunities.ย Think India Journal,ย 26(1), 7-15.

Turangi, S. (2022). Social Protection through MGNREGS: A Study of Rayalaseema Region in Andhra Pradesh.ย Journal of Rural Development, 102-119.

Vanitha, S. M., & Murthy, P. S. (2011). An economic analysis of MGNREG programme in Mysore district of Karnataka.ย Agricultural Economics Research Review,ย 24(conf), 415-422.

An Introduction to Ethnographic Research Methodology

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Ethnographic research methodology encompasses a holistic approach to studying human societies and cultures, emphasizing immersion, participant observation, and contextual understanding. The following key steps and considerations are integral to conducting ethnographic research:

1. Selecting the Research Site:

  • Selection Criteria: Identifying a community or setting that aligns with the research objectives and offers ample opportunities for participant observation and data collection.
  • Access and Entry: Navigating entry into the chosen community through establishing rapport, building trust, and gaining permission for observation.

2. Immersion and Participant Observation:

  • Long-term Engagement: Spending an extended period within the community to comprehend its social dynamics, rituals, and everyday life.
  • Observation Techniques: Actively participating in the daily activities of the community while noting and documenting behavioral patterns, language use, and cultural practices.

3. Establishing Relationships and Conducting Interviews:

  • Building Trust: Cultivating meaningful relationships with community members to facilitate open and candid discussions.
  • Interviews and Conversations: Conducting formal and informal interviews to gather personal narratives, experiences, and interpretations.

4. Data Collection and Analysis:

  • Multifaceted Data Sources: Utilizing a variety of sources, including field notes, audiovisual recordings, and artifacts, to capture the complexity of the community’s culture.
  • Thick Description: Providing detailed and context-rich descriptions of observed behaviors, social interactions, and cultural phenomena.

5. Interpretation and Representation:

  • Cultural Interpretation: Analyzing the collected data to discern cultural norms, values, and belief systems within the community.
  • Ethical Representation: Ensuring that the portrayal of the community and its members remains respectful, authentic, and devoid of stereotypes.

6. Ongoing Reflexivity and Iterative Process:

  • Reflexive Practice: Continuously reflecting on the researcher’s positionality, biases, and the impact of their presence on the community.
  • Iterative Analysis: Iteratively revisiting the data, interpreting it through different lenses, and refining the understandings of the community.

By meticulously following these methodological guidelines, ethnographic research aims to provide comprehensive insights into the intricate tapestry of human culture and society, unraveling perspectives and narratives that might otherwise remain concealed.

In the intricate realm of social sciences, ethnographic research stands as a cornerstone methodology, offering a unique lens to understand and interpret human behavior, culture, and society. It’s a tapestry of exploration woven through immersive fieldwork, deep engagement, and empathetic understanding. Let’s embark on an introductory journey into this captivating methodology.

Understanding Ethnography:

At its core, ethnography is more than a research method; it’s an approach that seeks to comprehend the complexities of human experiences within their natural settings. Originating from anthropology, ethnography has expanded its horizons, finding applications in sociology, psychology, and various interdisciplinary fields.

Immersion and Participant Observation:

Central to ethnography is the practice of participant observation, where researchers immerse themselves in the community or culture under study. This immersive approach involves living amongst the individuals being studied, actively engaging in their daily activities, rituals, and interactions. By becoming a part of the social fabric, researchers gain profound insights and a nuanced understanding of the culture.

Data Collection and Tools:

Ethnographic research relies on a rich array of qualitative data collection methods. These may include in-depth interviews, participant diaries, field notes, audiovisual recordings, and even artifacts. The data collected isnโ€™t limited to what is said but also encompasses non-verbal cues, routines, traditions, and the broader context of social interactions.

Reflexivity and Subjectivity:

Ethnographers acknowledge their subjectivity and positionality in the research process. They reflect upon their own biases, assumptions, and preconceptions that might influence their observations and interpretations. This self-awareness allows researchers to strive for objectivity while recognizing the inevitability of their subjective perspectives.

Analysis and Interpretation:

Analyzing ethnographic data is a nuanced and iterative process. Researchers engage in coding, categorizing, and identifying patterns within the collected information. The interpretations often unfold gradually, leading to deeper insights into the culture or community being studied.

Ethical Considerations:

Ethnographers navigate a complex ethical terrain. Informed consent, confidentiality, and the portrayal of participants in an accurate and respectful manner are pivotal. Ethical guidelines ensure the protection of the individuals involved and the integrity of the research.

Challenges and Opportunities:

Ethnographic research isnโ€™t without challenges. Time constraints, access to communities, and the researcherโ€™s potential insider-outsider status within a culture can pose hurdles. However, these challenges offer opportunities for growth, fostering resilience and adaptability in the research process.

The Evolving Landscape:

In a rapidly changing world, ethnography adapts. Digital ethnography has emerged, exploring online communities and digital spaces, expanding the boundaries of traditional fieldwork. Additionally, interdisciplinary collaborations have enriched ethnographic studies, bringing together diverse perspectives and methodologies.

Conclusion:

Ethnographic research methodology embodies the art of understanding societies and cultures from within. It thrives on the empathetic connection between researcher and participant, unraveling the tapestry of human experiences. As we delve deeper into this immersive approach, we uncover not just facts, but narratives, emotions, and the essence of what it means to be human.

References

Ouroussoff, A. (2020). What is an ethnographic study?. In Inside Organizations (pp. 35-58). Routledge.

Sharma, S. N., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). โ€ชEthnographic Study of Equity in Planning – Case of Slums of Ranchiโ€ฌhttps://scholar.google.com/citations?view_op=view_citation&hl=en&user=ucXErnEAAAAJ&citation_for_view=ucXErnEAAAAJ:_FxGoFyzp5QC

Wright, C. (2014). School processesโ€”an ethnographic study. In gender and ethnicity in schools (pp. 191-215). Routledge.

Benefits of Open Access Publication Database ScienceOPEN

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

ScienceOpen is an open-access research networking platform that aims to foster collaboration and visibility in the scientific community. Please note that the features and benefits of platforms like ScienceOpen may evolve over time, so it’s a good idea to check the latest information on their website or other reliable sources. Here are some potential benefits associated with ScienceOpen:

  1. Open Access Content: ScienceOpen provides access to a wide range of open-access scholarly content, including articles, conference proceedings, and other academic materials. Open access promotes the free dissemination of knowledge and facilitates collaboration among researchers.
  2. Interdisciplinary Research: The platform is designed to break down disciplinary silos by covering a broad spectrum of research areas. This can encourage interdisciplinary collaboration, allowing researchers from different fields to discover and engage with each other’s work.
  3. Discoverability and Visibility: Researchers can enhance the visibility of their work by sharing and promoting their publications on ScienceOpen. The platform provides tools for researchers to create profiles, showcase their publications, and connect with other researchers, potentially increasing the impact of their research.
  4. Post-Publication Peer Review: ScienceOpen supports post-publication peer review, enabling researchers to contribute comments, reviews, and discussions on published articles. This transparent and collaborative review process can provide additional insights and perspectives on the research.
  5. Research Networking: The platform facilitates networking among researchers by allowing them to connect with peers, follow their work, and stay updated on the latest research in their fields of interest. Building a professional network is crucial for collaboration and staying informed about advancements in specific areas.
  6. Altmetrics and Impact Tracking: ScienceOpen provides metrics to help researchers track the impact of their work. This includes traditional citation metrics as well as alternative metrics (altmetrics) that consider the broader influence of research through social media, online discussions, and other channels.
  7. Integration with ORCID: ScienceOpen integrates with ORCID, a persistent digital identifier for researchers. This integration helps ensure proper attribution of research contributions and enhances the credibility and accuracy of researchers’ profiles.
  8. Custom Collections and Projects: Researchers and institutions can create custom collections or projects on ScienceOpen to curate and organize research content. This feature allows for the creation of thematic collections, making it easier for users to discover relevant research within specific topics.

For Publishers

ScienceOpen offers content hosting, context building and marketing services for publishers. See our tailored offerings

For Institutions

ScienceOpen offers state-of-the-art technology and a range of solutions and services

For Researchers

Make an impact and build your research profile in the open with ScienceOpen

It’s important to verify the current features and benefits of ScienceOpen by visiting their official website or contacting them directly, as the platform may have introduced new functionalities or undergone changes since my last update.

References

Aspesi, C., & Brand, A. (2020). In pursuit of open science, open access is not enough.ย Science,ย 368(6491), 574-577.

Burgelman, J. C., Pascu, C., Szkuta, K., Von Schomberg, R., Karalopoulos, A., Repanas, K., & Schouppe, M. (2019). Open science, open data, and open scholarship: European policies to make science fit for the twenty-first century.ย Frontiers in big data,ย 2, 43.

Gonzรกlez, A. G. (2005). Open science: open source licenses in scientific research.ย NCJL & Tech.,ย 7, 321.

Sharma, S. N. (2023). Understanding Citations: A Crucial Element of Academic Writing.

Stodden, V. C. (2011). Trust your science? Open your data and code.

An Insight into Public Space and Women in India

By Kavita Dehalwar

This article delves into the complex relationship between women and public space in India. It explores the historical context, cultural influences, and contemporary challenges that shape women’s experiences in public spaces. Drawing on academic research, governmental reports, and advocacy literature, this article aims to shed light on the various issues women face and the potential solutions to create more inclusive and safe public spaces.

Introduction:

Public spaces are vital components of any society, providing arenas for social interaction, economic activities, and cultural expression. However, women’s experiences in public spaces can be profoundly shaped by cultural norms, historical factors, and social expectations. This article examines the multifaceted nature of women’s engagement with public spaces in India, drawing on academic studies, government reports, and advocacy literature.

Historical Context:

To understand the present dynamics, it is crucial to examine the historical context. India’s rich history is marked by patriarchal structures and gender-based hierarchies that have influenced societal attitudes towards women’s mobility and presence in public spaces. Cultural norms, religious beliefs, and traditional gender roles have collectively contributed to shaping the expectations around women’s behavior in public.

Research Findings:

Numerous studies highlight the challenges women face in public spaces in India. A study conducted by [Author et al., Year] found that street harassment is a pervasive issue, with a significant number of women reporting experiences of verbal abuse, unwanted advances, and intimidation. Another study by [Author et al., Year] examined the impact of public transportation on women’s mobility, revealing concerns about safety, harassment, and lack of gender-sensitive infrastructure.

The study by Sharma (2014) titled “Urban forms in planning and design” provides insights into the intricate relationship between urban planning and the design of public spaces. Sharma emphasizes the importance of understanding urban forms in shaping the environment and influencing social interactions. This perspective is crucial when examining the challenges faced by women in public spaces, as the design and planning of urban areas play a significant role in creating safe and inclusive environments.

Dehalwar (Year) expands on the dynamics of peri-urban areas, highlighting the interface between urban and rural realms. Understanding the characteristics of peri-urban spaces is essential when exploring women’s safety in areas undergoing rapid urbanization. This aligns with Mahadevia and Lathia’s (2019) study on women’s safety and public spaces, which specifically focuses on the Sabarmati riverfront in India. The lessons drawn from this case study contribute to the broader discourse on urban planning and women’s safety.

Chhibber’s (2002) research delves into the political participation of women in India, emphasizing the role of the household and public space. The findings underscore the interconnectedness of private and public spheres, indicating that the challenges women face in public spaces are intertwined with broader socio-political dynamics. This perspective is reinforced by Fernandes (1997), who explores the intersections of gender, family, and working-class politics in India, providing a holistic understanding of women’s experiences.

Roy and Bailey’s (2021) study on safety, public space, and the male gaze in Kolkata contributes to the analysis by addressing the nuanced ways in which women negotiate safety. The study recognizes the impact of societal perceptions and the male gaze on women’s experiences in public spaces, adding a cultural dimension to the discourse.

Arefi and Meyers (2003) provide a theoretical perspective on what constitutes “public” in public space, drawing from the case of Visakhapatnam, India. This theoretical framework is relevant when examining the challenges women face in claiming their space within the public realm. The definition of public space and its accessibility are critical elements influencing women’s sense of safety and inclusion.

Government Initiatives:

Recognizing the need for safer public spaces, the Indian government has implemented various initiatives to address the issues faced by women. The “Safe City” projects in cities like Delhi and Mumbai aim to enhance security through increased surveillance, better street lighting, and the deployment of female police officers. However, the effectiveness of these initiatives remains a subject of debate, with critics pointing out the need for a more comprehensive and nuanced approach.

Challenges and Solutions:

While progress has been made, significant challenges persist. Cultural norms, inadequate law enforcement, and the lack of gender-sensitive urban planning continue to hinder women’s full participation in public life. Solutions require a multi-pronged approach, encompassing legal reforms, community engagement, and the integration of gender perspectives in urban planning. Additionally, fostering a cultural shift through education and awareness campaigns is crucial to challenging ingrained stereotypes and prejudices.

Conclusion:

In conclusion, the analysis of these diverse studies underscores the importance of a multidisciplinary approach when exploring women’s experiences in public spaces in India. Urban forms, political dynamics, cultural perceptions, and the interplay between private and public realms are integral components that shape the challenges and opportunities for women in the public sphere. Addressing these complexities requires collaborative efforts from urban planners, policymakers, sociologists, and activists to create safer and more inclusive public spaces for women in India. The relationship between women and public spaces in India is a complex interplay of historical, cultural, and contemporary factors. While challenges persist, ongoing efforts by the government, civil society, and grassroots organizations offer hope for positive change. By acknowledging the multifaceted nature of the issue and implementing comprehensive solutions, India can work towards creating more inclusive and safe public spaces for women.

References:

Arefi, M., & Meyers, W. R. (2003). What is public about public space: The case of Visakhapatnam, India.ย Cities,ย 20(5), 331-339.

Chhibber, P. (2002). Why are some women politically active? The household, public space, and political participation in India.ย International Journal of Comparative Sociology,ย 43(3-5), 409-429.

Dehalwar, K. Understanding the Dynamics of Peri-Urban Areas: Navigating the Interface Between Urban and Rural Realms.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies.

Fernandes, L. (1997). Beyond public spaces and private spheres: gender, family, and Working-class politics in India.ย Feminist studies,ย 23(3), 525-547.

Mahadevia, D., & Lathia, S. (2019). Women’s safety and public spaces: Lessons from the Sabarmati riverfront, India.ย Urban Planning,ย 4(2), 154-168.

Roy, S., & Bailey, A. (2021). Safe in the City? Negotiating safety, public space and the male gaze in Kolkata, India.ย Cities,ย 117, 103321.

Sharma, S. N. (2014). Urban forms in planning and design.ย International Journal of Research,ย 1(1), 7-16.

Sharma, S. N. (2016). Introduction to Sociology.ย New Perspectives in Sociology and Allied Fields, 1.

National Transit Pass System (NTPS)-โ€˜One Nation-One Passโ€™

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

The concept of a National Transit Pass System (NTPS) called ‘One Nation-One Pass’ refers to a unified, nationwide system for public transportation passes in a country. This system aims to streamline and simplify the process of using public transit by providing a single pass or card that can be used across different modes of transportation such as buses, trains, subways, trams, and more, regardless of the city or region within the country.

The ‘One Nation-One Pass’ initiative intends to make travel more convenient for commuters, tourists, and regular transit users by eliminating the need to purchase separate tickets or passes for different transportation networks. It promotes seamless mobility and ease of access, potentially encouraging more people to use public transit due to its simplicity and accessibility.

Implementing such a system involves collaboration between various transit authorities, government agencies, and technology providers to develop a unified infrastructure that can manage and integrate the different transit networks into a cohesive, interoperable system. This may include the use of smart cards, mobile apps, or other digital platforms that can store fare information, track usage, and enable payments across multiple transit services.

The benefits of ‘One Nation-One Pass’ include reducing administrative complexities, improving commuter experience, potentially lowering travel costs, and encouraging more sustainable modes of transportation. However, the implementation may involve challenges related to technological integration, data management, and coordination among different stakeholders.

The success of an NTPS like ‘One Nation-One Pass’ largely depends on effective planning, investment in infrastructure, collaboration between relevant authorities, and the adoption of user-friendly technologies to ensure a seamless and efficient transit experience for all users across the nation.

Union Minister for Environment, Forest and Climate Change and Labour and Employment Shri Bhupender Yadav today launched the National Transit Pass System (NTPS) pan-India ย to facilitate the seamless transit of timber, bamboo, and other forest produce across the country. Currently, the transit permits are issued for transport of timber and forest produce based on state specific transit rules. The NTPS is envisioned as a “One Nation-One Pass” regime, which will enable seamless transit across the country. This initiative will streamline the issuance of timber transit permits by providing a unified, online mode for tree growers and farmers involved in agroforestry across the country, contributing to the ease of doing business.

In order to create awareness and showcase the applicability and ease of using NTPS, special Pan Indian vehicles carrying forest produce were flagged-off by Minister of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, Shri Bhupender Yadav today. Two vehicles carrying timber and other forest produce from Gujarat and Jammu & Kashmir were flagged-off which are bound for West Bengal and Tamil Nadu. The QR coded transit permits generated under NTPS will allow check gates across various states to verify the validity of the permits and allow seamless transit.

On the occasion of the flag-off event, Shri Bhupender Yadav expressed that this marks a historic achievement with the nationwide implementation of the NTPS. He said NTPS will help strengthen the journey towards greater transparency which is Prime Minister Shri Narendra Modijiโ€™s  guarantee for Indiaโ€™s development. Shri Yadav said this initiative is poised to facilitate the seamless transportation of timber and various forest products across the country. He said its impact extends beyond merely encouraging agroforestry and tree farming; it also promises to incentivize the entire value chain.

Additionally, the Union Minister highlighted several other recent initiatives by the Ministry, such as the Indian Forest and Wood Certification Scheme and the Trees Outside Forest Initiative. These endeavours collectively aim to boost agroforestry practices in the nation.

Shri Ashwini Kumar Choubey, the Minister of State for Environment, Forest, and Climate Change, emphasized that the NTPS is a game-changer for agroforestry and trees outside the forest. Launched to streamline the transit of timber and other forest products, it is expected to enhance the ease of doing business in this sector. Secretary, Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, Smt. Leena Nadan and Director General of Forests and Special Secretary, Shri. Chandra Prakash Goyal were present during the flag-off event.

Prior to the introduction of NTPS, obtaining transit permits from different states along the route was a time-consuming process, causing hurdles in transporting timber and forest products across the states. Each state has its own transit regulations which meant that in order to transport timber or forest produce across states, one was required to get a separate transit pass issued in each state. NTPS offers seamless transit permits, managing records for both inter-state and intra-state transportation of timber, bamboo and other forest produce obtained from various sources like private lands, government owned forest and private depots.

NTPS is designed for user convenience, featuring desktop and mobile applications for easy registration and permit applications. Transit permits will be issued for tree species which are regulated, while the users can self-generate No Objection Certificates for exempted species. Presently, 25 States and Union Territories have embraced the unified permit system, streamlining interstate business operations for producers, farmers, and transporters. This move is expected to provide a significant impetus to the agroforestry sector. The NTPS can be accessed at https://ntps.nic.in .

***

References

Lodhi, A. S., Sharma, S. N., Dehalwar, K., & Jaiswal, A. (2023). Framework for Road Safety Improvement Measures for Madhya Pradesh. Vision Zero: Systems, Approaches and Implementation, New Delhi. Blumsburry. https://doi.org/10.5281/zenodo.10396811

Khosa, M. M. (1995). Transport and popular struggles in South Africa.ย Antipode,ย 27(2), 167-188.

Ugboaja, P. C. (2010). The economic sustainability of Nigeriaโ€™s National Transport Policy.ย Journal of Academic Research in Economics (JARE), (3), 348-365.

NHAI Undertakes Road Safety Measures to Counter Reduced Visibility Due to Foggy Conditions

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

To counter reduced visibility on the National Highways due to onset of the winter season NHAI Chairman, Shri Santosh Kumar Yadav has directed NHAI field offices to undertake various mitigation measures. With reduced visibility due to foggy conditions posing significant risk to the safety of the National Highways users, these measures will help to avoid potential accidents that endanger the safety of highway users.

To enhance road safety during foggy conditions, mitigation measures have been classified under two heads of Engineering measures and Safety Awareness measures. The โ€˜Engineering measuresโ€™ include reinstalling missing/damaged road signs, rectifying faded or inadequate pavement markings, enhance visibility of safety devices by providing reflective markers, median markers, etc., providing transverse bar markings in habitations and accident-prone locations, ensuring functional blinkers at median openings at under construction zones and hazardous locations, replacement of damaged hazard markers signs at diverging & merging locations.

Similarly, โ€˜Safety Awarenessโ€™ measures underline incorporating steps to alert highway users of the reduced visibility conditions. These measures include use of Variable Message Signs (VMS) or electronic signages to display โ€˜Foggy Weather Alertsโ€™ and speed limit messages. Use of Public Address System warning commuters about driving speed limit of 30 km/hr in foggy areas. Use of electronic billboards, radio, and social media for public service announcements on Toll Plazas, Wayside Amenities during foggy conditions and installation of reflective tapes on full width of vehicles on the highways.

The guidelines also encourage NHAI officials to create awareness among highway users to use blinkers and follow traffic rules. In addition, safety awareness pamphlets will also be distributed to commuters crossing toll plaza with a contact number to share information about foggy conditions and assist in case of accidents.

In addition, NHAI field offices have been directed to undertake Nighttime Highway inspection on weekly basis by team consisting of NHAI officials, Independent Engineers, Concessionaire/Contractor to assess visibility on highway and identify locations for installing additional provisions as required. Also, Highway Patrol vehicles will be stationed near dense foggy stretches. The highway operation and maintenance team will carry red/green blinking baton for guiding traffic in case of accident and establish seamless collaboration with local law enforcement, ambulance services, and municipal authorities. NHAI team will also conduct joint drills and exercises to ensure efficient coordination during fog-related emergencies.

NHAI is committed to take all necessary steps to mitigate risk of travelling on National Highways during winter season and ensure a safe and seamless travel experience for the National Highway users.

Reduced visibility due to foggy conditions poses significant risks on the road. Here are several safety measures to consider:

  1. Reduced Speed: Slow down to a safe and manageable speed. Use your vehicle’s fog lights (if equipped) or low-beam headlights to improve visibility without creating glare or reflection off the fog.
  2. Increased Following Distance: Maintain a longer following distance between vehicles. Fog can distort perception, making it harder to judge distances accurately.
  3. Use of Hazard Lights: In extreme cases of low visibility, consider using hazard lights to make your vehicle more visible to others. However, in some areas, using hazard lights while driving is illegal, so be sure to check local laws.
  4. Avoid Sudden Movements: Signal well in advance of any intended maneuver, giving other drivers more time to react.
  5. Stay Focused: Concentrate on the road and avoid distractions. Turn off the radio or any other distractions that could divert your attention.
  6. Utilize Road Markings: Follow the road markings and use them as a guide to stay in your lane.
  7. Listen for Traffic: Roll down your window slightly to listen for traffic you might not be able to see.
  8. Plan Ahead: If possible, delay your trip until the fog lifts or use alternative routes with less traffic.
  9. Keep Windows Clear: Use your defroster and wipers to keep windows clear. Consider using your car’s heating system to prevent windows from fogging up on the inside.
  10. Stay Updated: Listen to local weather forecasts or use weather apps to stay informed about changing conditions and advisories.

Remember, it’s crucial to adapt your driving to the conditions you’re facing. In extremely dense fog where visibility is severely compromised, pulling off the road in a safe location and turning off your lights can prevent others from following your taillights and potentially causing an accident. Always prioritize safety in foggy conditions.

***

References

Agarwal, S., & Sharma, S. N. Universal Design to Ensure Equitable Society.ย International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR),ย 1.

Ali, F., Khan, Z. H., Khattak, K. S., & Gulliver, T. A. (2023). The effect of visibility on road traffic during foggy weather conditions.ย IET Intelligent Transport Systems.

Liu, Z., He, Y., Wang, C., & Song, R. (2020). Analysis of the influence of foggy weather environment on the detection effect of machine vision obstacles.ย Sensors,ย 20(2), 349.

Lodhi, A. S., Sharma, S. N., Dehalwar, K., & Jaiswal, A. (2023). Framework for Road Safety Improvement Measures for Madhya Pradesh. Vision Zero: Systems, Approaches and Implementation, New Delhi. Blumsburry. https://doi.org/10.5281/zenodo.10396811

Peng, Y., Abdel-Aty, M., Lee, J., & Zou, Y. (2018). Analysis of the impact of fog-related reduced visibility on traffic parameters.ย Journal of transportation engineering, Part A: Systems,ย 144(2), 04017077.

Sharma, S. N. (2005). Evaluation of the JnNURM Programme of Government of India for Urban Renewal.ย Think India Journal,ย 8(2), 1-7.

Shepard, F. D. (1996).ย Reduced visibility due to fog on the highwayย (Vol. 228). Transportation Research Board.

2023 – Air Quality Perspective in Delhi

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

The Commission for Air Quality Management in NCR and Adjoining Areas (CAQM), since its inception in 2021, through a series of firm steps, has initiated various policy measures and field actions towards abatement of air pollution in Delhi-NCR. 

Continual and concerted efforts of all the stakeholders round the year also in 2023 have further helped to improve the general air quality parameters in Delhi as compared to the past few years (barring the periods of very low anthropogenic, industrial and commercial activities during the Covid affected year 2020, owing to complete lockdowns and other restrictions), pursuant to various preventive and mitigative field actions through numerous statutory directions and orders of the Commission, covering all major sectors contributing to the overall air quality.

 Comparative air quality related parameters for the years starting 2018 onwards follow as tabulated under:

Month-wise Daily Avg. AQI for Delhi

Month201820192020202120222023
January328328286324279311
February243242241288225237
March203184128223217170
April222211110202255179
May217221144144212171
June202189123147190130
July104134841108784
August111866410793116
September1129811678104108
October269234266173210219
November335312328377320373
December360337332336319348

Barring 2020, the year 2023 witnessed 4 months (March, April, June and July) with best ever daily average AQI and 3 months (January, February and May) with second best daily average AQI during the entire period from 2018 to 2023. 

      Daily Avg. AQI for Delhi during the entire year

Year201820192020 2021 20222023
Daily Avg. AQI225215185209 209204

     The average daily AQI for Delhi during the entire year 2023 has been the best so far since 2018 and even before that, barring 2020, which saw an exceptional AQI owing to continued spells of lockdown and low anthropogenic activities round the year. 

Comparative PM10 and PM2.5 Concentrations

     As per IMD data, comparative daily average Particulate Matter emission concentration (PM2.5 and PM10) values in Delhi read as under:

YearDaily avg. PM10 (ยตgm/m3)Daily avg. PM2.5 (ยตgm/m3)
2018242114
2019217108
2020*18094
2021210104
202221198
2023205100

    * Covid Year

The Year 2023 has thus witnessed the lowest ever recorded daily average values for PM10 and the second best PM2.5 concentrations, barring the Covid affected 2020 with lowest anthropogenic activities.  

Comparative AQI Category status for Delhi

AQI CategoryNo. of Days
201820192020202120222023201820192020202120222023
Good(0-50)025131159182227197163206
Satisfactory(51-100)535995726560
Moderate(101-200) 10612112712495145
Poor(201-300) 114103758013077186159124144196 144 
Very Poor(201-300) 725649646667
Severe401-450) 2019132061320241524615
Severe +>450052402

As per the CPCB criteria for the air quality category based on gradation of the daily average AQI, the year 2023 witnessed the best ever โ€œGood to Moderateโ€ AQI days , registering a mark of  more than 200 days (barring Covid affected 2020).

The number of days with Severe โ€“ Severe + AQI were 15 during 2023, which is also the second-best figure for the period between 2018 โ€“ 2023.

Comparative Delhi AQI around Diwali Festival

YearPre-Diwali DayDiwali DayPost-Diwali Day
2018338281390
2019287337368
2020339414435
2021314382462
2022259312302
2023220218358

The above tabulation indicates best ever AQI in Delhi around the Diwali festival in 2023.

     The year 2023 also witnessed much lower levels of episodic events like farm burnings during paddy harvesting season, bursting of crackers during religious festivals and marriages/celebrations etc.  However, the benefit attributable to the same in Delhiโ€™s AQI, was nullified owing to much adverse climatic, meteorological, low temperature and calm wind conditions in the region, impeding effective dispersion of the pollutants and resulting in a spike in the daily average AQI during the winter months in particular.  Despite these factors, the overall daily average AQI during the year has been the best so far. 

ย ย ย ย  With persistent field level efforts and targeted policy initiatives for quantified results in the short/ medium/ long term, it is expected that air quality scenario over Delhi will see further gradual but marked improvement, year on year.

References

Amann, M., Purohit, P., Bhanarkar, A. D., Bertok, I., Borken-Kleefeld, J., Cofala, J., … & Vardhan, B. H. (2017). Managing future air quality in megacities: A case study for Delhi.ย Atmospheric environment,ย 161, 99-111.

Dehalwar, K. Understanding the Dynamics of Peri-Urban Areas: Navigating the Interface Between Urban and Rural Realms.

Goyal, P. (2003). Present scenario of air quality in Delhi: a case study of CNG implementation.ย Atmospheric Environment,ย 37(38), 5423-5431.

Kumar, A., & Goyal, P. (2011). Forecasting of daily air quality index in Delhi.ย Science of the Total Environment,ย 409(24), 5517-5523.

Mohan, M., & Kandya, A. (2007). An analysis of the annual and seasonal trends of air quality index of Delhi.ย Environmental monitoring and assessment,ย 131, 267-277.

Sharma, S. N. (2013). Sustainable development strategies and approaches.ย International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR),ย 2.

Sharma, S. N., & Biswas, A. (2016). Best practices for ensuring total sanitation.ย International Journal for Social Studies, ISSN, 2455-3220.

Sinha, J., & Kumar, N. (2019). Mortality and air pollution effects of air quality interventions in Delhi and Beijing.ย Frontiers in environmental science,ย 7, 15.

Tiwari, A., Gupta, R., & Chandra, R. (2021). Delhi air quality prediction using LSTM deep learning models with a focus on COVID-19 lockdown.ย arXiv preprint arXiv:2102.10551.

Crucial Role of Stakeholder Analysis

By Kavita Dehalwar

In the dynamic landscape of project management, understanding and engaging with stakeholders are critical components for success. Stakeholder analysis is a systematic process that helps identify, assess, and prioritize the individuals, groups, or organizations that can significantly impact or be impacted by a project. This method provides a strategic lens through which project managers can navigate complexities, align goals, and cultivate positive relationships.

Stakeholder analysis holds significant importance in the realm of project management due to its multifaceted contributions to the success and sustainability of projects. First and foremost, the process of stakeholder analysis ensures a comprehensive understanding of the project landscape by systematically identifying and categorizing all entities that may influence or be influenced by the project. This inclusivity ranges from internal stakeholders, such as project team members and sponsors, to external entities like clients, suppliers, regulatory bodies, and even the broader community.

Beyond mere identification, stakeholder analysis serves as a proactive risk management tool. By recognizing potential challenges and sources of resistance at an early stage, project managers can strategize and implement measures to mitigate risks effectively. This forward-thinking approach minimizes the likelihood of unforeseen obstacles derailing project progress, contributing to a smoother and more predictable project lifecycle.

The significance of stakeholder analysis is particularly pronounced in its role in relationship-building. Understanding the unique interests, expectations, and concerns of stakeholders allows project managers to tailor their communication and engagement strategies accordingly. By doing so, they create an environment conducive to positive relationships, collaboration, and stakeholder support. Effective engagement not only promotes a harmonious project atmosphere but also enhances the likelihood of obtaining the necessary resources and approvals throughout the project’s duration.

Strategic decision-making lies at the core of project success, and stakeholder analysis plays a pivotal role in achieving alignment of goals. By ensuring that the project’s objectives resonate with the interests and expectations of key stakeholders, project managers can make informed decisions that reflect a broader consensus. This alignment not only enhances the likelihood of project success but also contributes to a more harmonious working relationship with stakeholders.

In essence, stakeholder analysis matters because it goes beyond a mere checklist exercise. It provides a dynamic framework that guides project managers in understanding, engaging, and collaborating with stakeholders throughout the project lifecycle. The tailored insights derived from stakeholder analysis empower project managers to navigate complexities, anticipate challenges, and build a supportive network that is integral to the overall success of the project.

In this article, we will delve into the importance of stakeholder analysis and explore the key steps involved in this transformative process.

Why Stakeholder Analysis Matters:

  1. Comprehensive Identification:
    • Stakeholder analysis facilitates a comprehensive identification of all parties involved, ensuring that no influential entity is overlooked. Stakeholders extend beyond just project sponsors and team members; they include clients, end-users, regulatory bodies, and even the broader community.
  2. Understanding Influence and Interest:
    • Each stakeholder brings a unique combination of influence and interest to the project. Understanding the power dynamics and the level of interest stakeholders have in the project’s outcome is crucial. This insight helps prioritize efforts in managing relationships and communication strategies effectively.
  3. Mitigating Risks:
    • Stakeholder analysis serves as a proactive risk management tool. By identifying potential challenges and sources of resistance early on, project managers can devise strategies to mitigate risks and create a more resilient project environment.
  4. Alignment of Goals:
    • Successful projects are built on shared objectives. Stakeholder analysis enables project managers to align the project’s goals with the interests and expectations of key stakeholders. This alignment fosters a collaborative environment and enhances the likelihood of project success.
  5. Tailored Communication Strategies:
    • Different stakeholders have varied communication preferences and expectations. Stakeholder analysis allows project managers to tailor communication strategies to suit the needs of specific individuals or groups, ensuring that information is disseminated effectively and received positively.

Key Steps in Stakeholder Analysis:

  1. Identification:
    • Begin by creating a comprehensive list of potential stakeholders. This can include internal and external entities such as team members, sponsors, clients, suppliers, regulatory bodies, and the broader community.
  2. Assessment of Influence and Interest:
    • Evaluate the level of influence each stakeholder wields over the project and their level of interest. This assessment helps categorize stakeholders into groups such as high influence-high interest, low influence-high interest, high influence-low interest, and low influence-low interest.
  3. Mapping Power Dynamics:
    • Create a stakeholder map to visually represent power dynamics. This map helps project managers prioritize engagement efforts by focusing on stakeholders with high influence and high interest, while also considering those with high influence and low interest.
  4. Understanding Expectations and Concerns:
    • Engage with stakeholders to understand their expectations, concerns, and perspectives. This information is invaluable in tailoring project strategies and mitigating potential challenges.
  5. Developing a Stakeholder Management Plan:
    • Based on the analysis, create a stakeholder management plan that outlines strategies for engagement, communication, and issue resolution. This plan should be dynamic, evolving as the project progresses and stakeholder dynamics change.

Conclusion:

In the intricate web of project management, stakeholder analysis emerges as a beacon of strategic foresight and collaboration. By systematically identifying, assessing, and engaging with stakeholders, project managers pave the way for successful project outcomes. Recognizing the multifaceted nature of stakeholder relationships and incorporating these insights into project planning is not just a best practiceโ€”it’s a fundamental step towards project success in today’s interconnected and dynamic business environment.

References

Aaltonen, K. (2011). Project stakeholder analysis as an environmental interpretation process.ย International journal of project management,ย 29(2), 165-183.

Brugha, R., & Varvasovszky, Z. (2000). Stakeholder analysis: a review.ย Health policy and planning,ย 15(3), 239-246.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fate of Slums of Bhopal-A Tale of Struggle and Resilience.ย Think India Journal,ย 26(4), 12-18.

Dehalwar, K., & Singh, J. (2016). Challenges and strategies for the improvement of water management in Bhopal.ย European Scientific Journal,ย 12(2).

Dehalwar, K., & Singh, J. Determining the Role of Different Stakeholders Towards Sustainable Water Management within Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh.

Sharma, S. N., Chatterjee, S., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Challenges and Opportunities.ย Think India Journal,ย 26(1), 7-15.

Ramirez, R. (1999). Stakeholder analysis and conflict management. Inย Cultivating peace: conflict and collaboration in natural resource management. IDRC, Ottawa, ON, CA.

Varvasovszky, Z., & Brugha, R. (2000). A stakeholder analysis.ย Health policy and planning,ย 15(3), 338-345.

Techniques of Meta-Analysis for Unlocking Knowledge

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Meta-analysis is a powerful statistical method that combines the findings from multiple independent studies to generate more robust and reliable results than individual studies alone. This technique has gained popularity in various fields, including medicine, psychology, education, and social sciences. By synthesizing data from diverse studies, meta-analysis enables researchers to draw more accurate conclusions, identify patterns, and make informed decisions. In this article, we’ll delve into the techniques of meta-analysis and explore how it enhances the validity and generalizability of research findings.

A meta-analysis is a meticulous process that commences with an extensive and rigorous literature review. This phase is critical for identifying studies that contribute relevant data to the research question at hand. Researchers delve into databases, journals, and other scholarly sources to compile a comprehensive collection of studies related to their topic of interest.

To ensure the selection of high-quality studies, researchers establish clear inclusion and exclusion criteria. These criteria act as a set of guidelines, helping researchers sift through the multitude of available literature and pinpoint studies that align with the specific objectives of the meta-analysis. Inclusion criteria typically specify characteristics such as study design, participant demographics, intervention methods, and outcome measures. Conversely, exclusion criteria aid in excluding studies that may introduce confounding variables or deviate from the primary focus.

The chosen studies must exhibit a degree of homogeneity in terms of design, population characteristics, and outcome measures. This homogeneity is crucial for facilitating a meaningful synthesis of results. When studies share commonalities, it becomes more plausible to draw accurate and generalizable conclusions from the aggregated data. For instance, if one study implemented a specific intervention on a particular population using certain outcome measures, it is advantageous to include similar studies in the meta-analysis to enhance the comparability of results.

By adhering to stringent selection criteria, researchers aim to minimize the risk of introducing bias into their meta-analysis. Bias, whether stemming from differences in study design, participant characteristics, or measurement tools, can compromise the validity and reliability of the overall findings. Therefore, the emphasis on comparable studies ensures that the synthesis is built on a foundation of methodological consistency, enhancing the credibility of the meta-analytic results.

The literature review and study selection phase of a meta-analysis demand meticulousness and precision. By establishing clear inclusion and exclusion criteria and selecting studies that share key characteristics, researchers lay the groundwork for a robust synthesis of evidence. This methodological rigor not only strengthens the overall integrity of the meta-analysis but also contributes to the generation of more reliable and applicable insights for the broader scientific community.

  1. Literature Review and Study Selection:
    • A meta-analysis begins with a comprehensive literature review to identify relevant studies. Researchers must define clear inclusion and exclusion criteria to select studies that meet specific standards.
    • The chosen studies should be comparable in terms of design, population, and outcome measures to ensure a meaningful synthesis.
  2. Effect Size Calculation:
    • The effect size is a key parameter in meta-analysis, representing the magnitude of the relationship or difference of interest. It standardizes the findings across studies, allowing for meaningful comparisons.
    • Common effect size metrics include Cohen’s d for continuous outcomes and odds ratios or risk ratios for categorical outcomes.
  3. Heterogeneity Assessment:
    • Heterogeneity refers to the variability in study findings. Assessing heterogeneity is crucial for understanding the degree to which study results differ beyond what might be expected by chance.
    • Statistical tests, such as the Q-statistic and Iยฒ index, are employed to quantify and evaluate heterogeneity. High heterogeneity may necessitate subgroup analyses or meta-regression to explore potential sources of variation.
  4. Publication Bias Evaluation:
    • Publication bias occurs when studies with statistically significant results are more likely to be published, skewing the overall effect estimate. Researchers use techniques like funnel plots and statistical tests (e.g., Egger’s test) to detect and adjust for publication bias.
  5. Forest Plots:
    • Forest plots visually represent the effect sizes and confidence intervals of individual studies alongside the overall summary estimate. These plots aid in quickly identifying patterns, outliers, and the overall direction of the combined effect.
  6. Subgroup Analysis and Meta-Regression:
    • Subgroup analysis involves dividing studies into subcategories based on specific characteristics (e.g., age groups, intervention types). This allows researchers to explore variations in effect sizes across different subgroups.
    • Meta-regression extends this idea by examining the impact of continuous variables on effect sizes, providing a more nuanced understanding of study outcomes.
  7. Sensitivity Analysis:
    • Sensitivity analysis tests the robustness of meta-analysis results by examining the impact of excluding certain studies. This helps researchers determine the stability and reliability of the overall findings.
  8. Quality Assessment:
    • Assessing the quality of individual studies is essential. Common tools include the Cochrane Collaboration’s risk of bias tool for randomized controlled trials and the Newcastle-Ottawa Scale for observational studies. Quality assessment informs the interpretation of meta-analysis results.

Conclusion:

Meta-analysis, when conducted with precision and care, offers a valuable tool for synthesizing evidence across multiple studies. By employing these techniques, researchers can enhance the validity and reliability of their findings, providing a more comprehensive understanding of the phenomena under investigation. As the scientific community continues to evolve, meta-analysis remains an indispensable method for distilling knowledge and informing evidence-based decision-making across various disciplines.

References

Borenstein M, Hedges LV, Higgins JP, Rothstein HR. Introduction to meta-analysis. John Wiley & Sons; 2021 Apr 6.

Crits-Christoph P. A Meta-analysis. American journal of Psychiatry. 1992 Feb 2;149:151-8.

Dehalwar K, Sharma SN. Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. New Delhi: Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd; 2023.

Dehalwar K, Singh J. Current State of Water Management System: Case Review of Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh. International Journal of Civil, Structural, Environmental and Infrastructure Engineering Research and Development (IJCSEIERD). 2015;5(6):35-40.

Dehalwar K. The Slums of Bhopal: A Tale of Struggle and Resilience.

Field AP, Gillett R. How to do a metaโ€analysis. British Journal of Mathematical and Statistical Psychology. 2010 Nov;63(3):665-94.

Hedges LV, Olkin I. Statistical methods for meta-analysis. Academic press; 2014 Jun 28.

Sharma SN, editor. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd; 2016 Jun 3.

Urban Planning and Architecture of Indus Valley Civilisation

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

The planning of the Indus Valley Civilization, one of the ancient world’s most advanced and sophisticated urban cultures, showcases a remarkable level of organization and foresight. Flourishing around 2600 BCE to 1900 BCE in what is now present-day Pakistan and northwest India, the Indus Valley Civilization, also known as the Harappan Civilization, left behind a legacy of well-planned cities and advanced urban infrastructure. Though much of their writing system remains undeciphered, the archaeological evidence provides insights into their planning and organizational capabilities.

Urban Layout:

  1. Grid System: The cities of the Indus Valley Civilization were characterized by a well-defined grid system. Streets and lanes were laid out in a precise and orderly manner, often intersecting at right angles. This grid pattern is evident in major sites like Mohenjo-Daro and Harappa.
  2. Standardized Building Materials: The use of standardized bricks and dimensions for construction was a distinctive feature of their planning. Bricks of a consistent size (around 1:2:4 ratio) were used in construction, facilitating the creation of uniform structures.
  3. Well-Planned Streets and Drainage: The streets of the cities were carefully planned, with some being wide and straight, indicating a sense of urban planning. An advanced drainage system was integrated into the streets, with covered drains running beneath the streets to manage waste and stormwater.
  4. Residential and Commercial Zones: Cities were divided into various zones, with distinct areas for residential and commercial purposes. Residential areas typically featured multi-storied houses, while commercial zones had markets and workshops.

Architecture:

  1. Brick Architecture: The use of baked bricks for construction was a key architectural characteristic. These bricks provided strength and durability to the structures, and the uniform size facilitated efficient construction.
  2. Citadel and Lower Towns: Many Indus Valley cities featured a citadel, an elevated area believed to have housed important administrative and religious structures. The citadel was often surrounded by lower towns, suggesting a hierarchical organization of space.
  3. Public Buildings: The presence of public buildings, such as the Great Bath in Mohenjo-Daro, indicates a focus on communal activities and public hygiene. The Great Bath, with its carefully laid out steps and water management system, serves as evidence of advanced engineering skills.
  4. Granaries: Large, well-designed granaries have been discovered in various Indus Valley sites. These structures suggest an advanced understanding of agricultural practices and storage techniques.

Advanced Infrastructure:

  1. Water Management: The Indus Valley Civilization had a sophisticated water supply and drainage system. Cities had well-planned wells, reservoirs, and covered drains. The Great Bath, with its advanced water-tight brickwork, showcases their mastery of hydraulic engineering.
  2. Weights and Measures: The use of standardized weights and measures points to a highly organized economic system. Archaeological findings include cubical weights made of chert, a type of stone, suggesting a standardized system of trade and commerce.
  3. Trade and Connectivity: The presence of docks in some cities, such as Lothal, indicates an understanding of maritime trade. The civilization had extensive trade links with regions as far as Mesopotamia, suggesting a well-developed trade and transportation network.

Challenges and Decline:

While the Indus Valley Civilization was an impressive feat of urban planning, its decline is still a subject of debate among historians and archaeologists. Possible factors include environmental changes, such as the shifting course of the Indus River, and possible socio-political factors, but a definitive answer remains elusive.

In conclusion, the planning of the Indus Valley Civilization reflects an advanced understanding of urban organization, engineering, and social structures. The legacy of their planning can be seen in the archaeological remnants of their well-ordered cities, showcasing a level of sophistication that was unparalleled in its time.

References

Agarwal, Sarika, and Shashikant Nishant Sharma. “Universal Design to Ensure Equitable Society.” International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR) 1.

Dehalwar, Kavita. “Understanding the Dynamics of Peri-Urban Areas: Navigating the Interface Between Urban and Rural Realms.”

Gulzar, Sidra. “Settlement Scaling and Urban Infrastructure: A Comparative Approach to Settlements from the Ancient Indus society.” (2022).

Jansen, Michael. “Mohenjo-Daro, city of the Indus valley.” Endeavour 9.4 (1985): 161-169.

Kumar, Suneel, Muhammad Ali, and Pasand Ali Khoso. “Emergence and Decline of the Indus Valley Civilization in Pakistan.” Global Sociological Review 2 (2020): 9-22.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Urban forms in planning and design.” International Journal of Research 1.1 (2014): 7-16.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Sustainable development strategies and approaches.” International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR) 2 (2013).

Sindhav, Hetalben Dhanabhai. “The Indus Valley Civilisation (Harappan Civilisation).” (2016).

Exploring the Elements and Principles of Design: Building Blocks of Creative Design and Built Form

By Kavita Dehalwar

Design, whether in the realms of art, graphic design, architecture, or any other creative field, relies on a set of fundamental components that form the basis of visual aesthetics and functionality. These components are categorized into two main groups: the Elements of Design and the Principles of Design. Understanding and mastering these elements and principles is crucial for creating compelling and effective designs.

Elements of Design:

  1. Line: Lines are the basic building blocks of design. They can be straight or curved, vertical or horizontal, thick or thin. Lines guide the viewer’s eye and can convey a sense of movement, stability, or dynamism.
  2. Shape: Shapes are two-dimensional and can be geometric (circles, squares) or organic (natural shapes). They contribute to the overall structure and balance of a design.
  3. Form: Unlike shapes, forms are three-dimensional and have depth. They add a sense of volume and solidity to a design. Think of a cube or a sphere as examples of form.
  4. Color: Color is a powerful visual element that evokes emotions and sets the tone of a design. It involves the use of hues, shades, and tints. Colors can create contrast, harmony, or emphasis within a composition.
  5. Texture: Texture adds a tactile quality to a design. It can be perceived visually or through touch. Texture enhances the overall visual experience and can be smooth, rough, glossy, or matte.
  6. Space: Space refers to the area within, around, or between elements in a design. It plays a crucial role in determining the overall composition and balance. Effective use of positive and negative space is essential for a harmonious design.
  7. Typography: In graphic design, typography involves the arrangement and selection of fonts and typefaces. It contributes to the readability and visual appeal of text in a design.

Principles of Design:

  1. Balance: Balance is the distribution of visual weight in a design. It can be symmetrical, where elements are evenly distributed, or asymmetrical, where balance is achieved through contrast.
  2. Contrast: Contrast involves the juxtaposition of elements to create visual interest and emphasize certain aspects of a design. It can be achieved through variations in color, size, shape, or other visual elements.
  3. Emphasis: Emphasis directs the viewer’s attention to a focal point in a design. It can be achieved through color, contrast, size, or placement of elements.
  4. Unity: Unity brings a sense of cohesion and completeness to a design. It ensures that all elements work together harmoniously to convey a unified message or concept.
  5. Movement: Movement creates a sense of flow and direction in a design, guiding the viewer’s eye through the composition. It can be achieved through the arrangement of elements or the use of lines and shapes.
  6. Rhythm: Rhythm is the repetition or alternation of elements in a design. It creates a sense of visual tempo and can be regular, flowing, or progressive.
  7. Proportion: Proportion involves the relationship between the sizes of different elements in a design. It ensures that elements are appropriately sized in relation to each other, contributing to a balanced composition.

Understanding how to effectively utilize these elements and principles allows designers to communicate ideas, evoke emotions, and create visually appealing and functional compositions. Whether in the digital realm, on canvas, or in architectural structures, the elements and principles of design serve as the foundation for creative expression and aesthetic excellence.

References

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Shashikant Nishant Sharma. “Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies.” (2023).

Farrell, Alex, Stacy D. VanDeveer, and Jill Jรคger. “Environmental assessments: four under-appreciated elements of design.”ย Global Environmental Changeย 11.4 (2001): 311-333.

Fu, Katherine K., Maria C. Yang, and Kristin L. Wood. “Design principles: The foundation of design.”ย International design engineering technical conferences and computers and information in engineering conference. Vol. 57175. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 2015.

Martin, Robert C. “Design principles and design patterns.”ย Object Mentorย 1.34 (2000): 597.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Urban forms in planning and design.”ย International Journal of Researchย 1.1 (2014): 7-16.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Review of most used urban growth models.”ย International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET)ย 10.3 (2019): 397-405.

Watts, Ronald D. “The elements of design.”ย The design methodย (1966): 85-95.

National Action For Mechanised Sanitation Ecosystem (Namaste)

By Kavita Dehalwar

Under, โ€œNational Action for Mechanised Sanitation Ecosystem (NAMASTE)โ€, scheme, profiling/identification of Sewer/Septic Tanks Workers (SSWs) has commenced. Profiling/identification of SSWs is required to provide the benefits inter-alia, of health insurance under AB-PMJAY and for providing training and PPE Kits to SSWs and their family.

One of the key strategies under โ€œNational Action for Mechanised Sanitation Ecosystem (NAMASTE)โ€ scheme is to establish strong convergence amongst key stakeholders, including NSKFDC, Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs (MoHUA), to leverage their strengths and their specific roles to achieve the intended outcomes.

The earlier scheme โ€œSelf-Employment Scheme for Rehabilitation of Manual Scavengers (SRMS)โ€ has been subsumed in the NAMASTE scheme applicable from the year 2023-24 and therefore, the financial allocations for NAMASTE are available for activities ,which were available under SRMS, such as to provide capital subsidy, training, organising Workshops on Hazardous Cleaning of Sewers and Septic Tanks etc.

Under Swachh Bharat Mission – Urban (SBM-U) 2.0 launched on 1st October, 2021, a new component Used Water Management (UWM) is included with one of the objectives of eradication of hazardous entry into sewers and septic tanks, and sustaining elimination of manual scavenging for waste water management for Urban Local Bodies (ULBs) with population of less than 1 lakh.Under UWM component, Central Financial Assistance is provided to all the State Governments/ Union Territory Administrations for taking up following:-

  1. setting up of Sewage Treatment Plants(STPs)/STP-cum-Fecal Sludge Treatment Plants FSTP; for used water treatment.
  2. laying Interception and Diversion (I&D) structures including provision of pumping stations and pumping main/gravity main upto STP:
  3. iii. procuring adequate numbers of septic tank desludging equipments;
  4. deploying Digital (IT enabled) tools for real time monitoring of efficiency parameters during the operational phase of STPs and allied equipments.

In addition, NSKFDC is implementing various loan and non-loan based schemes. Under Loan based schemes, NSKFDC provides financial assistance to the Safai Karamcharis, Scavengers and their dependents for any viable income generating schemes including sanitation related activities and for education in India and abroad.

Social Welfare Schemes for Deprived Classes

By Track2Training

The focus of the Department of Social Justice and Empowerment (DoSJE) is the welfare of the poorest households of the socially, educationally and economically marginalized sections of the society including Scheduled Castes (SCs), Other Backward Classes, Senior Citizens, Victims of Alcoholism and Substance Abuse, Transgender Persons, Beggars, De-notified and Nomadic Tribes (DNTs), Economically Backward Classes (EBCs) and Economically Weaker Section (EWS). This Department is implementing several Schemes for their welfare across India including Puducherry and Karnataka. The details of the major schemes along with the last two yearsโ€™ fund allocations are given as Annexure.

This information was given by the Minister of State for Social Justice and Empowerment Shri A. Narayanaswamy in a written reply to a question in Rajya Sabha today.

 *****

MG/MS/VL

Annexure

Referred in part (a) of Rajya Sabha Unstarred Q. No. 2050 regarding Social welfare schemes for deprived classes for answer on 20.12.2023

Rs in Crore

 2021-222022-23
S.No.Programme/SchemesAllocated FundExpenditureAllocated FundExpenditure
1Post Matric Scholarship for SCs4196.591978.5656604392.5
2Scholarships for Higher Education for Young Achievers Scheme(SHREYAS)
National Fellowship for SCs125122.44159114.25
National Overseas Scholarship for SCs3549.075075.44
Top Class Education for SCs7084.7210885.67
Free Coaching for SCs3014.982718.41
3Pradhan Mantri Anusuchit Jaati Abhyuday Yojna
(PM-AJAY)
18001820.321062.39164
4Strengthening of machinery for Enforcement of Protection of Civil Right Act 1955 and Prevention of Atrocities Act, 1989600610.11500390.85
5Scheme of Residential Education for Students in High School in Targeted Area (SRESHTA)63.2138.048951.01
6Self Employment Scheme of Liberation & Rehabilitation of Scavengers43.31397011.1
7Pre Matric Scholarship for SCs and Others725570.39500208.62
8Venture Capital Funds for SCs70707035
9Pradhan Mantri Dakshta Aur Kushalta Sampann Hitgrahi (PM DAKSH) Yojana
 SC Component38.9433.21408.9
 OBC and others Component40.5435.02446.04
10Atal Vayo Abhuday Yojana(AVYAY)15096.54140117.54
11National Action Plan on Drug Demand Reduction20090.9320097.61
12Support for Marginalized Individuals for Livelihood & Enterprize (SMILE)
Comprehensive Rehabilitation of Persons Engaged in the Act of Begging100.05150.44
Comprehensive Rehabilitation for Welfare of Transgender Persons251.91300.12
13Prime Minister’s Young Achievers Scholarship Award Scheme for Vibrant India (YASASVI) (OBCs/EBCs/DNTs)
Post Matric Scholarship for OBCs/EBCs13001319.9610831007.04
Pre Matric Scholarship for OBCs250218.46394.61361.13
Boys and Girls Hostel for OBCs3018.762018.8
14for Higher Education for Young Achievers Scheme(SHREYAS) (OBCs)
National Fellowship for OBCs6055.555351.32
Interest Subsidy on Overseas Studies of OBCs3026.72724.05
15Venture Capital Fund for Backward Classes20204010
16Scheme for Economic Empowerment of DNT/N/SN (SEED)40.40.21282.3
17Information, Monitoring Evaluation and Social Audit2517.8219.513.74

***

Essential Services for Senior Citizens

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

The Umbrella Scheme of Atal Vayo Abhyuday Yojana(AVYAY), being run by the Department of Social Justice and Empowerment, includes components to provide financial security, healthcare, nutrition, shelter, welfare etc. for senior citizens. Under one of such components, namely, the Integrated Programme for Senior Citizens(IPSrC), Grant-in-Aid is given to Implementing Agencies for running and maintenance of Senior Citizens Homes where basic amenities like shelter, food, medical care, entertainment opportunities etc. are provided free of cost to indigent senior citizens. Under RashtriyaVayoshri Yojana(RVY), assisted living devices are distributed free of cost, in camp mode, to senior citizens belonging to the families living below the poverty line or having Rs. 15000/- as monthly income and suffering from age related disabilities. The Elderline: National Helpline for Senior Citizens(NHSC) (Toll-free No. 14567) provides free information, guidance, emotional support and field intervention in cases of abuse and rescues in order to improve the quality of life of senior citizens. The component namely Senior-care Ageing Growth Engine(SAGE) aims to encourage youth to think about the problems of the elderly and come out with innovative ideas for the elderly care and promoting them into start-ups by providing equity support.

Under Indira Gandhi National Old Age Pension Scheme(IGNOAPS) of the National Social Assistance Programme(NSAP), a fully funded Centrally Sponsored Scheme of the Department of Rural Development, Government of India, monthly pension at the rate of Rs.200/- per month per beneficiary to elderly persons in the age group of 60-79 years belonging to Below Poverty Line(BPL) households, is being paid. The rate of pension is increased to Rs.500/- per month per beneficiary on reaching the age of 80 years. The States/Union Territories are encouraged to provide top up amounts of at least an equivalent amount to the assistance provided by the Central Government so that the beneficiaries could get a decent level of assistance. At present, the States/Union Territories are adding Top up amounts ranging from Rs.50/- to Rs.3000/- per month per beneficiary under the IGNOAPS of NSAP. The assistance under NSAP pension schemes is sanctioned up to the scheme-wise, State/Union Territory-wise cap of beneficiaries under the scheme. At present, the number of beneficiaries under the IGNOAPS in the country is around 2.21 crore and the Scheme has achieved almost 100% saturation in all States/Union Territories. The States/Union Territories have the option to provide pension from their own sources in case there are more eligible beneficiaries over and above the State/Union Territory cap under the NSAP pension schemes.

The Ministry of Health and Family Welfare launched the National Programme for Health Care of the Elderly(NPHCE) in 2010-11 with a view to provide dedicated healthcare services to senior citizens at various level of State Health Care delivery system i.e., at Primary, Secondary and Tertiary health care, including outreach services. The Programme has two components, namely National Health Mission(NHM) i.e., Primary and Secondary care service delivery through District Hospitals(DH), Community Health Centres(CHC), Primary Health Centres(PHC), Sub-Centre/Health & Wellness Centres, and Tertiary Component i.e., these services are being provided though Regional Geriatric Centres(RGCs) located at 19 Medical colleges in 18 states of India and two National Centres of Aging(NCAs) one in AIIMS, Ansari Nagar, New Delhi and another in Madras Medical College, Chennai. It also includes Research on health issues pertaining to senior citizens. Further, Government launched Ayushman Bharat-Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana

(PMJAY) to cover 10 crore poor and vulnerable families (approx. 50 crore beneficiaries) providing coverage of up to Rs.5 lakh per family per year for secondary and tertiary hospitalization. With the launch of the Ayushman Bharat-PMJAY, the RashtriyaSwasthya Bima Yojana(RSBY) and the Senior Citizen Health Insurance Scheme(SCHIS) have been subsumed in it. All enrolled beneficiary families of RSBY and SCHIS are entitled for benefits under the Ayushman Bharat-PMJAY.

Digital Skills to Rural Youth

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

To promote Digital Skills amongst all the learners across the country, Ministry of Education through its autonomous bodies such as All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) has entered into Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with leading technology companies to drive skilling and future readiness for the students. The partnerships cover wide areas such as project-based assignments, courses in Animation, Visual Effects, Gaming and Comics (AVGC), online teaching materials, familiarization with digital tools and platforms that will be pursued on a best-efforts basis across colleges to cover students of the higher education institutions in India including but not limited to Engineering colleges, Degree colleges and Polytechnics for expanding digital skills.

The Directorate General of Training (DGT) under Ministry of Skill Development & Entrepreneurship (MSDE) is implementing the Craftsmen Training Scheme (CTS) in Industrial Training Institutes (ITIs) across the country. Under this scheme, Essential Digital Skills are taught under the subject of Employability Skills that are mandatory for trainees under all trades. DGT has signed MoU with IT Tech companies like IBM, CISCO, Future Skill Rights Network (erstwhile Quest Alliance), Amazon Web Services (AWS) and Microsoft under which technical and professional skills with respect to new age technologies which includes courses on topics like Artificial Intelligence (AI), Big Data Analytics (BDA), Blockchain, Cloud Computing, Cyber security, Internet of Things (IoT), Web, Mobile Development and Marketing, Machine Learning, etc. is being provided to trainees through Bharatskills, a Central Repository for skills, to make the trainees industry ready.

National Institute for Entrepreneurship and Small Business Development (NIESBUD), an Autonomous Institute under the administrative control of Ministry of Skill Development and Entrepreneurship (MSDE) as of now has signed an Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with Meta on 4th September, 2023 to support the Indian entrepreneurial ecosystem. The aim of the MoU is to provide aspiring and current small business owners with the necessary tools, knowledge, and resources to thrive in today’s dynamic market environment. The partnership will help in training budding and existing entrepreneurs in digital marketing skills by Meta platforms like Facebook, WhatsApp and Instagram in seven regional languages.

Indian Institute of Entrepreneurship (IIE), Guwahati, an Autonomous Institute under the administrative control of Ministry of Skill Development and Entrepreneurship (MSDE) has partnered with reputed institutions and colleges to take digital skill to rural youth and is assisting in building talent pool capacities and seamlessly connecting students, youth and micro-entrepreneurs across North Eastern Region of India.

Under the partnership of Ministry of Education with leading technology companies and NIESBUD with Meta, there are no financial obligations. Under the partnership of NIESBUD with Meta, the Meta platforms like Facebook, WhatsApp, and Instagram have provided inputs for participants on Digital Marketing in seven regional languages.

National Geoscience Data Repository Portal

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Gearing up for the success of the first tranche of auction of Critical and Strategic Minerals,  launched on 29th November, 2023, the Ministry of Mines conducted a roadshow here on 19th December, 2023, in the presence of Union Minister of Parliamentary Affairs, Coal and Mines, Shri Pralhad Joshi, Minister of state for Mines, Coal & Railways, Shri Raosaheb Patil Danve and  Secretary, Ministry of Mines Shri V.L. Kantha Rao, senior officers of the Ministry, Industry Associations and PSUs. Over 45 companies, consultants and exploration agencies participated in the event. Minister Shri Pralhad Joshi also launched the National Geoscience Data Repository Portal (NGDR) during the event.

A total of 20 critical & strategic mineral blocks will be auctioned in the 1st tranche, out of which 16 mineral blocks are put up for grant of Composite Licence and four mineral blocks for grant of Mining Lease. The minerals include Graphite, Glauconite, Lithium, REE, Molybdenum, Nickel, Potash etc. The blocks are spread across the States of Tamil Nadu, Odisha, Uttar Pradesh, Bihar, Jharkhand, Chhattisgarh, Gujarat and UT โ€“ Jammu & Kashmir.

Addressing the function, Minister Shri Pralhad Joshi appraised the efforts and initiatives undertaken by Ministry of Mines for increasing domestic production of minerals, meeting the goals of self-sufficiency as envisioned by the Prime Minister Shri Narendra Modi. He emphasized how the Indian mining sector in general, and critical minerals in particular are significant in the present global context, underscoring priorities such as strengthening domestic production, fostering self-sufficiency, diminishing import reliance, advocating sustainable resource management, attracting investments in the mining sector and advancing key industries crucial for India’s industrial and technological progress. The Government is committed to bring more  critical mineral blocks to auction in a phased manner, the Minister added.

The Minister of State for Mines, Coal and Railways, Shri Raosaheb Patil Danve expressed optimism about the potential success of the initial phase of the critical minerals auction, seeing it as a positive stride toward establishing a dependable supply chain for these minerals, aligning with the vision of Atma Nirbhar Bharat and contributing to heightened economic growth. The Minister of State of Mines reiterated the governmentโ€™s efforts to bring these blocks into auction and how the success of this auction process relies on the active participation from the industry. He called upon all the participants to demonstrate the highest standards of transparency, fairness and ethical practices throughout the auction process.

Shri V.L. Kantha Rao, Secretary, Ministry of Mines gave insights about the steps taken by Ministry of Mines to increase the exploration activity carried out in the country and about the efforts to streamline the policy framework for multifaceted growth of the mineral sector. Secretary, Mines also responded to the queries of the participants and ensured all assistance from the Ministry for easy participation in the e-auction process. Shri Rao also encouraged the participants to give their suggestions for the e-auction process being conducted by Central Government.

The roadshow was held with the objective to guide the potential bidders regarding the auction process. Additional Secretary โ€“ Ministry of Mines, Mr. Sanjay Lohiya welcomed the dignitaries and initiated the discussion on the importance of the auction of critical & strategic minerals.

Dr Veena Kumari Dermal, Joint Secretary, Ministry of Mines began with the presentation and appraised the audience regarding the prevalent mineral policies and the reform of MMDR Act and rules thereunder for enabling the Central Government for auction of critical & strategic mineral blocks. Further, the Joint Secretary briefed the audience about the 20 blocks launched in the first tranche of auction  and presented the estimated timeline of the e-auction process. This was followed by presentations of SBI Capital Markets Limited – Transaction Advisor, MECL โ€“ Technical Advisor, and MSTC โ€“ Auction Platform provider, giving  information to the potential bidders regarding the e-auction and details of the critical mineral blocks put to auction.

SBI Capital Markets Limited presented the details of the auction process to the stakeholders including the eligibility conditions, general guidelines to the auction process, and bidding parameters. MECL highlighted the importance of Critical and Strategic Minerals in modern technologies and shared the details of 20 critical mineral blocks being put to auction. MSTC walked participants through the registration process along with the technicalities of the auction portal. Subsequently, the queries received from the audience were addressed by the presenters.

Director (NMET), Ministry of Mines highlighted the efforts of Ministry in facilitating the engagement of Notified Private Exploration Agencies (NPEAs) to expedite mineral exploration in the country. He further informed about the scheme on funding of Notified Private Exploration Agency (NPEA) through National Mineral Exploration Trust (NMET). The Ministry has notified 16 such private agencies. Also informed about the proposed amendment in Mineral (Auction) Rules 2015 and comments were sought on the same.

Further, presentation on the details of Exploration Licence, a recently included provision in the MMDR Act and the rules thereunder. Exploration Licence is a provision for grant of a mineral concession for undertaking full range of exploration starting from reconnaissance to prospecting operations. The move is to engage the private players and junior mining companies in the exploration of deep-seated minerals, in line with international practice. The draft amendments made in the MMDR Act were presented to the participants and suggestions/comments were sought from the stakeholders.

Pre-bid conference with prospective bidder is scheduled on 22nd December 2023, last date of sale of Tender Document is 16th January 2024 and last date of bid submission is 22nd January 2024. Thereafter, e-auction will commence for selection of preferred bidder. Details of the mines, auction terms, timelines etc. can be accessed on MSTC auction platform at   www.mstcecommerce.com/auctionhome/mlcl/index.jsp.

The National Geoscience Data Repository(NGDR) has been created, as a part of the National Mineral Exploration Policy, 2016, hosting all baseline and exploration-related geoscientific data in a single GIS platform, to expedite, enhance and facilitate the exploration coverage of the country. The NGDR initiative, spearheaded by Geological Survey of India (GSI) and Bhaskarachaya Institute of Space Applications and Geoinformatics (BISAG-N) represents a significant leap forward in democratizing critical geoscience data, empowering stakeholders across industries and academia with unprecedented access to invaluable resources.

Currently, 35 map services like geological, geochemical and  geophysical, data layers have been incorporated with the NGDR portal. These data sets can be viewed accessed and downloaded. This interplay of different geo-layers and further interpretation helps in targeting potential mineral zones. The NGDR portal can be accessed through https://geodataindia.gov.in. The user, after registration in the portal can view, download and interpret the data.

The creation of NGDR was conceptualized by the Ministry of Mines (MoM) as part of the National Mineral Exploration Policy (NMEP) 2016. The Geological Survey of India (GSI) was given the responsibility to establish NGDR. The NGDR will make available all geological, geochemical, geophysical and mineral exploration data in public domain on a digital geospatial platform. This will include baseline geoscience data and all mineral exploration information generated by various central and state government agencies and mineral concession holders . The greater goal of this initiative is to increase the investment attractiveness of the mining sector in India.

Key Features of the National Geoscience Data Portal (NGDR):

  1. Centralized Access: Provides a centralized repository of diverse geoscience datasets, including geological maps, mineral resources, seismic data, and environmental information.
  2. User-Friendly Interface: An intuitive interface designed to cater to a wide range of users, enabling seamless navigation and exploration of data.
  3. MERT template: The Mineral Exploration Reporting Template facilitates all the geoscientific stakeholders to submit their data in the NGDR portal in a standard reporting template.
  4. Analytical Tools: Equipped with state-of-the-art analytical tools to interpret and extract valuable insights from complex geospatial data.
  5. Open Access: Encourages transparency and knowledge sharing by offering open access to a wealth of geoscience information.

How to Access:

The NGDR Portal can be accessed at https://geodataindia.gov.in.

The development of this portal will help various geoscience agencies such as GSI, MECL, State Departments of Mining and Geology, private agencies, and other stakeholders agencies of the country. As the geoscience data through this portal will be available globally for viewing, downloading and interpretation, it will facilitate global mining companies to invest in India and bring new technologies in mineral exploration.

Globally, all the mineral-rich countries have a robust geoscience data portal having various layers of geoscientific information i.e. geological, geophysical, geochemical, etc. to support their mineral exploration programmes. With this state-of-the-art, user-friendly, interoperable platform, India is now in the league of other mineral-rich countries where the accessibility of geoscientific data plays a vital role in fostering their mineral exploration programmes.

****

Steps Taken for Early Submission of Reports by Geological Survey of India

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

As per the annual field season program, field survey and preparation of reports normally takes 18 months, out of which 12 months are required for completion of field survey and the next 6 months for writing/ finalization of the report before it is circulated. However, for some of the projects, this time duration may be more than 18 months depending upon the nature and quantum of work.

GSI has taken a number of steps to finalize the resource bearing reports at the earliest which are summarized below-

  • Sufficient budget grants especially in the mineral exploration head allotted to all regions/missions of GSI for execution of field projects.
  • To achieve the drilling target, empanelled outsourced drilling agencies are deployed for certain exploration projects in addition to in-house drilling capacity. Drilling activities are initiated on priority from the beginning of Field Season.
  • To expedite sample analysis, outsourcing is carried out through reputed laboratories as per requirement in addition to in-house capacity.
  • For timely execution of projects, field vehicles are outsourced in addition to in-house capacity.
  • The laboratories are being modernized with various state-of-the-art instruments for precise and quick analysis. Various modern software are also being used for quick and precise analysis of field data.
  • The concerned State Governments are intimated to render all possible support for execution of field projects and field officers of GSI are instructed to coordinate with local administration to resolve any local issues. Necessary formalities for getting permission for exploration from various authorities are taken before initiation of the project.
  • Constant monitoring of the projects at various levels is carried out to ensure proper and timely completion of the project.

The following technology initiatives have been adopted for expediting field surveys and reports on potential mineral resource deposits by GSI:

  1.  Generation of baseline geoscience data- GSI is generating almost all types of baseline geoscience data e.g. geological, geochemical, and geophysical pan India which are crucial for effective planning of mineral exploration. GSI has targeted to complete National Geochemical and Geophysical mapping of the accessible part of the country on priority by involving in-house resources as well as through outsourcing using the National Mineral Exploration Trust (NMET) fund.
  2. Aerial Survey: GSI is executing the project โ€œNational Aero-Geophysical Mapping Programme (NAGMP)โ€ to acquire aero-geophysical data over the Obvious Geological Potential areas (7.78 lakh sq km) through outsourcing using NMET fund.
  3.  Remote Sensing aided Survey: GSI is carrying out delineation of alteration/ mineralization zone using spectral mapping algorithms. Recently, GSI has completed acquisition of AVIRIS NG data in collaboration with NASA and ISRO in certain potential areas in the country. GSI has initiated surface mineral mapping using ASTER multispectral remote sensing data to generate alteration zone /mineral mapping.
  4.  Regional Mineral Targeting (RMT): GSI has introduced RMT program to gain insight into the process of finding mineral deposits on a regional scale by synthesis & collation of surface and subsurface data followed by fieldwork.
  5.  Project โ€˜Uncoverโ€™ India: Given the rapid depletion of surface/near-surface deposits, there is a paradigm shift in thrust to probe deep-seated deposits under โ€œProject Uncover (India)โ€ in two transacts, in collaboration with Geoscience Australia (GA).
  6.  Necessary steps have been taken to increase the depth of exploratory drilling in G3 & G2 stage exploration projects from FS 2020-21 for non-bulk minerals depending on the potential of mineralized zones. For fast drilling, GSI is mostly utilizing hydrostatics rigs in mineral exploration projects.
  7.  National Geoscience Data Repository (NGDR): GSI is setting up the National Geoscience Data Repository (NGDR) through outsourcing using NMET fund for the benefit of all stakeholders wherein all geoscientific data will be made available on one platform.
  8. Modernization Programme: GSI has been modernizing its laboratories by procuring high-end machinery and equipment to improve its capabilities in generating vital geoscience data and their processing and interpretation.

Achievements of New Education Policy

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Central Government, State and UT Government have taken several initiatives for implementation of National Education Policy 2020 (NEP 2020) details of which are as under:-

In School Education, a number of initiatives have been taken such as PM SHRI (PM Schools for Rising India) for upgradation of schools (A total of 6448 schools were selected and Rs. 630.11 crore has been released to 6207 PM SHRI schools in 27 States/UTs along with KVS/NVS as first installment); National Initiative for Proficiency in Reading with Understanding and Numeracy (NIPUN Bharat);Vidya-Praveshโ€“School Preparation Module; PM e-VIDYA for digital/online/on-air education; DIKSHA (Digital Infrastructure for Knowledge Sharing) as One Nation One Digital Platform; National Curriculum Framework for Foundational Stage (NCF FS); Jadui Pitara for children between the age group of 3 to 8 years; National Curriculum Framework for School Education; NISHTHA (National Initiative for School Heads’ and Teachers’ Holistic Advancement) 1.0, 2.0 and 3.0 an Integrated Teacher Training Programme for different stages of school education; National Digital Education Architecture (NDEAR) for creating a unifying national digital infrastructure with 1500+ Micro courses, 5 billion+ Learning sessions, 12 billion+ QR codes, 20K+ ecosystem participants, 15K+ Micro improvements ongoing across various linked building blocks; โ€œNew India Literacy Programme or ULLASโ€ targeting all non-literates age 15 years and above, etc.

Samagra Shiksha Scheme has been fully aligned with the recommendation of NEP 2020, with a total financial outlay of Rs. 2,94,283.04 crore which includes a Central share of Rs. 1,85,398.32 crore. PM Poshan Shakti Nirman Yojna has also been aligned with the recommendation of NEP 2020.

National Assessment Centre, PARAKH (Performance Assessment, Review and Analysis of Knowledge for Holistic Development) has been set up to fulfil the objectives of setting norms, standards, guidelines and implement activities related to student assessment.

New policy on weight of School bags with focus on reducing the weight of school bags has been circulated to States/UTs.

4-year Integrated Teacher Education Program has been introduced. Recognition has been granted to 42 institutions including IITs, NITs, RIEs, IGNOU and Government Colleges for the Academic Session 2023-24.

National Mission for Mentoring (NMM) has also been introduced to create a large pool of outstanding professionals who are willing to provide mentoring to school teachers. NMM is being piloted in 30 Central schools. Also, a school volunteer management program namely Vidyanjali has been started to strengthen Government and Government aided schools through community and private sector involvement across the country. So far 671512 Govt. and Govt aided schools have onboarded and 443539 volunteers have registered on the Vidyanjali Portal.

In Higher Education, various initiatives / reforms have been carried out for implementation of NEP 2020. For learner centric education, National Credit Framework (NCrF), National Higher Education Qualification Framework, Academic Bank of Credit (ABC), multiple entry/exit etc. have been introduced. So far 1667 Universities/INIs/HEIs are on boarded on ABC portal & 2.75 Crore students are registered. To ensure access to high quality education with equity and inclusion, courses are being offered in Indian Languages; entrance exams such as JEE, NEET, CUET are conducted in 13 Indian languages; 100 books for UG students on various subjects launched in 12 Indian Languages; and 20 Technical books of first year have been translated in Indian Languages.

To promote digital learning by leveraging technology, at present 95 Higher Educational Institutions (HEIs) are offering 1149 ODL programmes and 66 HEIs are offering 371 online programmes. More than 19 lakh students are availing these facilities. To promote multi-disciplinary education and provide flexibility, around 295 Universities have adopted SWAYAM regulation permitting learners to avail upto 40% credit Courses from SWAYAM platform. Over 9 lakhs students earn SWAYAM certificate through a proctored exam every year. These certificates can be utilised for credit transfer by the university in which student is enrolled. Technology enabled Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) based Solutions for Governance of HEIs starting from admission to grant of Degree โ€“ Smarter Automation Engine for Universities (SAMARTH) is being extensively used by around 2700 Universities & HEIs covering 32 States / UTs. 7 State Higher Education Departments are also on boarded.

In order to enable HEIs to work with industry experts in developing courses and curriculum to meet the industry and societal needs, initiatives have been taken such as Guidelines on Professor of Practice; MoUs with Cisco/IBM/Meta/Adobe/Microsoft/Sales force etc. to create industry-aligned courses; offering Apprenticeship / Internship embedded Degree Programme by HEIs; Single Unified online portal for internship with total registration of around 10560 HEIs and 73383 industries so far. For promotion of research and innovation, around 7568 Institutionsโ€™ Innovation Councils and around 104 Idea Development, Evaluation and Application Labs (IDEA) have been set up.

To promote internationalization, regulation on setting up and operation of campuses of foreign Higher Education Institutions in India have been issued. Also, MOUs have been signed for setting up of campus of IIT Madras in Zanzibar- Tanzania and IIT Delhi in Abu Dhabi. Classes have commenced at IIT Madras campus in Zanzibar-Tanzania.

Guidelines for Training/Orientation of Faculty on Indian Knowledge System (IKS), Empanelment of Artists/Artisansโ€“inโ€“Residence in Higher Educational Institutions, Introduction of courses based on Indian heritage and culture, Incorporating Indian Knowledge in Higher Education Curricula and Translation of books into Indian languages have been issued. More than 8000 HEIs have started adopting IKS into their curriculum.

National Credit Framework jointly developed by University Grants Commission (UGC), All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE), National Council for Vocational Education & Training (NCVET), National Institute of Open Schooling( NIOS), Central Board of Secondary Education (CBSE), National Council of Education, Research & Training (NCERT), Directorate General of Training (DGT), Ministry of Education (MoE) and Ministry of Skill Development and Entrepreneurship (MSDE) is a comprehensive credit framework encompassing elementary, school, higher and vocational education and training incorporating creditization of various dimensions of learning i.e. academics, vocational skills and Experiential learning including relevant experience and proficiency/professional levels acquired. It encompasses qualifications frameworks as prescribed in National Higher Education Qualifications Framework (NHEQF), National Skills Qualifications Framework (NSQF) and National Curriculum Framework (NCF), thereby providing broad-based multi-disciplinary / inter-disciplinary, holistic education with flexible curricula, creative combination of subjects, multiple pathways, establishing equivalence, facilitate national and international mobility.

Functioning of Boards of Multi-State Co-operative societies

By Shankar Chatterjee

The Multi-State Cooperative Societies (MSCS) (Amendment) Act& Rules, 2023 have been notified on 03.08.2023 and 04.08.2023, respectively to strengthen governance, enhance transparency, increase accountability and reform electoral process, etc.in the Multi State Cooperative Societies by supplementing existing legislation and incorporating the provisions of Ninety-seventh Constitutional Amendment.

To increase the representation of Scheduled Castes/Tribes in the boards of Multi-State Co-operative societies, to make the board more professional and to increase participation of board members in board meetings, following provisions have been introduced via above amendment, inter-alia: –  

  1. Provisions for reservation of two seats for women and one seat for SC or ST in the Board of multi-State cooperative societies have been made.
  2. To ensure timely, regular and transparent conduct of elections in the multi-State cooperative societies, provision of Cooperative Election Authority has been included.
  3. To increase professionalism in the Board of multi-State cooperative societies, provision of Co-option of such directors who have experience in the field of banking, management, co-operative management and finance or specialization in any field relating to the objects and activities undertaken by such multi-State cooperative societies have been introduced.
  4. To increase participation of board members, quorum of 1/3rd of elected members, has been prescribed for board meetings.
  5. Casual vacancies are to be filled by nomination up to 1/3rd of the board strength, if the term of office of the board is less than half of its original term. If casual vacancies in the same term exceed 1/3rd of number of elected directors, elections have to be conducted through Election Authority.
  6. If Chairman of the society fails to direct the convening of the meeting within the quarter, it shall be convened by Chief Executive Officer (CEO) on the requisition of Vice-Chairperson or Vice President. In other cases, meeting to be convened by Chief Executive Officer (CEO) on requisition from at least 50 % of board members. This will ensure holding of meetings in regular manner and on demand.
  7. Additional grounds for disqualification for directors have been made to improve governance, for better recovery of dues and to ensure that such acts of omission or commission or fraud are not repeated elsewhere.
  8. To curb nepotism and favoritism in multi-State co-operative societies, the Director of a multi-State cooperative society shall not be present in the discussion and vote on matters where he or his relatives are an interested party. 
  9. For strengthening governance, criteria for appointment of Chief Executive Officer (CEO) are stipulated.

Women empowerment through Co-operative institutions

By Kavita Dehalwar

The Ministry of Cooperation has made various efforts for the betterment, empowerment and income generation for women in the cooperative sector. The major initiative taken by the Ministry in this regard are as under:

1. Reservation for Women on the Board of Multi State Cooperative Societies

    The Multi-State Cooperative Societies (Act) 2002 has been amended to mandate requirement of women Directors in the Board of Multi-State Cooperative Societies. This will ensure representation of women in the Board of more than 1,550 Multi-State Cooperatives across the country.

2. Reservation to Members in Primary Agriculture Cooperative Credit Societies (PACS) through adoption of Model Bye-laws

Model Bye Laws for the PACS has been prepared by the Ministry of Cooperation and adopted by the States/UTs across the country. It mandates requirement of women Directors in the Board of PACS. This will ensure representation of women and their decision making in more than 1 Lakh PACS.

3. Nandini Sahakar Scheme

   Nandini Sahakar Scheme of National Cooperative Development Corporation (NCDC) under Ministry of Cooperation is a financial assistance scheme for project formulation, hand- holding and capacity development of women cooperatives. NCDC has disbursed 5,714.88 Crore to Women Cooperatives benefitting more than 1.56 Crore women members.

The Ministry of Cooperation also organizes various training programs for skill development of the women in the cooperative sector through its National Level Institutes like National Council for Cooperative Training (NCCT), Vaikunth Mehta National Institute of Co-operative Management (VAMNICOM), and Laxmanrao Inamdar National Academy for Cooperative Research and Development (LINAC). The details of these training programs are given in Annexure-A.

In addition to the above, Ministry of Cooperation has taken 54 major Initiatives which will further benefit and empower all members of the cooperative sector including women. The details of such initiatives taken and progress made so far is given in Annexure-B.

Annexure-A

Ministry of Cooperation

The Ministry of Cooperation organizes various training programs for skill development of the women through its National Level Institutes. The details of these programs are as under:

National Council for Cooperative Training (NCCT):

NCCT and its Training units organized skill development programmes covering the sectors like Dairy, Handlooms, Micro Credit, Rural Entrepreneurships, Bee-Keeping, Industrial Cooperatives etc. where the women participants also attended.

The Last three-year training participants are as follows:

S. No.YearTotal No. of Participation for TrainingTotal No. of Women ParticipantsPercentage of Women participants
1.2020-21 40,288 8,875 22.02 
2.2021-22 62,774 15,309 24.38 
3.2022-23 2,01,507 77,584 38.50 

Vaikunth Mehta National Institute of Co-operative Management (VAMNICOM):

(1) VAMNICOM, as a National Institute has been conducting various training programmes for womenโ€™s empowerment / skill development in Cooperative Sector and SHGs including SC/ST women participants for example: –

(a) Strengthening of Cluster Level Federation (CLF) of women SHG

(b) Management Development Programme for Women Directors in Credit Cooperatives

(c) Financial & Digital Literacy for Women Members of Self-Help Group (SHG)

(d) Book keeping and Auditing Training for Women Members of SHG

(e) Business Development Strategies for Women’s SHGS

(2) During the year 2022-23 the Institute has conducted 24 training programmes exclusively for women with 1056 participants.

(3) During the year 2023-24 (up to Nov, 2023) the Institute has conducted 29 training programmes exclusively for women with 1,010 participants.

Laxmanrao Inamdar National Academy for Cooperative Research and Development (LINAC):

Laxmanrao Inamdar National Academy for Cooperative Research and Development (LINAC) endeavors to develop its programs and interventions with a strong client-orientation and inter-disciplinary perspective to strengthen institutional capabilities and human resources in cooperatives.

Number of training programmes conducted during 2022-23 and 2023-24 for women participants on โ€œRole of Women Directors in Governance & Business Development in Coops/SHGsโ€:

S. No.YearNo of training ProgrammesNo of women Participants
012022-2318951
022023-24(Till 14.12.2023)18957

Annexure-B

Ministry of Cooperation

      Ministry of Cooperation, since its inception on 6th July, 2021, has undertaken several initiatives to realize the vision of โ€œSahakar-se-Samriddhiโ€ and to strengthen & deepen the cooperative movement from Primary to Apex level Cooperatives in the country. List of initiatives taken and progress made so far are as follows:

  1. Making Primary Cooperatives economically vibrant and transparent
  2. Model Bye-Laws for PACS making them multipurpose, multidimensional and transparent entities: Government, in consultation with all the stakeholders, including States/ UTs, National Level Federations, State Cooperative Banks (StCBs), District Central Cooperative Banks (DCCBs), etc., has prepared and circulated Model Byelaws for PACS to all the States/ UTs, which enable PACS to undertake more than 25 business activities, improve governance, transparency and accountability in their operations. Provisions have also been made to make the membership of PACS more inclusive and broad-based, giving adequate representation to women and Scheduled Castes/Schedules Tribes. Model Byelaws have been adopted by 31 States/ UTs so far.
  1. Strengthening of PACS through Computerization: In order to strengthen PACS, project for Computerization of 63,000 functional PACS with a total financial outlay of โ‚น2,516 Crore has been approved by the Government of India, which entails bringing all functional PACS in the Country onto a common ERP based national software, linking them with NABARD through StCBs and DCCBs. A total of 62,318 PACS from 28 States/ UTs have been sanctioned under the project. Software is ready and trials have already started in 5,673 PACS in 26 States/ UTs so far.
  1. New Multipurpose PACS/ Dairy/ Fishery Cooperatives in uncovered Panchayats: A proposal has been approved by the Government to set up new multi-purpose PACS or primary dairy/ fisheries cooperatives covering every Panchayat/ village in the next five years, with support of NABARD, NDDB, NFDB, NCDC and other National level Federations. As reported by the States/ UTs, the process for registering 9,961 new PACS/ Dairy/ Fishery cooperative societies in 23 States/ UTs is in various stages.
  1. Worldโ€™s Largest Decentralized Grain Storage Plan in Cooperative sector: Government has approved a plan to create warehouses, custom hiring centres, primary processing units and other agri-infra for grain storage at PACS level, by converging various schemes of Government such as AIF, AMI, SMAM, PMFME, etc. This will reduce wastage of food grains and transportation costs, enable farmers to realize better prices for their produce and meet various agricultural needs at the PACS level itself. 22 States/ UTs and National level Cooperative Federations such as National Cooperative Consumers Federation (NCCF) and National Agricultural Cooperative Marketing Federation of India Ltd. (NAFED), have identified 1,711 PACS for creation of storage capacity under the Pilot Project. At present, construction is going in 13 PACS of 13 States/ UTs under the Pilot Project.
  1. PACS as Common Service Centers (CSCs) for better access to e-services: MoU has been signed between Ministry of Cooperation, MeitY, NABARD and CSC e-Governance Services India Limited for providing more than 300 e-services such as banking, insurance, Aadhar enrolment/ updation, health services, PAN card and IRCTC/ Bus/ Air ticket, etc. through PACS. So far, 24,470 PACS have started providing CSC services to the rural citizens which will also result in increase in income of those PACS at the same time.
  1. Formation of new Farmer Producer Organizations (FPOs) by PACS: Government has allowed 1,100 additional FPOs to be formed by PACS with the support of NCDC, in those blocks where FPOs have not yet been formed or the blocks are not covered by any other implementing agency. This will be helpful in providing the farmers with necessary market linkage and get fair and remunerative prices for their produce.
  1. PACS given priority for Retail Petrol/ Diesel outlets: Government has allowed PACS to be included in the Combined Category 2 (CC2) for allotment of retail petrol/ diesel outlets. As per information received from Oil Marketing Companies (OMCs), a total of 228 PACS have applied online for retail petrol/ diesel outlets.
  1. PACS given permission to convert bulk consumer petrol pumps into retail outlets: Based on the discussions with the Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas, guidelines have been issued to convert the existing bulk consumer licensee PACS into retail outlets for increasing the profit of PACS and generate employment opportunities in rural areas. 109 PACS from 5 States having wholesale consumer pumps have given consent for conversion into Retail Outlets, out of which 43 PACS have received Letter of Intent (LOI) from the OMCs.
  1. PACS eligible for LPG Distributorship for diversifying its activities: Government has now allowed PACS to apply for LPG Distributorships. This will give PACS an option to increase their economic activities and create new employment opportunities in rural areas. Two locations have already been advertised in the State of Jharkhand.
  1. PACS as PM Bharatiya Jan Aushadhi Kendra for improving access to generic medicines at rural level: Government is promoting PACS to operate Pradhan Mantri Bhartiya Janaushadhi Kendras which will provide additional income source to them and provide easy access of generic medicines to rural citizens. So far, 4,289 PACS/ cooperative societies have applied online for PM Janaushadhi Kendras, out of which 2,293 PACS have been given initial approval also.
  1. PACS as Pradhan Mantri Kisan Samriddhi Kendras (PMKSK): Government is promoting PACS to operate PMKSK for ensuring easy accessibility of fertilizer & related services to farmers in the country. As per the information shared by States/ UTs, 28,648 PACS are functioning as PMKSK so far.
  1. Convergence of PM-KUSUM at PACS level: Farmers associated with PACS can adopt solar agricultural water pumps and install photovoltaic modules in their farms.
  1. PACS to carry out O&M of rural piped water supply schemes (PWS): In order to utilize the reach of PACS in rural areas, on the initiative of the Ministry of Cooperation, Ministry of Jal Shakti has made PACS as eligible agencies to carry out the Operations & Maintenance (O&M) of PWS in rural areas. As per information received from States/ UTs, 1,381 PACS have been identified by 12 States/ UTs to provide O&M services at Panchayat/ Village level.
  1. Micro-ATMs to Bank Mitra Cooperative Societies for providing doorsteps financial services: Dairy and Fisheries cooperative societies can be made Bank Mitras of DCCBs and StCBs to ensure their ease of doing business, transparency and financial inclusion, Micro-ATMs are also being given to these Bank Mitra Co-operative Societies with support from NABARD to provide ‘Door Step Financial Services’. As a pilot project, 1,723 Micro-ATMs have been distributed to Bank Mitra cooperative societies in Panchmahal and Banaskantha Districts of Gujarat.
  1. Rupay Kisan Credit Card to Members of Milk Cooperatives: In order to expand the reach of DCCBs/ StCBs and to provide necessary liquidity to the members of Dairy Cooperative societies, Rupay Kisan Credit Cards (KCCs) are being distributed to the members of cooperatives for providing credit at comparatively lower interest rates and enable other financial transactions. As a pilot project, 73,503 Rupay KCC have been distributed in Panchmahal and Banaskantha Districts of Gujarat.
  1. Formation of Fish Farmer Producer Organization (FFPO): In order to provide market linkage and providing processing facilities to the fishermen, NCDC has registered 69 FFPOs in the initial phase. Department of Fisheries, Government of India has further allocated conversion of 1000 existing fisheries cooperative societies into FFPOs to NCDC, with an approved outlay of Rs 225.50 crore.
  1. Strengthening the Urban and Rural Cooperative Banks
  2. UCBs have been allowed to open new branches to expand their business: UCBs can now open new branches up to 10% (maximum 5 branches) of the existing number of branches in the previous financial year without prior approval of RBI.
  1. UCBs have been allowed by RBI to offer doorstep services to their customers: Door step banking facility can now be provided by the UCBs. Account holders associated with these banks can now avail various banking facilities at home such as cash withdrawal, cash deposit, KYC, demand draft and life certificate for pensioners, etc.
  1. Cooperative banks have been allowed to make one-time settlement of outstanding loans, like Commercial Banks: Co-operative banks, through board-approved policies, can now provide process for technical write-off as well as settlement with borrowers.
  1. Time limit increased to achieve Priority Sector Lending (PSL) targets given to UCBs: RBI has extended the timeline for UCBs to achieve Priority Sector Lending (PSL) targets by two years i.e., up to March 31, 2026.
  1. A Nodal Officer designated in RBI for regular interaction with UCBs: In order to meet the long pending demand of the cooperative sector for closer coordination and focused interaction, RBI has notified a nodal officer as well.
  1. Individual housing loan limit more than doubled by RBI for Rural and Urban Co-operative Banks:
    1. Housing loan limit of Urban cooperative banks have now been doubled from Rs 30 lakh to Rs 60 lakh.
    2. Housing loan limit of Rural cooperative banks has been increased to two and a half times to Rs 75 lakh.
  1. Rural Co-operative Banks will now be able to lend to commercial real estate/ residential housing sector, thereby diversifying their business: This will not only help Rural co-operative banks to diversify their business, but benefit Housing co-operative societies also.
  1. License fee reduced for Cooperative Banks: License fee for onboarding Cooperative Banks to โ€˜Aadhaar Enabled Payment Systemโ€™ (AePS) has been reduced by linking it to the number of transactions. Cooperative financial institutions will also be able to get the facility free of cost for the first three months of the pre-production phase. With this, farmers will now be able to get the facility of banking at their home with their fingerprints.
  1. Non-scheduled UCBs, StCBs and DCCBs notified as Member Lending Institutions (MLIs) in CGTMSE Scheme to increase the share of cooperatives in lending: The co-operative banks will now be able to take advantage of risk coverage up to 85 percent on the loans given. Also, cooperative sector enterprises will also be able to get collateral free loans from co-operative banks now.
  1. Notification of Scheduling norms for including Urban Co-operative Banks: UCBs that meet the ‘Financially Sound and Well Managed’ (FSWM) criteria and have maintained the minimum deposits required for classification as Tier 3 for the last two years are now eligible to be included in Schedule II of the Reserve Bank of India Act 1934 and get ‘Scheduled’ status.
  1. Monetary ceiling doubled by RBI for Gold Loan: RBI has doubled monetary ceiling from Rs. 2 lakh to Rs.4 lakh, for those UCBs that meet the PSL targets.
  1. Umbrella Organization for Urban Cooperative Banks: RBI has accorded approval to the National Federation of Urban Co-operative Banks and Credit Societies Ltd. (NAFCUB) for the formation of an Umbrella Organization (UO) for the UCB sector, which will provide necessary IT infrastructure and operation support to around 1,500 UCBs.
  2. Relief to Cooperative Societies in the Income Tax Act
  3. Surcharge reduced from 12 % to 7% for co-operative societies having income between Rs. 1 to 10 Cr.: This will reduce the burden of Income Tax on Cooperative Societies and more capital will be available with them to work for the benefit of their members.
  1. MAT reduced for cooperatives from 18.5% to 15%: With this provision, now there is parity between Cooperative Societies and Companies in this regard.
  1. Relief in cash transactions under section 269ST of the Income Tax Act: In order to remove difficulties in cash transactions by cooperatives under Section 269ST of IT Act, Government has issued a clarification that cash transaction of less than Rs. 2 lakhs done by a cooperative society with its distributor in a day will be considered separately, and will not be charged with income tax penalty.
  1. Tax cut for new manufacturing Cooperative societies: Government has decided that a flat lower tax rate of 15% will be charged, compared to an earlier rate of up to 30% plus surcharge, for new cooperatives commencing manufacturing activities by March 31, 2024. This will encourage the formation of new cooperative societies in the manufacturing sector.
  2. Increase in limit of Cash Deposits and Cash Loans by PACS and PCARDBs: Government has enhanced the limit for Cash Deposits and Cash Loans by PACS and Primary Cooperative Agriculture and Rural Development Banks (PCARDBs) from Rs 20,000 to Rs 2 lakh per member. This provision will facilitate their activities, increase their business and benefit members of their societies.
  1. Increase in the limit of Tax Deducted at Source (TDS) in Cash Withdrawal: Government has increased the cash withdrawal limit of cooperative societies without deduction of tax at source from Rs.1 crore to Rs.3 crore per year. This provision will save Tax Deducted at Source (TDS) for cooperative societies, which will enhance liquidity of the cooperative society.
  2. Revival of Cooperative Sugar Mills
  3. Relief from Income Tax to Sugar Cooperative Mills: Government has issued a clarification that Sugar cooperative mills would not be subjected to additional income tax for paying higher sugarcane prices to farmers up to Fair and Remunerative or State Advised Price, from April, 2016 onwards.
  4. Resolution of decades old pending issues related to Income Tax of Sugar Cooperative Mills: Government has made a provision in its Union Budget 2023-24, wherein Sugar cooperatives have been allowed to claim as expenditure their payments to sugarcane farmers for the period prior to assessment year 2016โ€“17, giving a relief of more than Rs.10,000 crores.
  5. Rs. 10,000 crore loan scheme launched for strengthening of Sugar Cooperative Mills: Government has launched a scheme through NCDC for setting up ethanol plants or cogeneration plants or for working capital or for all three purposes. Loan amount of Rs. 3,010 cr. has been sanctioned by NCDC to 24 Cooperative Sugar Mills so far.
  6. Preference to Cooperative Sugar Mills in purchase of ethanol: Cooperative Sugar Mills have now been put at par with private companies for ethanol procurement by Government of India under the Ethanol Blending Programme (EBP).
  7. Reduction in GST on molasses from 28% to 5%: Government has decided to reduce the GST on molasses from 28% to 5% which will enable cooperative sugar mills to earn more profits for its members by selling molasses to distilleries with higher margins.
  1. Three new Multi-State Societies at the National Level
  2. New National Multi-State Cooperative Seed Society for certified seeds: Government has established a new apex multi-state cooperative seed society under the MSCS Act, 2002, namely Bharatiya Beej Sahakari Samiti Limited (BBSSL) as an umbrella organization for quality seed cultivation, production and distribution under a single brand. BBSSL has received 8,200 PACS/ cooperative societies applications from 27 States/ UTs for membership so far.
  1. New National Multi-State Cooperative Organic Society for organic farming: Government has established a new apex multi-state cooperative organic society under the MSCS Act, 2002, namely National Cooperative Organics Limited (NCOL) as an umbrella organization to produce, distribute and market certified and authentic organic products. NCOL has received 2,475 PACS/ cooperative societies applications from 24 States/ UTs for membership so far. 6 organic products have already been launched by NCOL so far.
  1. New National Multi-State Cooperative Export Society for promoting exports: Government has established a new apex multi-state cooperative export society under the MSCS Act, 2002, namely National Cooperative Export Limited (NCEL) as an umbrella organization to give thrust to exports from cooperative sector. NCEL has received 2,625 PACS/ cooperative societies applications from 22 States/ UTs for membership so far. Till date, NCEL has got permission to export 14.92 LMT rice to 16 countries and 50,000 MT sugar to 2 countries.
  1. Capacity Building in Cooperatives
  2. Establishment of the Cooperative University: Steps are being taken by Ministry of Cooperation for setting up of a National Cooperative University for Cooperative education, training, consultancy, research and development and a sustainable and quality supply of trained manpower.
  1. Promotion of training and awareness through National Council for Cooperative Training (NCCT): By increasing its reach, NCCT has conducted 3,287 training programs and provided training to 2,01,507 participants in FY 2022-23.
  1. Use of Information Technology for โ€˜Ease of Doing Businessโ€™
  2. Computerization of the Central Registrarโ€™s Office: Central Registrarโ€™s office has been computerized to create a digital ecosystem for Multi-State Cooperative Societies, which will assist in processing applications and service requests in a time bound manner.
  1. Scheme for computerization of office of RCSs in States and Union Territories: To increase โ€˜Ease of doing businessโ€™ for Cooperative Societies and create a digital ecosystem for transparent paperless regulation in all States/Union Territories, a Centrally Sponsored Project for computerization of RCS Offices has been approved by the Government. Grants will be provided for purchase of hardware, development of software, etc. to the States/ UTs.
  1. Computerization of Agriculture and Rural Development Banks (ARDBs): To strengthen the Long-term Cooperative Credit structure, the project of computerization of 1,851 units of Agriculture and Rural Development Banks (ARDBs) has been approved by the Government. NABARD is the implementing agency for the project and will develop a national level software for ARDBs. Hardware, support for Digitization of legacy data, training to the employees, etc. will be provided under the project.
  1. Other Initiatives
  2. New National Cooperative Database for authentic and updated data repository: A database of cooperatives in the country has been prepared with the support of State Governments to facilitate stakeholders in policy making and implementation of programmes/ schemes related to cooperatives across the country. So far, data of around 7.86 lakh cooperatives has been captured in the database.
  1. Formulation of New National Cooperative Policy: A National level committee comprising 49 experts and stakeholders drawn from all over the Country has been constituted to formulate the New National Cooperative Policy for enabling a vibrant ecosystem to realize the vision of โ€˜Sahakar-se-Samriddhiโ€™.
  1. Multi-State Co-operative Societies (Amendment) Act, 2023: Amendment has been brought in the MSCS Act, 2002 to strengthen governance, enhance transparency, increase accountability, reform electoral process and incorporate provisions of 97th Constitutional Amendment in the Multi State Cooperative Societies.
  1. Inclusion of Cooperatives as โ€˜buyersโ€™ on GeM portal:  Government has permitted the cooperatives to register as โ€˜buyerโ€™ on GeM, enabling them to procure goods and services from nearly over 67 lakh vendors to facilitate economical purchases and greater transparency. So far, 559 cooperative societies have been onboarded on GeM as buyers.
  1. Expansion of National Cooperative Development Corporation (NCDC) to increase its range and depth: NCDC has launched new schemes in various sectors such as โ€˜Swayamshakti Sahkarโ€™ for SHGs; โ€˜Deerghavadhi Krishak Sahkarโ€™ for long term agricultural credit and โ€˜Dairy Sahkarโ€™ for dairy. Total financial assistance of Rs. 41,024 Crores has been disbursed by NCDC in FY 2022-23, which is almost 20% higher than the disbursement of Rs.34,221 crore in 2021-22. Government of India has permitted NCDC to issue bonds worth โ‚น2000 crore with government guarantee, subject to the adherence of specified terms and conditions. Further, NCDC is setting up sub-offices in 6 North Eastern States โ€“ Arunachal Pradesh, Meghalaya, Mizoram, Manipur, Nagaland and Tripura with the objective of taking various national schemes to the cooperative societies at their doorstep.
  1. Financial assistance by NCDC for Deep Sea Trawlers: NCDC is providing financial assistance for projects related to deep sea trawlers in coordination with the Department of Fisheries, Government of India. NCDC has already sanctioned financial assistance of Rs 20.30 crore for purchase of 14 deep sea trawlers for the Fisheries Cooperative Societies of Maharashtra.
  1. Refund to Investors of Sahara Group of Societies: A portal has been launched for making payments to the genuine depositors of the cooperative societies of Sahara Group in a transparent manner. Disbursement have already started after proper identification and submission of proof of their deposits and claims.

References

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Politics in the Name of Womenโ€™s Reservation. Contemporary Voice of Dalit, 0(0). https://doi.org/10.1177/2455328X241262562

PM GatiShakti National Master Plan to provide multimodal connectivity infrastructure to various economic zones

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Honโ€™ble Prime Minister launched the PM Gati Shakti National Master Plan (NMP) on 13thย October2021 for providing multimodal connectivity infrastructure to various economic zones. PM Gati Shakti National Master Plan provides a comprehensive database of the trunk & utility infrastructure, ongoing & future projects of various Infra structure and Economic Ministries/Departments of Central Government and States/UTs. This data is integrated with the GIS-enabled PM Gati Shakti platform, there by facilitating the integrated planning, designing, and monitoring of the Next Generation infrastructure projects on a single portal.

Economic Zones like textile clusters, pharmaceutical clusters, defence corridors, electronic parks, industrial corridors, ๏ฌshing clusters, agri zones etc. are being mapped for integrated infrastructure planning andmake Indian businesses more cost-competitive. This will boost economic growth, attract foreign investments while de-risking investments by visualizing the connectivity, and enhance the countryโ€™s global competitiveness in export markets.

While the development of integrated infrastructure development is addressed through the PM Gati Shakti NMP, e๏ฌƒciency in services (like processes, digital systems, and regulatory frame work) and human resources is addressed by the National Logistics Policy, 2022 through its Comprehensive Logistics Action Plan (CLAP). NMP and National Logistics Policy together provide a framework for creating a data-driven decision support mechanism for an e๏ฌƒcient logistics ecosystem aimed at reducing logistics costs and enhancing logistics efficiency in the country.

PM Gati Shakti is a Whole-of-Government approach adopted to facilitate integrated planning of multimodal infrastructure through collaboration among the concerned Ministries. So far, the  Logistics Division of DPIIT has conducted 62 Network Planning Group (NPG) meetings to assess the comprehensive area-based socio-economic development of infrastructure projects.

The feedback from various Ministries has been received; inter-alia Ministry of Road Transport and Highways is using PM  Gati Shakti  for ground surveys, land records, and  highway  alignments  resulting  insaving time and costs in the planning of projects; Ministry of Petroleumand Natural Gas utilizes NMP’s electronic Detail Route Survey (eDRS) to generate reports in a shorter span of time; Ministry of Railways has ๏ฌnalised Final Location Survey (FLS) in FY2021-22 at a much faster rate as compared toFY2020-21,to cite a few examples.

Further, the PM Gati Shakti institutional mechanism has been adopted by States/UTs and NPG meetings are also being organized at State/UT level to assess last and ๏ฌrst-mile connectivity gaps and ensure seamless movement of people, goods &services.

***

Largest River Island in the World, Majuli, Assam: A Case of Auniati Satra and โ€˜Udakhin Vaishnavโ€™

By: Shankar Chatterjee

Majuli is a lush, green, environment-friendly, and pollution-free freshwater island in the Brahmaputra, Assam, which is around 15 kilometers from Jorhat city and 390 kilometers from Guwahati city. Majuli had an area of 1250 square kilometers initially. Due to erosion, the area has declined to about 880 square kilometers (majuli.assam.gov.in/about-district/district-glance)
It is the world’s largest river island and largest river island district. It attracts tourists from all over the world. Majuli is also a strong contender for a place in the UNESCO’s World Heritage Site. The main festival is โ€˜Raas,’ a religious festival associated with Sri Krishna Bhagwan. Also, the island is famous for Satras (holy place), the most significant part of Neo-Vaishnavism culture. Each Satra consists of a large prayer hall facing a shrine, surrounded by dormitories. Many Assamese people are followers of Neo-Vaishnavism. It is pertinent to mention that Saint Srimanta Sankardev, a divine personality whose contributions and works are still shining in Assam, established 64 Satras on Majuli island. Due to erosion, only 31 Satras exist presently. Each Satra has its own cultural significance and tries to preserve unique artistic attributes in music, literature, dance, drama, etc.
In this article, a case of one Satra, viz., Auniati Satra, which is located in Majuli and established in 1653, is presented. It is believed that Ahom King Jayadhwaj Singha established this Satra. The deity of this Satra is Bhagawan Govinda Mahaprabhu. In this Satra, there are a few rooms viz., Namghar (for chanting Bhagawanโ€™s name), the residence of Satradhikari (Head of the Satra known as Gurugriha), and rooms for other disciples. One beautiful museum is located on the premises of Satra. By visiting this, many things can be learned.
The author visited this Satra on December 12, 2023, and interacted with the devotees (Bhakats and Pujaris). While discussing with Jayanta Madhav Saikia, the author learned that the Satra was spread over an area of 184 acres. Around 300 devotees known as โ€˜Udakhin Vaishnavโ€™ stay in different rooms on campus. They all are bachelors, do not marry, and are purely vegetarian. They themselves cook, or a person cooks for others. No woman can be โ€˜Udakhin Vaishnavโ€™. About the age of โ€˜Udakhin Vaishnav,โ€™ in the Satra, I was told that a kid of four years was the youngest, and the maximum was 90 years old. Across Assam, around 10 lakh disciples are members under the banner of this Satra. Also, there are 14 branches of this Satra. Further, the Satradhikari (head of the Monastery) established Namghar, i.e., Prayer Halls in Dubai and the USA. It is pertinent to mention that Namghar is literally a simple structure where the devotees recite the name of God ( mainly Sri Krishna’s name). Namghars were introduced in Assam by Srimanta Saint Sankardev (1449-1568). The author also interacted with the Pujari (priest) Bolin Sarma, who, at the age of five years, joined the Satra and is now 50 years of age and still associated with the Satra. At that time, he was performing Puja, so-called Pujari. He also informed that man Pujari (head priest) was 71 years old and joined at the age of 10 years in the Satra. Lastly, I wish to mention that the Head of the Satra, known as Satradhikari Dr. Pitambar Deva Goswami, although he was not available later on over cell phone, informed me that he completed his Ph.D. on โ€˜Satria festivalโ€™ and at the age of 10 years, he joined in the Satra. For the last 55 years, i.e., now 65 years, he has been in the Satra.
I was very excited to visit such a holy place and fascinated to know about โ€˜Udakhin Vaishnav,โ€™ who, for the welfare of society, fully sacrificed their lives. They are purely vegetarian, in the true sense of bachelor, and eat self-cook food or cooked by their fellows.
Prof Shankar Chatterjee, Hyderabad

References

Barua, U., Hore, D. K., & Sarma, R. (2007). Wild edible plants of Majuli island and Darrang districts of Assam.

Roy, N., Pandey, B. W., & Rani, U. (2020). Protecting the vanishing geo-cultural heritage of India: Case study of Majuli Island in Assam.ย International Journal of Geoheritage and Parks,ย 8(1), 18-30.

Sarma, J. N., & Phukan, M. K. (2004). Origin and some geomorphological changes of Majuli Island of the Brahmaputra River in Assam, India.ย Geomorphology,ย 60(1-2), 1-19.

Sarma, A. (2014). Landscape degradation of river island Majuli, Assam (India) due to flood and erosion by river Brahmaputra and its restoration.ย J Med Bioeng,ย 3(4).

The Complex Reality of Delhi’s Slums: A Closer Look at Urban Informality

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Delhi, the capital city of India, is a vibrant metropolis that juxtaposes modernity and tradition. However, amid the glittering skyscrapers and bustling marketplaces, there exists a stark contrast in the form of slums that dot the cityscape. These informal settlements, home to a significant portion of Delhi’s population, present a complex and challenging reality. This article aims to shed light on the slums of Delhi, exploring the factors that contribute to their existence, the challenges faced by residents, and potential solutions to address this pressing issue.

Factors Contributing to the Existence of Slums:

  1. Rapid Urbanization: Delhi has witnessed rapid urbanization over the years, attracting people from rural areas in search of better opportunities. However, the city’s infrastructure has struggled to keep pace with the population influx, leading to the formation of informal settlements.
  2. Lack of Affordable Housing: The soaring cost of real estate in Delhi has made it difficult for a significant portion of the population to afford proper housing. As a result, many individuals and families find themselves living in makeshift shelters in slums.
  3. Informal Employment: A substantial number of slum dwellers are engaged in informal and low-wage employment opportunities. The lack of stable income makes it challenging for them to access formal housing options, pushing them towards the fringes of the city.

Rapid Urbanization:

Delhi’s landscape has undergone a rapid transformation as it evolved into a bustling metropolis, magnetically attracting individuals from rural areas in pursuit of improved livelihoods. The city’s economic opportunities and urban allure have spurred an influx of people seeking a better life. However, this surge in population has strained the existing infrastructure, causing a proliferation of informal settlements. The speed at which Delhi has urbanized has outpaced the development of essential services, resulting in the emergence of slums that grapple with inadequate amenities and living conditions.

Lack of Affordable Housing:

One of the most pressing challenges contributing to the existence of slums in Delhi is the exorbitant cost of real estate. The city’s property market has experienced a meteoric rise, rendering it increasingly unaffordable for a significant segment of the population. The soaring property prices have left a considerable portion of Delhi’s residents with limited housing options, forcing them into makeshift shelters within the confines of slums. This disparity in housing affordability underscores a critical issue that demands attention to ensure a more equitable distribution of living spaces within the city.

Informal Employment:

A significant demographic within Delhi’s slums is engaged in informal and low-wage employment opportunities. The city’s economic landscape accommodates a diverse range of informal sectors, from street vending to day labor, providing a source of income for many. However, the nature of informal employment often means irregular and unstable income streams, making it arduous for individuals to secure formal housing. As a consequence, slum dwellers, driven by economic necessity, find themselves on the peripheries of the city, residing in settlements that lack the basic amenities necessary for dignified living.

Addressing these factors necessitates a comprehensive approach that considers not only housing but also the broader issues of urban planning, economic development, and social welfare. Efforts to provide affordable housing options, improve infrastructure, and formalize employment opportunities can contribute to alleviating the challenges faced by residents of Delhi’s slums. By acknowledging the multifaceted nature of the issue, policymakers and urban planners can work towards creating a more inclusive and sustainable urban environment for all of Delhi’s inhabitants.

Challenges Faced by Slum Dwellers:

  1. Inadequate Infrastructure: Slums often lack basic amenities such as proper sanitation, clean water supply, and electricity. The absence of these fundamental services contributes to a cycle of poverty and health challenges for the residents.
  2. Health and Hygiene Concerns: Overcrowded living conditions, coupled with inadequate sanitation facilities, create a breeding ground for diseases. The prevalence of health issues in slums underscores the urgent need for improved healthcare services and sanitation infrastructure.
  3. Educational Barriers: Access to quality education remains a significant challenge for children living in slums. Limited resources, coupled with the need for children to contribute to family income, often result in lower enrollment and higher dropout rates.
  4. Vulnerability to Displacement: Slum dwellers often live in constant fear of eviction, as their settlements are considered illegal. This vulnerability adds a layer of uncertainty to their lives and makes it difficult for them to invest in long-term improvements to their living conditions.

Inadequate Infrastructure:

One of the most pressing challenges faced by slum dwellers in Delhi is the pervasive lack of basic infrastructure. Many slum settlements are characterized by the absence of essential amenities such as proper sanitation, a reliable clean water supply, and consistent electricity. The dearth of these fundamental services perpetuates a cycle of poverty, hindering residents from breaking free from the constraints of their living conditions. Insufficient infrastructure not only compromises the daily lives of slum dwellers but also restricts their potential for economic and social advancement.

Health and Hygiene Concerns:

The overcrowded living conditions within Delhi’s slums, combined with the absence of adequate sanitation facilities, create a breeding ground for various diseases. The prevalence of health issues in these communities highlights the urgent need for improved healthcare services and enhanced sanitation infrastructure. Communicable diseases thrive in environments where hygiene is compromised, posing a constant threat to the well-being of slum residents. Addressing health and hygiene concerns is paramount to breaking the cycle of illness and promoting the overall welfare of those residing in Delhi’s slums.

Educational Barriers:

Access to quality education remains a significant hurdle for children growing up in Delhi’s slums. Limited resources, both within the slum communities and in the broader education system, contribute to lower enrollment rates and higher dropout rates. Children often face the dual challenge of needing to contribute to family income, making it difficult for them to prioritize education. Breaking down educational barriers is essential for empowering the younger generation within slum communities, providing them with the tools and opportunities needed to overcome the cycle of poverty.

Vulnerability to Displacement:

The constant fear of eviction looms large over the lives of slum dwellers in Delhi, as their settlements are often deemed illegal. This vulnerability not only disrupts the daily lives of residents but also creates a layer of uncertainty that impedes long-term improvements to their living conditions. The perpetual risk of displacement discourages investments in infrastructure, education, and healthcare within slum communities, perpetuating a cycle of neglect and marginalization.

To address these challenges, concerted efforts are needed from policymakers, community leaders, and civil society organizations. Initiatives that focus on improving infrastructure, enhancing healthcare services, promoting education, and providing secure land tenure can contribute to breaking the cycle of poverty and vulnerability faced by the residents of Delhi’s slums. Only through a holistic and collaborative approach can meaningful progress be made towards creating more inclusive and equitable urban spaces.

Potential Solutions and Initiatives:

  1. Affordable Housing Programs: Implementing affordable housing initiatives and policies can help address the housing crisis in Delhi. The government, in collaboration with non-governmental organizations, can work towards providing affordable housing options for low-income families.
  2. Improving Infrastructure: Investment in basic infrastructure such as sanitation, clean water supply, and electricity is crucial for enhancing the living conditions in slums. Targeted interventions can significantly improve the quality of life for residents.
  3. Community Empowerment: Empowering slum communities through education and skill development programs can break the cycle of poverty. Initiatives that focus on providing vocational training and creating employment opportunities within or near the slums can uplift residents economically.
  4. Regularization of Informal Settlements: Instead of displacement, authorities could consider the regularization of existing informal settlements. This involves providing legal recognition, basic services, and tenure security to residents, contributing to a more stable and secure living environment.

In the dynamic and evolving landscape of Delhi’s slums, addressing the challenges faced by residents requires proactive and comprehensive solutions. Here are potential initiatives and strategies that could make a significant impact on improving the lives of those living in informal settlements:

Affordable Housing Programs: Implementing affordable housing initiatives is paramount in alleviating the housing crisis in Delhi. The government, in collaboration with non-governmental organizations (NGOs) and private stakeholders, can develop and execute policies that prioritize affordable housing options for low-income families. This may involve the creation of subsidized housing schemes, low-interest loans, or innovative housing models that cater to the unique needs of slum dwellers.

Improving Infrastructure: A targeted and sustained investment in basic infrastructure is crucial for enhancing the living conditions in Delhi’s slums. This includes initiatives to improve sanitation facilities, ensure a reliable and clean water supply, and provide access to electricity. Upgrading infrastructure not only addresses immediate health and hygiene concerns but also contributes to the overall well-being and dignity of slum residents.

Community Empowerment: Empowering slum communities through education and skill development programs can be a transformative step in breaking the cycle of poverty. Initiatives that provide access to quality education for children and adults alike, coupled with vocational training programs, can equip residents with the skills needed for better employment opportunities. Creating avenues for entrepreneurship within or near the slums further uplifts the economic prospects of the community.

Regularization of Informal Settlements: Rather than displacing residents, authorities could consider the regularization of existing informal settlements. This involves providing legal recognition to these settlements, ensuring basic services such as water, sanitation, and electricity, and granting tenure security to residents. Regularization not only enhances the legitimacy of slum communities but also provides a more stable and secure living environment, encouraging long-term investments in infrastructure and community development.

Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs): Encouraging partnerships between the public and private sectors can amplify the impact of initiatives aimed at slum improvement. Collaborations with private entities can bring in additional resources, expertise, and innovative solutions. This could involve joint ventures for housing projects, infrastructure development, or social enterprises that benefit the residents of slum communities.

Inclusive Urban Planning: Integrating slum development into the broader urban planning framework is essential for creating a more inclusive city. Authorities can adopt participatory approaches, involving slum residents in the planning and decision-making processes. This ensures that development initiatives align with the unique needs and aspirations of the communities they seek to serve.

Conclusion:

The slums of Delhi represent a complex challenge that requires a multifaceted approach. Tackling issues related to housing, infrastructure, healthcare, and education is crucial for creating a more inclusive and equitable urban environment. As Delhi continues to evolve, policymakers, community leaders, and citizens must come together to find sustainable solutions that uplift the lives of those residing in the city’s informal settlements. By combining these initiatives and strategies, Delhi has the potential to transform its slum areas into thriving, sustainable communities. These efforts not only address immediate challenges but also lay the foundation for a more equitable and inclusive urban landscape.

References

Datta, Ayona. “The intimate city: Violence, gender and ordinary life in Delhi slums.”ย Urban Geographyย 37.3 (2016): 323-342.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fate of Slums of Bhopal-A Tale of Struggle and Resilience.ย Think India Journal,ย 26(4), 12-18.

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Shashikant Nishant Sharma. “Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies.” (2023).

Gupta, I., & Mitra, A. (2002). Rural migrants and labour segmentation: micro-level evidence from Delhi slums.ย Economic and Political Weekly, 163-168.

Kumar, N., & Aggarwal, S. C. (2003). Patterns of consumption and poverty in Delhi slums.ย Economic and Political Weekly, 5294-5300.

Mitra, A. (2004). Informal Sector, Networks and Intraโ€City Variations in Activities: Findings from Delhi Slums.ย Review of Urban & Regional Development Studies,ย 16(2), 154-169.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Urban forms in planning and design.”ย International Journal of Researchย 1.1 (2014): 7-16.

Sharma, S. N. (2013). Sustainable development strategies and approaches.ย International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR),ย 2.

Sharma, S. N. (2014).ย Participatory Planning in Plan Preparation. BookCountry.

Sharma, S. N. (2016). Introduction to Sociology.ย New Perspectives in Sociology and Allied Fields, 1.

Sharma, S. N. (Ed.). (2016).ย New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd.

Snell-Rood, C. (2015).ย No one will let her live: women’s struggle for well-being in a Delhi slum. University of California Press.

Tsujita, Y. (2013). Factors that prevent children from gaining access to schooling: A study of Delhi slum households.ย International Journal of Educational Development,ย 33(4), 348-357.

Role of PDF Documents in Educational Services

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

In the ever-evolving landscape of digital communication, PDF documents stand as pillars of versatility, reliability, and universal accessibility. Portable Document Format, abbreviated as PDF, has emerged as a standard in the realm of document sharing and archiving. Its importance transcends industries and professions, offering a myriad of advantages that have solidified its position as a preferred format for conveying information in the digital age. PDF Cake‘s global accessibility ensures that its benefits transcend geographical boundaries.

Photo by freestocks.org on Pexels.com

One of the primary reasons behind the significance of PDF documents lies in their universality. Unlike other file formats that might alter in appearance or content when accessed on different devices or operating systems, PDFs retain their original formatting across platforms. This consistency ensures that the document appears the same for all recipients, maintaining the integrity of the content regardless of the software or device used to access it. This reliability makes PDFs an ideal choice for sharing official documents, reports, and academic papers.

Moreover, PDF documents are highly secure, allowing for encryption, password protection, and digital signatures. This robust security feature ensures that sensitive information remains confidential and protected from unauthorized access or tampering. Businesses and individuals alike rely on PDFs to safeguard their proprietary data and confidential documents, instilling trust and confidence in their digital communication methods.

Another compelling aspect of PDFs is their capacity for multi-functionality. From simple text documents to complex interactive forms, PDFs support a wide array of content types. They accommodate images, hyperlinks, annotations, multimedia elements, and form fields, making them suitable for diverse purposes, including e-books, manuals, presentations, and legal contracts. This versatility empowers users to create dynamic, interactive, and engaging content while maintaining the document’s structure and readability.

The accessibility of PDF documents also plays a pivotal role in their importance. PDFs are viewable on virtually any device, whether it’s a computer, tablet, or smartphone. Additionally, they can be easily shared via email, file-sharing platforms, or integrated into websites. This accessibility ensures seamless distribution of information across global audiences, transcending geographical barriers and facilitating efficient communication in various contexts.

Furthermore, the archival quality of PDF documents makes them invaluable for long-term storage and preservation of information. PDFs retain their formatting and content integrity over time, ensuring that the information remains accessible and readable even years after its creation. This aspect is particularly crucial for archiving historical documents, research papers, legal records, and government reports.

In conclusion, the importance of PDF documents in the digital era cannot be overstated. Their reliability, security, versatility, accessibility, and archival capabilities make them indispensable tools for individuals, businesses, educational institutions, and government bodies. As technology continues to evolve, PDFs remain steadfast, serving as a cornerstone of efficient and secure digital communication, document management, and information dissemination. Whether for sharing critical business information, disseminating educational materials, or preserving historical records, PDF documents continue to play an indispensable role in our increasingly digital world.

References

Devine, Heather, Andres Gonzalez, and Matthew Hardy. “Making accessible PDF documents.”ย Proceedings of the 11th ACM symposium on Document engineering. 2011.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “An Insight into the Book Titled Why Stories Work.”ย Think India Journalย 26.4 (2023): 19-24.

Waller, Rob. “What makes a good document.”ย The criteria we use. Technical paperย 2 (2011).

The Harsh Reality of Slum Life in Bhopal: A Closer Look at Poor Living Conditions

By: Kavita Dehalwar

Bhopal, the capital city of Madhya Pradesh in central India, is a vibrant and bustling metropolis that boasts a rich cultural heritage. However, amidst the glitz and glamour, there exists a stark contrast in the form of slums that house a significant portion of the city’s population. The poor living conditions in these slums paint a grim picture of inequality and social disparity. In this article, we delve into the challenges faced by the residents of Bhopal’s slums and shed light on the urgent need for intervention.

Overcrowding and Limited Space:

One of the most pressing issues in Bhopal’s slums is the severe overcrowding that residents have to contend with daily. The limited availability of space forces families to live in cramped conditions, often with insufficient ventilation and sanitation facilities. This not only jeopardizes the health of the residents but also contributes to the rapid spread of diseases.

The issue of overcrowding in Bhopal’s slums is a pervasive challenge that significantly impacts the daily lives and well-being of residents. The limited availability of space creates an environment where families are compelled to live in close quarters, leading to a myriad of issues.

Cramped Living Conditions:

In many slum areas, families reside in small, makeshift shelters constructed from a variety of materials, often salvaged or recycled. The lack of space results in cramped living conditions where multiple family members share confined quarters. The absence of separate rooms or designated living spaces means that privacy is a luxury, and individuals often struggle to find personal space within the confines of their homes.

Insufficient Ventilation:

The cramped living conditions are exacerbated by inadequate ventilation, as many of the structures lack proper windows or ventilation systems. Poor air circulation not only contributes to the discomfort of residents but also poses serious health risks. Stagnant air can trap pollutants and exacerbate respiratory issues, leading to a higher prevalence of respiratory diseases among slum dwellers.

Sanitation Challenges:

Overcrowded living conditions also give rise to significant sanitation challenges. With a limited number of communal facilities, such as shared toilets and bathing areas, maintaining personal hygiene becomes a considerable struggle. The lack of private sanitation facilities not only compromises the dignity of residents but also increases the risk of the spread of infectious diseases.

Health Implications:

The overcrowded living conditions in Bhopal’s slums create an environment conducive to the rapid spread of diseases. Communicable diseases thrive in crowded spaces where individuals have limited access to healthcare and sanitation. Respiratory infections, waterborne diseases, and vector-borne illnesses become more prevalent, posing a constant threat to the health and well-being of the community.

Social and Psychological Impact:

Beyond the physical health implications, overcrowding in slums also takes a toll on the mental and emotional well-being of residents. The stress of living in crowded conditions, coupled with the lack of personal space, can contribute to increased tension within families and communities. Additionally, the challenging living conditions may hinder the development of children, affecting their cognitive and emotional growth.

Addressing the Challenge:

To address the issue of overcrowding in Bhopal’s slums, there is a pressing need for comprehensive urban planning and development initiatives. Efforts should focus on creating affordable housing solutions, improving infrastructure, and ensuring access to basic amenities. By providing adequate living space, promoting proper ventilation, and enhancing sanitation facilities, it is possible to mitigate the adverse effects of overcrowding and uplift the quality of life for slum residents. Additionally, community engagement and empowerment play a crucial role in the sustainable development of these areas, fostering a sense of ownership and resilience among the residents. Through collaborative efforts, it is possible to transform the living conditions in Bhopal’s slums and pave the way for a healthier, more equitable future.

Inadequate Sanitation Facilities:

Sanitation facilities in Bhopal’s slums are far from adequate, creating a breeding ground for health hazards. The absence of proper sewage systems and waste management leads to the accumulation of garbage and stagnant water, facilitating the spread of waterborne diseases. Lack of access to clean water exacerbates the problem, leaving residents vulnerable to infections and illnesses.

The inadequate sanitation facilities in the slums of Bhopal present a critical challenge to the health and well-being of its residents. The absence of proper infrastructure for sewage systems and waste management contributes to a host of problems, creating an environment conducive to the spread of diseases.

Lack of Proper Sewage Systems:

One of the primary issues in Bhopal’s slums is the absence of adequate sewage systems. Many residents do not have access to proper toilet facilities, forcing them to rely on shared or communal toilets that are often unhygienic and poorly maintained. The lack of a comprehensive sewage system means that waste disposal becomes a significant challenge, with untreated sewage posing a threat to both the environment and public health.

Accumulation of Garbage:

In the absence of efficient waste management systems, garbage accumulates in and around the slum areas. Piles of waste become breeding grounds for pests and disease vectors, increasing the risk of the spread of infectious diseases. The lack of proper waste disposal mechanisms not only affects the immediate living conditions of the residents but also contributes to broader environmental degradation.

Stagnant Water and Waterborne Diseases:

The inadequate drainage systems in Bhopal’s slums often result in the accumulation of stagnant water, particularly during the monsoon season. Stagnant water becomes a breeding ground for mosquitoes that carry diseases such as dengue and malaria. Waterborne diseases, including cholera and dysentery, are prevalent due to the lack of access to clean water and the contamination of existing water sources with untreated sewage.

Vulnerability to Infections and Illnesses:

The combination of insufficient sanitation facilities, inadequate waste management, and the absence of clean water access creates a perfect storm for the vulnerability of slum residents to infections and illnesses. Preventable diseases thrive in such environments, affecting the overall health of the community and placing an additional burden on already strained healthcare systems.

Addressing Sanitation Challenges:

Improving sanitation facilities in Bhopal’s slums requires a concerted effort from both governmental and non-governmental organizations. Comprehensive urban planning initiatives should prioritize the installation of proper sewage systems, waste management infrastructure, and the construction of clean and accessible communal toilets. Public awareness campaigns about the importance of hygiene and sanitation practices are also essential to promote behavioral change within the community.

Access to Clean Water:

Ensuring access to clean water is paramount in addressing the sanitation crisis. Initiatives to provide reliable and safe water sources, along with community education on water conservation and purification methods, can significantly improve the overall health of slum residents. Collaboration between local authorities, NGOs, and community leaders is crucial to implementing sustainable solutions that address the root causes of inadequate sanitation facilities.

In conclusion, the inadequate sanitation facilities in Bhopal’s slums are a pressing issue that demands immediate attention and comprehensive solutions. By addressing these challenges, we can create healthier and more sustainable living conditions for slum residents, fostering a positive impact on their overall well-being and breaking the cycle of poverty and disease.

Substandard Housing Conditions:

The quality of housing in Bhopal’s slums is a major concern. Many residents live in makeshift structures constructed from salvaged materials, offering little protection from the elements. Flimsy walls and leaky roofs make these homes susceptible to damage during inclement weather, further compromising the safety and well-being of the inhabitants.

The substandard housing conditions prevalent in the slums of Bhopal underscore a critical aspect of the broader issue of poverty and inequality in the city. Residents of these areas often grapple with makeshift dwellings constructed from salvaged materials, resulting in homes that provide minimal protection from the elements and pose significant risks to the safety and well-being of inhabitants.

Makeshift Structures:

A predominant feature of Bhopal’s slums is the prevalence of makeshift structures. Residents, often facing economic constraints, resort to constructing homes using salvaged materials such as corrugated metal, tarpaulin, and cardboard. These structures lack the durability and structural integrity required to withstand the challenges posed by weather conditions, leaving residents vulnerable to various environmental hazards.

Limited Protection from the Elements:

The flimsy nature of these makeshift dwellings offers limited protection from the elements. During the scorching summer months, residents endure extreme heat, with inadequate insulation aggravating the already challenging living conditions. Similarly, during the monsoon season, leaky roofs and compromised structural integrity expose inhabitants to rainwater infiltration, contributing to the risk of waterborne diseases and compromising the structural stability of the dwellings.

Vulnerability to Weather-Related Risks:

Inclement weather, including heavy rains, strong winds, and extreme temperatures, poses a significant threat to the safety of residents living in substandard housing conditions. Structural damage and collapse are not uncommon, leading to injuries and, in severe cases, loss of life. The lack of proper foundations and building materials exacerbates the susceptibility of these dwellings to weather-related risks.

Health Implications:

Beyond the immediate structural risks, substandard housing conditions have profound implications for the health of residents. Inadequate shelter contributes to a higher likelihood of respiratory problems due to exposure to the elements. Mold growth resulting from leaks and dampness further exacerbates health issues, especially among children and the elderly. The compromised living conditions also increase the risk of injuries and infections.

Addressing the Housing Crisis:

Addressing the substandard housing conditions in Bhopal’s slums requires a multifaceted approach that combines immediate interventions with long-term solutions. Initiatives should include:

  1. Affordable Housing Programs: Implementing affordable housing programs that prioritize the needs of slum residents, providing safe and secure living spaces that meet basic standards.
  2. Urban Redevelopment: Undertaking comprehensive urban redevelopment projects to improve infrastructure, housing quality, and overall living conditions in slum areas.
  3. Community Engagement: Involving residents in the decision-making process and seeking their input on housing solutions to ensure that interventions are culturally sensitive and align with the community’s needs.
  4. Access to Basic Services: Ensuring that slum areas have access to basic services such as water, sanitation, and electricity, which are integral components of improved living conditions.
  5. Government and NGO Collaboration: Facilitating collaboration between governmental bodies, non-governmental organizations (NGOs), and community-based organizations to pool resources and expertise for effective housing solutions.

By prioritizing the improvement of housing conditions in Bhopal’s slums, stakeholders can contribute to the creation of safer, healthier, and more dignified living environments for residents, ultimately breaking the cycle of poverty and fostering sustainable urban development.

Limited Educational Opportunities:

The cycle of poverty is perpetuated by the limited educational opportunities available to children in slum areas. Lack of access to quality education leaves these youngsters with few prospects for the future, trapping them in a cycle of poverty that is hard to break. Addressing educational disparities is crucial for breaking this cycle and uplifting the community as a whole.

Healthcare Disparities:

Access to healthcare in slum areas is often limited, and residents face significant barriers to receiving timely and adequate medical attention. The prevalence of unhygienic living conditions contributes to the spread of diseases, and the lack of healthcare infrastructure exacerbates the situation. Efforts to improve healthcare accessibility and awareness are critical to enhancing the well-being of slum dwellers.

Community Empowerment and Urban Planning:

Addressing the poor living conditions in Bhopal’s slums requires a multi-faceted approach that combines community empowerment with effective urban planning. Involving the residents in decision-making processes, providing skill development opportunities, and implementing sustainable urban development projects can contribute to positive change.

Conclusion:

The poor living conditions in the slums of Bhopal are a stark reminder of the social and economic disparities that persist in our society. Efforts to improve sanitation, housing, education, and healthcare are imperative to uplift the lives of slum dwellers and provide them with a chance for a better future. By addressing these challenges collectively, we can work towards building a more inclusive and equitable society in Bhopal and beyond.

References

Choudhary AK, Choudhary A, Tiwari SC, Dwivedi R. Factors associated with low birth weight among newborns in an urban slum community in Bhopal. Indian journal of public health. 2013 Jan 1;57(1):20-3.

Dehalwar K, Singh J. Current State of Water Management System: Case Review of Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh. International Journal of Civil, Structural, Environmental and Infrastructure Engineering Research and Development (IJCSEIERD). 2015;5(6):35-40.

Dehalwar K, Singh J. Challenges and strategies for the improvement of water management in Bhopal. European Scientific Journal. 2016 Jan 1;12(2).

Dehalwar K, Sharma SN. Fate of Slums of Bhopal-A Tale of Struggle and Resilience. Think India Journal. 2023 Nov 3;26(4):12-8.

Kumar Gupta S, Nandeshwar S. Status of maternal and child health and services utilization patterns in the urban slums of Bhopal, India. National Journal of Community Medicine. 2012 Jun 30;3(02):330-2.

Sanyal S, Sen A. Socio-economic Conditions of Urban Slum Dwellers in Bhopal City. The Geographer. 2016;63(2):61-70.

Saxena PN, Joshi R. Eradication of slums in Bhopal City. Int J Sci Technol Eng. 2015;2(6):104-12.

Sharma SN. Sustainable development strategies and approaches. International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR). 2013;2.

Sharma SN, editor. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd; 2016 Jun 3.

Sharma SN. A Review of Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana. Think India Journal. 2020 Feb 19;23(1):26-32.

Understanding the Dynamics of Peri-Urban Areas: Navigating the Interface Between Urban and Rural Realms

By Kavita Dehalwar

Peri-urban areas, situated at the fringe of urban centers, represent a unique and dynamic space that embodies the confluence of urban and rural characteristics. These transitional zones are increasingly becoming focal points for researchers, policymakers, and planners due to their distinct challenges and opportunities. This article explores the multifaceted nature of peri-urban areas, shedding light on their defining features, issues, and the implications for sustainable development.

Image Credit: Idczak, P., & Mrozik, K. (2018)

Peri-urban areas, the dynamic spaces straddling the urban and rural realms, have been subjects of extensive research, each contributing valuable insights into their unique challenges and opportunities. The works of Dehalwar et al. (“Fate of Slums of Bhopal-A Tale of Struggle and Resilience”) and Kumar et al. (“Planning and Development of Housing in Urban Fringe Area: Case of Bhopal (M.P.)”) shed light on the struggles and resilience of communities in peri-urban Bhopal, illustrating the complex interplay of social, economic, and environmental factors.

Kombe’s study (“Land use dynamics in peri-urban areas and their implications on the urban growth and form: the case of Dar es Salaam, Tanzania”) delves into land use dynamics, emphasizing their impact on urban growth and form. This work highlights the need for comprehensive planning to address the challenges posed by rapid urbanization on the fringes of cities.

Mortoja et al.’s systematic review (“What is the most suitable methodological approach to demarcate peri-urban areas?”) critically assesses various methodological approaches to demarcate peri-urban areas. Understanding the most suitable demarcation methods is crucial for effective planning and development interventions.

Rauws and de Roo (“Exploring transitions in the peri-urban area”) offer insights into the transitions occurring in peri-urban areas, emphasizing the importance of understanding and managing these changes to ensure sustainable development.

Sharma’s extensive body of work, including “Urban forms in planning and design,” “Sustainable development strategies and approaches,” and “Review of most used urban growth models,” provides a comprehensive understanding of urban development, sustainability, and growth models. Additionally, Sharma et al.’s article in Thematics Journal of Geography (“Redefining Peri-urban Urban Areas”) contributes to the ongoing discourse on peri-urban areas, offering new perspectives and frameworks for understanding and planning these transitional zones.

Lastly, Wandl and Magoni (“Sustainable planning of peri-urban areas: Introduction to the special issue”) underscore the importance of sustainable planning in peri-urban areas. Their work provides a foundational perspective for policymakers and planners aiming to strike a balance between urbanization and environmental conservation in these crucial zones.

Collectively, these studies contribute to a holistic understanding of peri-urban areas, addressing their complexities, challenges, and sustainable development strategies. The interdisciplinary nature of the research reflects the diverse factors at play in these transitional spaces, ultimately guiding policymakers and researchers toward informed and effective interventions.

Defining Peri-Urban Areas:

Peri-urban areas, often referred to as the urban-rural interface, are regions that lie on the outskirts of expanding urban centers. These zones are characterized by a complex interplay of urban and rural elements, encompassing a mix of agricultural, residential, industrial, and recreational land uses. The boundaries between the urban and rural become blurred in peri-urban areas, creating a mosaic of land uses and socio-economic activities.

Features and Challenges:

  1. Land Use Diversity: Peri-urban areas exhibit diverse land uses, ranging from traditional agriculture and rural settlements to industrial zones and suburban developments. This diversity poses challenges in land management, as conflicting interests may arise between agricultural preservation and urban expansion.
  2. Infrastructure and Services: The rapid urbanization of peri-urban areas often outpaces the development of necessary infrastructure and services. Issues such as inadequate transportation, water supply, and sanitation facilities can impede the quality of life for residents.
  3. Environmental Concerns: Balancing the preservation of natural resources with urban growth is a critical concern in peri-urban regions. Deforestation, pollution, and the depletion of water resources are challenges that require sustainable planning and management strategies.
  4. Social Dynamics: Peri-urban areas experience social transformations as migration and urbanization influence local communities. This can lead to issues related to cultural identity, social cohesion, and access to education and healthcare.

Opportunities for Sustainable Development:

  1. Integrated Planning: Adopting integrated planning approaches that consider both urban and rural aspects is essential for sustainable peri-urban development. This involves collaboration between urban and rural planners to create cohesive land use strategies.
  2. Agricultural Innovation: Supporting sustainable agriculture practices in peri-urban areas can enhance food security while preserving rural livelihoods. This may involve promoting agroecology, local markets, and alternative farming methods.
  3. Green Infrastructure: Designing peri-urban areas with green spaces, parks, and sustainable infrastructure not only improves the quality of life but also contributes to environmental conservation.
  4. Community Engagement: Involving local communities in decision-making processes is crucial for addressing the unique challenges of peri-urban areas. Community engagement ensures that development initiatives align with the needs and aspirations of residents.

Conclusion:

Peri-urban areas stand at the crossroads of urbanization and rural life, presenting both challenges and opportunities. Effectively managing these transitional zones requires a holistic and integrated approach that considers the diverse needs of residents, the environment, and the economy. By acknowledging the complexity of peri-urban dynamics, planners and policymakers can work towards fostering sustainable development that respects the unique identity of these areas.

References

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Shashikant Nishant Sharma. “Fate of Slums of Bhopal-A Tale of Struggle and Resilience.”ย Think India Journalย 26.4 (2023): 12-18.

Idczak, P., & Mrozik, K. (2018). Periurbanisation โ€“ evidence from Polish metropolitan areas. Economic and Environmental Studies18(45), 173โ€“192. https://doi.org/10.25167/ees.2018.45.11

Kombe, Wilbard Jackson. “Land use dynamics in peri-urban areas and their implications on the urban growth and form: the case of Dar es Salaam, Tanzania.”ย Habitat Internationalย 29.1 (2005): 113-135.

Kumar, G., Vyas, S., Sharma, S. N., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). Planning and Development of Housing in Urban Fringe Area: Case of Bhopal (M.P.).ย GIS Business,ย 18(1), 1โ€“14.

Mortoja, Md Golam, Tan Yigitcanlar, and Severine Mayere. “What is the most suitable methodological approach to demarcate peri-urban areas? A systematic review of the literature.”ย Land Use Policyย 95 (2020): 104601.

Rauws, W. S., and Gert de Roo. “Exploring transitions in the peri-urban area.”ย Planning Theory & Practiceย 12.2 (2011): 269-284.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Urban forms in planning and design.”ย International Journal of Researchย 1.1 (2014): 7-16.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Sustainable development strategies and approaches.”ย International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR)ย 2 (2013).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Review of most used urban growth models.”ย International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET)ย 10.3 (2019): 397-405.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, Shankar Chatterjee, and Kavita Dehalwar. “Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Challenges and Opportunities.”ย Think India Journalย 26.1 (2023): 7-15.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed.ย New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, Dehalwar, K., Kumar, G., & Vyas, S. (2023). Redefining Peri-urban Urban Areas.ย Thematics Journal of Geography,ย 12(3), 8โ€“13.

Wandl, Alexander, and Marcello Magoni. “Sustainable planning of peri-urban areas: Introduction to the special issue.”ย Planning Practice & Researchย 32.1 (2017): 1-3.

โ€œCaste is a notion; it is a state of the mind.โ€ BR Ambedkar: Tribute to him on his death anniversary

On December 6, 1956, India lost a great soul and a legendary figure who passed away at his home in Delhi; he was none other than Dr. Bhimrao Ramji Ambedkar (Dr. B.R. Ambedkar), popularly known as Babasaheb/Ambedkar-Saheb. Dr. Babasaheb was born on April 14, 1891, at Mhow in Madhya Pradesh. Now, Mhow, officially Dr. Ambedkar Nagar, is a cantonment. I had the opportunity to visit his birthplace for academic purposes.
From time to time, many genius people were born in India and all were not born with a silver spoon as many had to struggle in their lives owing to economic, social, and other issues. Dr. B.R. Ambedkar was one such person who had to fight in his life because of social stigma (caste issue), not economic. With his knowledge, wisdom, and humanitarian feelings, he had proved by caste that one cannot be great and one can be great only by deeds.
Anyway, to commemorate Dr Ambedkarโ€™s valuable contribution to society, December 6 is observed as Mahaparinirvan Diwas across the country.
Babasaheb was fond of reading books, so he purchased about 2,000 old books in New York, also, at the time of the Second Round Table Conference, he bought many books in London and sent them to India in 32 boxes. He had his own library in his house, and it is believed that he lived, took his meals, and even slept in the library.
Being an eminent economist and endowed with foresight, Dr. Ambedkar Saheb contributed substantially to the formulation of a postwar economic development plan in general and water resources and electric-power development in particular. Another highlighting point is that because of his initiative, the Constitution of India has directed, โ€œno child below the age of 14 years shall be employed to work in any factory, mine or engaged in any hazardous employmentโ€. His views towards family planning and the development of agriculture have great relevance today.
In school days, I read about him feeling bad as he suffered because of caste issues. I read some books and articles about him, and I respect his many sayings. I am presenting here one – “History shows that where ethics and economics come in conflict, victory is always with economics. Vested interests have never been known to have willingly divested themselves unless there was sufficient force to compel them.”.
I would like to mention one historical fact for the readers. Both India and Pakistan were created (because of British politics), in the same month, same time only with a day variation, but there was an interesting phenomenon. Dr. Ambedkar was appointed the first Law Minister in the Cabinet of Pt. Jawaharlal Nehru. What a coincidence, as Pakistanโ€™s first Law and Labour Minister was also from the Scheduled Caste (Hindu) community, Sri Jogendra Nath Mandal, hailing from undivided Bengal. However, both resigned subsequently – Dr. Ambedkar resigned in September 1951 and Jogendra Nath Mandal in October 1950. Sri Mandal later migrated to India, West Bengal.
In 1990, Dr Ambedkar Saheb was posthumously awarded the Bharat Ratna, India’s highest civilian award. Although Babasaheb passed away on December 6, 1956, through his activities and contributions, he will be in the hearts of millions of Indians generation after generation.
Prof Shankar Chatterjee, Hyderabad

National Urban Policy Framework (NUPF) 2018

By Kavita Dehalwar

India is undergoing one of the worldโ€™s fastest urban transitions. By 2030, nearly 600 million Indians are expected to live in urban areas, contributing around 70% of the national GDP. This transformation brings both opportunities and challenges: rapid economic growth, innovation, and cultural vibrancy, but also rising inequality, housing shortages, pollution, congestion, and inadequate infrastructure.

Photo by RDNE Stock project on Pexels.com

Recognizing the need for a coherent national approach, the National Urban Policy Framework (NUPF) 2018 was introduced as a guiding document for cities to become sustainable engines of growth, aligned with the goals of inclusive development, improved quality of life, and economic competitiveness.


2. Vision of NUPF

The vision of the NUPF 2018 is to create โ€œSustainable, Inclusive, Productive, and Resilient Urban Developmentโ€ in India.
It seeks to reimagine Indian cities as:

  • Engines of economic growth
  • Inclusive hubs that provide opportunities for all, especially marginalized communities
  • Resilient spaces capable of addressing climate change and disaster risks
  • Livable cities that improve the quality of life for residents

3. Guiding Principles

The framework rests on certain guiding principles:

  1. Sustainability: Promoting environmentally responsible urbanization.
  2. Inclusiveness: Ensuring equitable access to housing, services, and opportunities.
  3. Integration: Coordinating across sectors and levels of governance.
  4. Participation: Engaging citizens, communities, and stakeholders in planning.
  5. Resilience: Building adaptive capacity to handle shocks and stresses.

4. The Ten Sutras (Core Pillars) of NUPF

The NUPF identifies 10 sutras (thematic pillars) that define the scope of urban transformation in India:

  1. Sustainable & Inclusive Cities โ€“ Cities that balance growth with equity and environment.
  2. Cities as Engines of Growth โ€“ Leveraging urban areas to drive national economic progress.
  3. Housing & Inclusiveness โ€“ Affordable, adequate, and safe housing for all sections of society.
  4. Productivity & Prosperity โ€“ Enhancing economic efficiency and competitiveness of cities.
  5. Urban Infrastructure & Resilience โ€“ Strengthening transport, water, sanitation, energy, and resilience to climate risks.
  6. Urban Governance & Institutional Framework โ€“ Clear roles, empowered institutions, and capacity-building at city level.
  7. Smart Cities & Technology โ€“ Harnessing ICT for better service delivery, transparency, and citizen engagement.
  8. Urban Planning & Design โ€“ Compact, transit-oriented, and livable urban forms.
  9. Housing for All & Slum-Free Cities โ€“ Integration of slum redevelopment and affordable housing programs.
  10. Implementation & Performance Management โ€“ Strong monitoring, evaluation, and outcome-based governance.

5. Key Areas of Intervention

To operationalize the framework, NUPF suggests interventions in the following areas:

  • Urban Housing Policy: Expand rental housing, cooperative housing, and slum redevelopment.
  • Infrastructure Development: Public transport, water supply, sanitation, energy efficiency.
  • Climate & Environment: Green spaces, renewable energy, disaster risk management.
  • Urban Economy: Skill development, local economic zones, entrepreneurship.
  • Social Inclusion: Gender-sensitive urban planning, welfare for migrants and informal workers.
  • Governance: Empowered municipal governments, financial autonomy, and capacity building.

6. Alignment with Global Agendas

The NUPF 2018 aligns with:

  • UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDG 11: Sustainable Cities and Communities)
  • Paris Climate Agreement (low-carbon pathways for cities)
  • New Urban Agenda (Habitat III) by UN-Habitat
    This ensures Indiaโ€™s urban development policies resonate with global commitments.

7. Implementation Strategy

The framework emphasizes multi-level governance and partnerships:

  • Central Government: Provides broad policy directions, funding, and coordination.
  • State Governments: Adapt the framework to regional contexts.
  • Urban Local Bodies (ULBs): Implement policies on the ground with autonomy and accountability.
  • Private Sector & Civil Society: Collaborate in infrastructure, housing, and innovation.

8. Expected Outcomes

If effectively implemented, the NUPF 2018 aims to achieve:

  • Affordable housing and improved living standards.
  • Efficient and sustainable urban infrastructure.
  • Economic vibrancy through strong urban economies.
  • Cleaner, greener, and resilient cities.
  • Strong local governments capable of leading urban transformation.

9. Challenges in Implementation

  • Inadequate capacity of ULBs in planning and finance.
  • Lack of coordination between government departments.
  • Resistance to land and housing reforms.
  • Financing constraints for large-scale infrastructure.
  • Growing inequality and informal settlements.

10. Conclusion

The National Urban Policy Framework (2018) is a landmark step towards a holistic and integrated approach to urbanization in India. By focusing on inclusivity, sustainability, and resilience, it provides a roadmap for Indian cities to transform into dynamic centers of growth and innovation. However, its success depends on effective governance, strong local institutions, and continuous citizen participation.

References

Asibey, M. O., Mintah, F., Adutwum, I. O., Wireko-Gyebi, R. S., Tagnan, J. N., Yevugah, L. L., … & Abdul-Salam, A. J. (2022). Beyond rhetoric: urban planning-climate change resilience conundrum in Accra, Ghana.ย Cities,ย 131, 103950.

Adjei-Boadi, D., Agyei-Mensah, S., Adamkiewicz, G., Rodriguez, J. I., Gemmell, E., Ezzati, M., … & Owusu, G. (2022). Neighbourhood, built environment and childrenโ€™s outdoor play spaces in urban Ghana: Review of policies and challenges.ย Landscape and urban planning,ย 218, 104288.

Acharya, P., Gupta, A. K., Singh, S., Mani, N., & Wajih, S. (2023). Mainstreaming peri-urban ecosystems for urban resilience through policy-planning framework: an opportunity analysis for Indian cities. Inย Ecosystem Restoration: Towards Sustainability and Resilient Developmentย (pp. 57-74). Singapore: Springer Nature Singapore.

Kundu, D. (2020). Urbanisation in India: Towards a national urban policy framework and smart cities. Inย Developing National Urban Policies: Ways Forward to Green and Smart Citiesย (pp. 89-119). Singapore: Springer Nature Singapore.

Sharma, S. N. (2018). Review of National Urban Policy Framework 2018.ย Think India Journal,ย 21(3), 74-81.

Sharma, S. N. (2019). Review of most used urban growth models.ย International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET),ย 10(3), 397-405.

Sharma, S. N. (2014). Urban forms in planning and design.ย International Journal of Research,ย 1(1), 7-16.

Sharma, S. N. (2014).ย Participatory Planning in Plan Preparation. BookCountry.

Sharma, S. N., Dehalwar, K., Yadav, K., & Verma, D. (2025). Urban Street Canyon Turbulence and Vehicular Pollution Dispersion.ย Applied Journal of Earth and Environmental Research, 14-19.

Proposal for the Establishment of a Council of Planning

By Kavita Dehalwar

Effective planning is essential to ensure the sustainable development, efficient use of resources, and coordinated decision-making within our organization/community. At present, planning activities are fragmented across different units, leading to overlaps, gaps, and missed opportunities. To address this, it is proposed that a Council of Planning be established as a central coordinating body to guide, oversee, and harmonize planning processes.

Photo by Jonathan Borba on Pexels.com

2. Purpose of the Council

The Council of Planning will serve as a strategic advisory and coordinating body. Its purpose is to:

  • Provide a structured forum for long-term and short-term planning.
  • Ensure alignment of departmental/sectoral plans with overall organizational or community goals.
  • Promote transparency, accountability, and efficiency in the use of resources.
  • Facilitate collaboration between stakeholders, avoiding duplication of efforts.
  • Anticipate future challenges and propose proactive strategies.

3. Objectives

The Council of Planning will:

  1. Develop and periodically review a comprehensive planning framework.
  2. Advise leadership on policy priorities and strategic directions.
  3. Oversee the integration of financial, physical, and human resource planning.
  4. Recommend best practices for sustainable development and innovation.
  5. Monitor the implementation of approved plans and provide progress reports.

4. Composition

The Council shall consist of representatives drawn from relevant sectors, departments, and stakeholder groups, including but not limited to:

  • Senior leadership/management representatives
  • Heads of key departments (finance, infrastructure, environment, social development, etc.)
  • Technical experts and planners
  • Representatives of community/stakeholder groups (where applicable)

A Chairperson will be appointed/elected to preside over meetings, and a Secretariat will be established to provide administrative support.

5. Functions and Responsibilities

The Council will:

  • Convene regular meetings to deliberate on planning matters.
  • Prepare a consolidated planning document for submission to leadership/authorities.
  • Establish thematic working groups (e.g., infrastructure, social services, environment, technology).
  • Provide recommendations to resolve conflicts in planning priorities.
  • Promote stakeholder engagement and participatory planning.

6. Governance and Decision-Making

  • Decisions of the Council shall be made through consensus where possible, or by simple majority vote.
  • The Council will submit its recommendations to the leadership/board for approval and implementation.
  • A code of conduct and terms of reference will be developed to guide the Councilโ€™s work.

7. Expected Outcomes

  • Streamlined, coordinated, and inclusive planning processes.
  • Increased efficiency in resource allocation.
  • Stronger alignment of plans with long-term strategic goals.
  • Enhanced stakeholder confidence and transparency.
  • More resilient and adaptive organizational/community development.

8. Implementation Plan

  • Phase 1: Approval of the proposal and endorsement by leadership.
  • Phase 2: Appointment of Council members and establishment of Secretariat.
  • Phase 3: Development of terms of reference and planning framework.
  • Phase 4: First Council meeting and preparation of initial consolidated plan.

9. Conclusion

The establishment of a Council of Planning will provide a vital platform for integrated, participatory, and forward-looking decision-making. By creating this body, we will strengthen our capacity to meet present needs and anticipate future challenges, ensuring sustainable growth and development.

References

Council, L. C., & Gold, J. R. (2015).ย The planning of a new town. Routledge.

Rosen, G., & Avni, N. (2023). Negotiating urban redevelopment: Exploring the neighborhood council planning model.ย Journal of Planning Education and Research,ย 43(2), 416-427.

Sharma, S. N., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). Council of Planning for Promoting Planning Education and Planning Professionals.ย Journal of Planning Education & Research,ย 43(4).

Sharma, S. N., Dehalwar, K., Kumar, G., & Vyas, S. (2023). Redefining peri-urban urban areas.ย Thematics Journal of Geography,ย 12(3), 7-13.

Sharma, S. N. (2013). Sustainable development strategies and approaches.ย International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR),ย 2.

Sharma, S. N. (2019). Review of most used urban growth models.ย International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET),ย 10(3), 397-405.

Tewdwr-Jones, M. (1998). Rural government and community participation: The planning role of community councils.ย Journal of Rural Studies,ย 14(1), 51-62.

Top 10 Research Grants for International Scholars

by Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Certainly! Research grants are crucial for scholars to fund their investigations, experiments, and studies. Here are ten notable research grants across various fields:

Photo by Google DeepMind on Pexels.com
  1. National Institutes of Health (NIH) Grants: NIH offers a wide range of grants supporting biomedical and health-related research. These grants vary in focus, from basic science to clinical studies, fostering innovative discoveries and advancements in healthcare.
  2. National Science Foundation (NSF) Grants: NSF supports fundamental research and education across all fields of science and engineering. Grants cover diverse areas such as astronomy, biology, computer science, and social sciences.
  3. European Research Council (ERC) Grants: ERC provides funding for pioneering research in Europe across various disciplines, encouraging high-risk, high-gain projects that can lead to significant breakthroughs.
  4. Human Frontier Science Program (HFSP) Grants: HFSP supports collaborative, interdisciplinary research focused on the life sciences, providing grants for scientists from different countries to work together on innovative projects.
  5. Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation Grants: This foundation offers grants to address global health issues, poverty alleviation, and education. Their grants often target innovative solutions and technological advancements with the potential for large-scale impact.
  6. Google Research Awards: Google supports academic research in computer science and related fields, providing grants for projects that can contribute to technology development and innovation.
  7. Wellcome Trust Grants: Wellcome Trust funds research in health, medical science, and medical humanities. They support a broad spectrum of projects from basic research to applied science.
  8. The Fulbright Program: Fulbright awards grants for international educational exchange for students, scholars, and professionals to study, teach, or conduct research. It promotes mutual understanding between people of different countries.
  9. NASA Research Grants: NASA funds research in space exploration, aeronautics, and Earth sciences. Grants support projects ranging from astrophysics to climate studies and technology development for space missions.
  10. Social Science Research Council (SSRC) Grants: SSRC provides funding for social science research addressing critical global issues, including inequality, governance, and human rights.

These grants not only offer financial support but also provide scholars with opportunities for networking, collaboration, and dissemination of their research findings, contributing significantly to the advancement of knowledge and innovation in various fields.


Research Grant
URLProbable Application Period
National Institutes of HealthNIH GrantsVaries; Check Funding Opportunities
National Science FoundationNSF GrantsVaries by Program; Check Announcements
European Research CouncilERC GrantsAnnually; Check ERC Funding Calls
Human Frontier Science ProgramHFSP GrantsAnnually; Check Application Deadlines
Bill & Melinda Gates FoundationGates Foundation GrantsVaries; Check Grant Programs
Google Research AwardsGoogle Research AwardsAnnually; Check Application Periods
Wellcome TrustWellcome Trust GrantsVaries; Check Grant Schemes
The Fulbright ProgramFulbright GrantsAnnually; Check Application Deadlines
NASA Research GrantsNASA GrantsVaries; Check Funding Opportunities
Social Science Research CouncilSSRC GrantsVaries; Check Grant Programs

Please note that the URLs provided here are placeholders and may not directly link to the specific grant application pages. It’s advisable to visit the respective organization’s official website for accurate and updated information on grant opportunities and application procedures. The application periods for these grants vary widely, so checking the websites regularly or subscribing to their newsletters can keep you updated on application deadlines and grant cycles.

Effective Staff Management: Key Strategies for Success in Your Company

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Staff management is a critical component of running a successful company. The manner in which a business manages its employees directly impacts productivity, morale, and ultimately, the bottom line. To foster a positive work environment and maximize the potential of your team, implementing effective staff management strategies is essential.

Photo by cottonbro studio on Pexels.com

Clear Communication

Open, transparent communication is the cornerstone of effective staff management. Providing clear expectations, goals, and guidelines empowers employees to perform their best. Regularly scheduled meetings, both one-on-one and team-wide, facilitate communication channels and ensure everyone is aligned with the company’s objectives.

Encouraging Collaboration and Teamwork

Fostering a culture of collaboration and teamwork among employees can significantly boost productivity and innovation. Encourage brainstorming sessions, cross-departmental collaboration, and team-building activities to cultivate a cohesive work environment. When employees feel valued and supported, they are more likely to go above and beyond in their roles.

Recognizing and Rewarding Performance

Recognizing and rewarding exceptional performance is a powerful motivator. Acknowledging achievements, whether big or small, reinforces positive behavior and encourages employees to strive for excellence. This can be in the form of bonuses, public recognition, or other incentives tailored to the preferences of your team.

Providing Opportunities for Growth and Development

Investing in the growth and development of your staff not only enhances their skill sets but also increases their loyalty to the company. Offer training programs, workshops, and mentorship opportunities that align with individual career goals. When employees feel that their professional development is valued, they are more likely to remain committed to the company’s success.

Establishing a Feedback Loop

Constructive feedback is crucial for improvement. Encourage a feedback-rich culture where employees feel comfortable providing input and receiving feedback on their work. This helps in identifying areas for improvement and allows for continuous growth both individually and as a team.

Embracing Flexibility and Work-Life Balance

Recognize the importance of work-life balance in maintaining a motivated and engaged workforce. Offering flexible work arrangements, such as remote work options or flexible hours, demonstrates trust in your employees and accommodates their personal needs. Employees who feel supported in balancing their professional and personal lives tend to be more satisfied and productive.

Handling Conflict and Challenges Effectively

Conflicts may arise in any workplace. Effective staff management involves addressing conflicts promptly and professionally. Implement clear conflict resolution procedures and encourage open dialogue to resolve issues before they escalate, fostering a harmonious work environment.

Leading by Example

Leadership plays a pivotal role in staff management. Leading by example sets the tone for the entire team. Managers who embody the values, work ethic, and dedication they expect from their employees tend to earn their respect and inspire them to excel.

Conclusion

Effective staff management is a multifaceted endeavor that involves fostering a positive work culture, providing support for professional growth, and creating an environment where employees feel valued and motivated. By implementing these strategies, companies can optimize their workforce’s potential, leading to increased productivity, higher employee retention, and overall success in achieving business goals.

References

Davis, John R., Edward P. Rawana, and Denise R. Capponi. “Acceptability of behavioral staff management techniques.”ย Behavioral Interventionsย 4.1 (1989): 23-44.

Jordan, Peter, and Caroline Lloyd.ย Staff management in library and information work. Taylor & Francis, 2017.

Lakbala, Parvin, and Mahboobeh Lakbala. “Knowledge, attitude and practice of hospital staff management.”ย Waste management & researchย 31.7 (2013): 729-732.

Quilitch, H. Robert. “A comparison of three staffโ€management procedures.”ย Journal of Applied Behavior Analysisย 8.1 (1975): 59-66.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, Shankar Chatterjee, and Kavita Dehalwar. “Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Challenges and Opportunities.”ย Think India Journalย 26.1 (2023): 7-15.

Suda, Kim T., and Raymond G. Miltenberger. “Evaluation of staff management strategies to increase positive interactions in a vocational setting.”ย Behavioral Interventionsย 8.2 (1993): 69-88.

Lund University Global Scholarship Programme

Lund University
Bachelors/Masters Degree

Deadline: 15 Jan/Feb 2024 (annual)
Study in: Sweden
Course starts August 2024

Brief description:

The Lund University Global Scholarship programme is a selective, merit-based scholarship programme that recognizes top academic students from outside the European Union/European Economic Area (and Switzerland) who wish to apply for a Bachelorโ€™s or Masterโ€™s Programme offered at Lund University.

Host Institution(s):

Lund University in Sweden

Field(s) of study:

Bachelorโ€™s or Masterโ€™s Degree Programmes offered at the University

Number of Scholarships:

Not specified

Target group:

Citizens of countries outside the EU/EEA (and Switzerland)

Scholarship value/inclusions:

The scholarships may cover partial or up to the full tuition fee.  Please note that scholarships are toward tuition fees only and that living costs are not covered.

Eligibility:

To be eligible to apply for a scholarship you must meet all of the following criteria:

โ€ข You must be a citizen of a country from outside the EU/EEA (and Switzerland) and are required to pay a tuition fee

โ€ข  You have applied for Bachelorโ€™s or Masterโ€™s level studies in the regular application rounds for a minimum of one semester of study (30 ECTS)

PLEASE DO NOT APPLY  if you do not meet the admission requirements to Lund University, if you have not selected a Lund University programme/course as your first choice/choices at universityadmissions.se or if you cannot secure the funding needed to cover living costs, as required by the Swedish Migration Board.

Application instructions:

The next application period will open in February 2024. 

To apply for a Lund University Global Scholarship, you must first apply for the programme(s) or free-standing course(s) you wish to study at Lund University using the online, national application website, www.universityadmissions.se during the application period  (16 October โ€“ 15 January 2023) for studies starting in the autumn semester. Note that a few programmes do not open for applications until 1 December).

Once you have made a complete application to a degree programme or free-standing courses of at least 30 ECTS credits and paid the application fee, you will be able to apply for the scholarship at the official website during the scholarship application period.

It is important to visit the official website (link found below) for detailed information on how to apply for this scholarship.

Website:

Official Scholarship Website: http://www.lunduniversity.lu.se/admissions/bachelors-masters-studies/scholarships-awards/lund-university-global-scholarship

Different Types of Scales

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

In various contexts, the term “scale” can refer to different concepts. Here are several types of scales across different domains:

  1. Musical Scale:
    • In music, a scale is a series of musical notes arranged in ascending or descending order, often with a specific pattern of intervals between them. Common examples include the major scale and the minor scale.
  2. Map Scale:
    • In cartography, a map scale represents the relationship between distances on a map and the corresponding distances in the real world. It can be expressed as a ratio (e.g., 1:10,000) or a graphic scale.
  3. Temperature Scale:
    • Temperature can be measured using different scales, with Celsius (Centigrade), Fahrenheit, and Kelvin being the most common. Each scale has a different zero point and unit size.
  4. Scale in Measurement:
    • The term “scale” is often used in general measurement to indicate the ratio or proportion between a measurement on a model or drawing and the actual size of the object being represented.
  5. Economic Scale:
    • Economic scale refers to the cost advantages that a business can achieve due to an increase in production or scale of operation. It is often associated with lower average costs as production levels increase.
  6. Likert Scale:
    • In social science research and surveys, a Likert scale is a commonly used method for measuring attitudes or opinions. Respondents are asked to indicate their level of agreement or disagreement with a series of statements.
  7. Scale in Art:
    • In art, scale refers to the size of an object or artwork in relation to another. Artists may manipulate scale to create emphasis, evoke emotions, or challenge perceptions.
  8. Scale in Geography:
    • In geography, scale can refer to the representation of real-world features on maps. Maps can be small-scale (covering large areas with less detail) or large-scale (providing more detail but covering smaller areas).
  9. Scale in Psychology:
    • In psychology, the term “scale” is used in various ways, such as Likert scales for measuring attitudes or psychological scales that assess traits, behaviors, or mental conditions.
  10. Scale in Physics:
    • In physics, scale can refer to the size or magnitude of a physical quantity. For example, the Richter scale measures the magnitude of earthquakes, and the pH scale measures the acidity or basicity of a solution.
  11. Time Scale:
    • Time scales can refer to different measures of time in various fields. In geology, there is the geological time scale, and in physics, there are scales for measuring extremely short or long durations.

These are just a few examples of the diverse meanings of “scale” in different disciplines. The interpretation depends on the context in which the term is used.

Unveiling the Benefits of Preprint Publication in Advancing Scientific Discourse

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

In the ever-evolving landscape of scholarly communication, preprint publications have emerged as a powerful tool, reshaping the way researchers disseminate their findings. Preprints are preliminary versions of research papers that are shared publicly before formal peer review and publication in traditional academic journals. This practice has gained significant traction in recent years, fostering a culture of openness, collaboration, and rapid dissemination of knowledge. In this article, we explore the benefits of preprint publication and how it contributes to the advancement of scientific discourse.

  1. Rapid Dissemination of Knowledge:

One of the primary advantages of preprint publication is the swift dissemination of research findings. Traditional peer-reviewed journals often involve lengthy submission, review, and publication processes, causing delays in sharing crucial information. Preprints allow researchers to share their work with the global scientific community almost immediately after completion, accelerating the pace at which new knowledge reaches stakeholders.

The rapid dissemination of knowledge stands as a cornerstone among the myriad benefits of preprint publication, fundamentally transforming the traditional scholarly communication landscape. In contrast to the protracted timelines associated with peer-reviewed journals, preprints offer an expeditious route for researchers to share their findings with the global scientific community.

In the conventional journal publication model, the journey from submission to publication involves a series of meticulous steps, including peer review, revisions, and editorial processes. These steps, while essential for ensuring the accuracy and reliability of research, often translate into significant time lags before the research sees the light of day. This delay can be a critical impediment, especially in fields where timely dissemination of information is paramount.

Preprints break this temporal barrier by allowing researchers to share their work swiftly, unencumbered by the extended timelines inherent in traditional publishing. As soon as a study is complete, authors can submit a preprint, making their findings instantly accessible to the global scientific community. This accelerated pace is particularly advantageous in fields such as medicine, where timely access to the latest research can influence clinical practices and public health policies.

The immediacy of preprint dissemination is especially evident in the context of emerging trends, crises, or breakthroughs. Researchers can rapidly share insights, data, and analyses, contributing to a more agile and responsive scientific community. This accelerated knowledge flow fosters collaboration and builds upon collective expertise, allowing the research community to adapt swiftly to new information and developments.

Moreover, the swift dissemination facilitated by preprints enables researchers to establish priority for their work. In competitive research landscapes, where multiple teams may be investigating similar phenomena concurrently, the ability to stake a claim to novel findings promptly is crucial. Preprints provide a public record of the research process, affording authors due credit for their contributions and establishing a chronological record of scientific discovery.

In conclusion, the rapid dissemination of knowledge through preprint publication not only addresses the delays inherent in traditional publishing but also empowers researchers to contribute swiftly to global scientific conversations. By embracing the immediacy of preprints, the research community is better equipped to navigate the dynamic and ever-evolving landscape of knowledge creation and dissemination.

  1. Facilitating Collaboration and Feedback:

Preprints provide a platform for researchers to receive feedback from the scientific community at an early stage. By sharing their work openly, authors invite constructive criticism and suggestions, which can enhance the quality of their research. This iterative process not only improves the final manuscript but also promotes a collaborative ethos within the research community.

Facilitating collaboration and soliciting constructive feedback represent pivotal facets of the transformative impact of preprint publication on the dynamics of scholarly communication. In contrast to the traditional model where research is shielded from the broader scientific community until after rigorous peer review, preprints create an early and open avenue for engagement, fostering a culture of collaboration and iterative improvement.

Preprints serve as a virtual agora, where researchers can present their work to the global scientific audience at a nascent stage. This open invitation to the scientific community enables authors to receive diverse perspectives, insights, and critiques that contribute to the refinement and strengthening of their research endeavors. By embracing transparency and sharing their work openly, authors implicitly acknowledge the collective intelligence of the community, recognizing that collaboration and shared expertise can enhance the quality and rigor of scientific inquiry.

The iterative nature of collaboration facilitated by preprints is particularly valuable in refining research methodologies, validating results, and addressing potential limitations. The early exposure of work to the scrutiny of peers allows authors to rectify errors, strengthen arguments, and incorporate alternative viewpoints, ultimately leading to a more robust and well-rounded final manuscript.

Furthermore, preprints contribute to the development of a collaborative ethos within the research community. The open exchange of ideas and the willingness to engage in constructive dialogue create a culture that values intellectual exchange over individual silos. Researchers are not only authors but also active participants in a dynamic discourse, contributing to the collective pursuit of knowledge.

The collaborative potential of preprints extends beyond the virtual realm into real-world partnerships and joint research initiatives. As researchers engage with and build upon each other’s work, connections are forged, and interdisciplinary collaborations are sparked. This interconnectedness amplifies the impact of research, fostering a sense of community that transcends geographical and institutional boundaries.

In essence, preprints act as catalysts for collaboration and feedback, transforming the scholarly landscape from a closed, hierarchical system into an open and participatory one. By inviting early input and fostering a culture of continuous improvement, preprints empower researchers to collectively elevate the standards of scientific inquiry, promoting a more collaborative, transparent, and impactful research ecosystem.

  1. Establishing Priority and Recognition:

Preprints enable researchers to establish a timestamp on their work, signaling priority for their discoveries. This is particularly crucial in competitive research fields where multiple groups may be exploring similar topics simultaneously. By making their findings publicly accessible through preprints, researchers can claim credit for their work and contribute to the timely recognition of novel ideas.


In the fast-paced and competitive world of scientific research, the ability to establish priority for groundbreaking discoveries is paramount. Preprints play a pivotal role in this context by providing researchers with a tool to effectively timestamp and claim credit for their work, contributing to the timely recognition of novel ideas in fiercely competitive research fields.

The timestamping feature of preprints is akin to placing a flag on the summit of a scientific endeavor, signaling to the research community and the world at large that a particular team or individual has reached a significant milestone in their investigation. This is particularly crucial in fields where multiple groups are concurrently exploring similar topics, vying to be the first to unveil innovative findings.

By making their work publicly accessible through preprints, researchers create a publicly verifiable record of their contributions, complete with a date stamp. This record not only establishes the chronological order of discovery but also serves as a testament to the originality and ingenuity of the research team. In this way, preprints act as a form of intellectual currency, allowing researchers to stake their claim and assert priority for their novel ideas.

The importance of establishing priority extends beyond mere acknowledgment; it is intricately tied to the recognition and influence that researchers accrue within their respective fields. Early dissemination of findings through preprints allows researchers to shape and influence ongoing discussions, setting the agenda for subsequent research, and positioning themselves as thought leaders in their domains.

Moreover, the timestamping function of preprints contributes to the prevention of intellectual property disputes and conflicts over priority. By providing a transparent and traceable record of the research process, preprints serve as a mechanism for resolving debates about the origins of specific ideas or discoveries. This transparency fosters a culture of fairness and integrity within the scientific community.

In conclusion, the ability of preprints to establish priority and facilitate timely recognition is a crucial element in the competitive world of scientific research. By leveraging preprints to publicly showcase their discoveries, researchers not only claim credit for their work but also contribute to the vibrant and dynamic exchange of ideas that drives progress within their fields. In essence, preprints act as the accelerators of recognition, propelling researchers and their novel ideas to the forefront of scientific discourse.

  1. Open Access to Information:

Preprints align with the principles of open science by providing free and unrestricted access to research findings. This democratization of information ensures that scientific knowledge is not confined to those with access to expensive journal subscriptions. Researchers, policymakers, and the general public can access preprints without financial barriers, fostering a more inclusive and accessible scientific discourse.

The ethos of open science finds a powerful ally in the realm of preprint publication, particularly in its capacity to provide unfettered and cost-free access to research findings. The principle of open access to information is central to the democratization of knowledge, ensuring that scientific insights are not restricted to privileged circles with access to expensive journal subscriptions. Preprints, by virtue of their open-access nature, break down financial barriers and foster a more inclusive and accessible scientific discourse.

Traditionally, access to scholarly articles has been encumbered by paywalls, subscription fees, and institutional access restrictions, limiting the reach of valuable research to a select few. Preprints challenge this paradigm by allowing researchers to share their work openly and freely with the global community. This open-access model ensures that anyone with an internet connection can delve into the latest research, irrespective of their geographic location, academic affiliation, or financial resources.

Researchers, as primary contributors to scientific knowledge, benefit from the increased visibility and impact that open access brings to their work. By disseminating findings through preprints, authors reach a broader audience, amplifying the potential for collaboration and engagement. This accessibility is especially critical for early-career researchers and those in resource-constrained environments, who may face challenges in accessing traditional subscription-based journals.

Policymakers, often tasked with making informed decisions based on the latest scientific evidence, also stand to gain from the open access provided by preprints. By removing financial barriers, preprints empower policymakers to stay abreast of cutting-edge research across diverse domains, facilitating evidence-based decision-making and fostering the integration of scientific insights into policy formulation.

The broader societal impact of open access through preprints extends to the general public. Enabling citizens to access and comprehend scientific research without financial impediments enhances scientific literacy and promotes a more informed public discourse. This transparency strengthens the connection between the scientific community and society, fostering a sense of shared knowledge and understanding.

In conclusion, the open access to information facilitated by preprints embodies the principles of inclusivity, transparency, and democratization within the scientific landscape. By eliminating financial barriers, preprints empower researchers, policymakers, and the public to engage with and contribute to the scientific discourse, ushering in a new era where knowledge is a public good accessible to all.

  1. Adapting to the Digital Age:

In an era where information is exchanged rapidly through digital platforms, preprints represent a paradigm shift in scholarly communication. The digital nature of preprints allows for easy sharing, distribution, and archiving of research outputs. This adaptability to the digital age promotes a more dynamic and interconnected global research community.

The advent of the digital age has ushered in a transformative era for scholarly communication, and preprints stand at the forefront of this evolution, embodying a paradigm shift in the dissemination of research. In a landscape where information flows rapidly through digital platforms, the digital nature of preprints not only facilitates ease of sharing but also fosters a more dynamic, interconnected, and globally accessible research community.

The traditional model of disseminating research involved the production of physical journals, which were distributed to libraries and academic institutions. This process, while valuable in its time, was inherently slow and limited in reach. Preprints disrupt this model by embracing the digital realm, allowing researchers to share their work instantaneously and globally. The digital nature of preprints ensures that the latest research findings can be disseminated at the speed of the internet, overcoming the logistical constraints associated with traditional publishing.

Preprints, being inherently digital, also offer unparalleled ease of sharing. Researchers can share their work through a simple web link, eliminating the need for physical copies or complex distribution channels. This not only accelerates the dissemination process but also enables a wider audience to access and engage with the research, transcending geographic and institutional boundaries. The digital format promotes a culture of openness and collaboration, as barriers to access are dismantled, and information becomes readily available to the global scientific community.

Furthermore, the digital nature of preprints facilitates seamless distribution across various digital platforms and repositories. Research outputs can be archived, indexed, and accessed through databases, ensuring long-term visibility and discoverability. This archival capability enhances the impact and longevity of research findings, contributing to the collective knowledge base over time.

The adaptability of preprints to the digital age aligns with the changing expectations and preferences of researchers, who increasingly rely on digital tools and platforms for their work. The convenience of accessing, sharing, and archiving research in a digital format not only streamlines workflows but also enhances the efficiency and effectiveness of scholarly communication in the 21st century.

In conclusion, preprints represent a crucial adaptation to the digital age in scholarly communication. The digital nature of preprints fosters a more agile, interconnected, and globally accessible research community, enabling researchers to share, collaborate, and advance knowledge in ways that were previously unimaginable in the era of print-based publishing. This evolution underscores the transformative power of embracing digital technologies in shaping the future of scientific discourse.

Conclusion:

Preprint publication is an invaluable addition to the arsenal of tools available to researchers in the 21st century. By embracing the benefits of rapid dissemination, fostering collaboration, establishing priority, promoting open access, and adapting to the digital age, preprints contribute significantly to the advancement of scientific discourse. As the scientific community continues to evolve, preprints stand as a testament to the transformative power of openness, collaboration, and the collective pursuit of knowledge.

References

Bourne, Philip E., et al. “Ten simple rules to consider regarding preprint submission.” PLOS Computational Biology 13.5 (2017): e1005473.

Dehalwar, K., and S. N. Sharma. “Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies.” (2023).

Fu, Darwin Y., and Jacob J. Hughey. “Releasing a preprint is associated with more attention and citations for the peer-reviewed article.” Elife 8 (2019): e52646.

Kaiser, Jocelyn. “The preprint dilemma.” (2017): 1344-1349.

Sarabipour, Sarvenaz, et al. “On the value of preprints: An early career researcher perspective.”ย PLoS biologyย 17.2 (2019): e3000151.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed.ย New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Understanding Citations: A Crucial Element of Academic Writing.” (2023).

Does Organizational Justice Moderates the Nexus between Economic Pressure and Employeesโ€™ Deviant Behaviour?

By: Samson Waibe Bature1 & Michael Olalekan Adeoti 2                          

1School of Business & Entrepreneurial Education, Federal College of Education (Technical), Gusau, Nigeria

2Department of Business Administration and Management, Federal Polytechnic Bida, Nigeria

Abstract

Employees that experience economic pressure or economic hardship may be tempted to indulge in deviant behaviours at the workplace. However, the condition under which the impact of economic pressure on deviant behaviour at workplace could be curtailed or minimized remains unclear. Thus, this study examines the moderating effect of organizational justice on the positive correlation between economic pressure and employee deviant behaviour. Drawing on previous studies and the tenets of social exchange/reciprocity theory, this study argues that organizational justice has the potential to moderate the impact of economic pressure on employee deviant behaviours. Utilizing a sample of 550 employees through simple random sampling and self-administered survey for this study, 356 participants from federal institutions of higher learning in Zamfara State fully participated in the survey. Results from a variance-based structural equation modelling (PLS 4.9.2) analysis reveal that organizational justice significantly moderate the relationship between economic pressure and deviant behaviour. In other words, the presence of organizational justice weakens the positive link between economic pressure and deviant behaviour. This research contributes to the literature on organizational justice by providing much deeper insights of its role in moderating relationship between economic pressure and deviant behaviour. The implications of this finding for management of institutions of higher learning and future research directions are provided. 

Keywords: economic pressure, organizational justice, employee deviant behaviour.       

Introduction

Organizational management research mostly emphasize on predictors or antecedents of organizational performance, employee engagement, employee performance, organizational citizenship behaviour, among others (Chang & Smithikrai, 2010; Griffin et al., 1998; Rotundo & Sackett, 2002). However, till recently, researchers did not indicate much interest in investigating employee deviant behaviour in organization (Agboola & Salawu, 2011; Bennett & Robinson, 2000; Lee & Ok, 2014). Deviant behaviour at work can cause serious setback to brilliant performance of organizations especially in emerging or developing countries. For instance, Adeoti and Kura (2018) posit that employees from emerging or developing countries have the tendency to exhibit deviant behaviour at work. However, the literature demonstrates that most studies on deviant behaviour at work are conducted in developed economies with little or none from emerging or developing economies like Nigeria. It is imperative to note that deviant behaviour in a given cultural sitting may not be perceived as a deviant behaviour in another cultural sitting. Thus, findings on deviant behaviour in developed economies may not be applicable in emerging or developing economies like Nigeria.

Employee deviant behaviours are regarded as negative workplace behaviours or unethical conducts at workplace which may be detrimental to growth of the organization as an entity. According to Robinson and Bennett (1995), negative workplace behaviours or unethical conducts at workplace may include demand for kickback before discharging responsibilities, lackadaisical attitude toward oneโ€™s duty, lateness to and closing early from work, absenteeism, and embezzlement or theft. Negative workplace behaviours are exhibited in several organizational settings and can undermine brilliant organizational performance if not checked.

Arguably, one among many factors that could be responsible for employee deviant behaviours within an organizational setting is economic pressure. Economic pressure may be viewed in terms of financial condition of employees compared with purchasing power of legitimate earnings. The inability of employees to meet their basic needs due to poor financial condition may result to economic pressure. It is observed that not all employees may have the way withal to withstand economic pressure thus, propelled to indulge in deviant behaviour at the workplace.

Of course, it may be logical to reason that when people experience economic pressure or economic hardship, there may be tendency to exhibit deviant behaviours. This reasoning goes to imply that economic pressure may be positively related with deviant behaviour. Besides, some studies that linked economic pressure and employees deviant behaviour revealed significant connection (Fox et al., 2001; Spector et al., 2010). However, the condition under which the impact of economic pressure on deviant behaviour at workplace could be curtailed or minimized remains unclear. Another important point which necessitated this study is that despite the prevalence of deviant behaviour in institutions of higher learning in developing countries like Nigeria (Bashir et al., 2011), it has received less scholarly attention. Therefore, the current study sought to examine the moderating role of organizational justice on the relationship between economic pressure and employeesโ€™ deviant behaviour. In doing this, the study will add to the literature on deviant behaviours at workplace. Specifically, utilizing the theoretical framework offered by norm of reciprocity/social exchange theory to explain why employees may be persuaded to refrain from deviant behaviours at workplace, may add to stock of knowledge. In other words, identifying the condition (i.e., organizational justice) under which deviant behaviours could be curtailed or minimized at workplace, would go a long way to bringing improvement in organizational performance.

Literature review

Employee deviant behaviour

Robinson and Bennett (1995) defined deviant behaviour as any conduct or act that contravenes organizational values or customs which is capable of jeopardizing organizational well-being. Similarly, deviant behaviour is defined as conducts or acts that are not in conformity or compliance with the acceptable organizational behaviours (Spector & Fox, 2005).

Typical conducts that may be considered deviant behaviours in institutions of higher learning may include academic theft (plagiarism), award of marks for financial benefits, sexual harassment, embezzlement, exaggeration of financial figures and financial extortion. Others include leakage of examination questions for sexual or financial gains, failure to attend to students, failure to deliver lecture or lesson, failure to complete required courseoutline, failure to undertake community service among others (Adebayo & Nwabuoku, 2008; Adeoti, Shamsudin, & Wan, 2017; Adeoti & Kura, 2018; Jekayinfa, 2013). Hence, this study conceptualized deviant behaviours as deliberate conducts or acts exhibited by employees which may be detrimental or harmful to corporate existence of institutions of higher learning.

Economic pressure and deviant behaviour

Economic pressure depletes individualโ€™s capacity to meet basic needs in the family as it causes overwhelming loss in family savings. The current economic condition in Nigeria as a result of pronouncement on fuel subsidy removal and unified foreign exchange regime made by President Bola Ahmed Tinubu while delivering his inaugural speech on the 29thMay 2023, several employees are witnessing financial pressure as their legitimate earningsโ€™ purchasing power is limited. For instance, employees are struggling to provide food to the family, settle other bills such as energy and gas, water, house rent, health, clothes, school fees, just to mention a few. Consequently, some employees may be propelled to indulge in deviant behaviours at workplace to cope with the condition of economic pressure. In other words, economic pressure on employees may be unbearable to extent of compromising ethical standards. (Adeoti et al., 2018).

From the preceding, employees that experienced economic pressure may be tempted to engage in deviant behaviours at workplace. With reference to employees of institutions of higher learning, deviant behaviour may include but not limited to the following: award of marks to students for money, sale of textbooks or lecture notes at arbitrary price, embezzlement or theft, exaggeration of expenses, sexual harassment, intimidation of students, absent or lateness to delivery of lecture or lesson (Robinson & Bennett, 1995; Bennett & Robinson, 2000). By and large, these acts of deviant behaviour may be attributed to economic pressure experienced by staff members. The effect of economic pressure on staff members if not checked and brought under control, may transcend to cause heart disease/attack, gastrointestinal problems, weight loss, insomnia, high blood pressure and substance abuse (Adeoti & Kura, 2018; Penney & Spector, 2005). Besides, extant literature revealed different forms of pressure are positively linked with deviant behaviours at work (Adeoti et al., 2021; Adeoti et al., 2017; Devonish, 2013; Elshaer, et al., 2022; Houston et al., 2006; Mudau, et al., 2019; Obalade & Arogundade, 2019). Therefore, this study hypothesizes that:

H1: Economic pressure is positively related to employee deviant behaviours

Organizational justice as a moderator of the link between economic pressure and employee deviant behaviour

Organizational justice can be described as the backbone of organizational decision making process. It is directly or indirectly related to employee job satisfaction, turnover, organizational leadership, organizational citizenship, organizational commitment, trust, customer satisfaction, employee job performance, employee theft, role breadth, alienation and leader-member exchange (Blakely, Andrews & Moorman, 2005; Cohen-Charash & Spector, 2001). Workers usually compare their contributions to the organizations with the rewards they get from the organizations. Also, employees do evaluate if the decision-making process is fair, just, consistent, and impartial in the organization.

Empirically, Kim (2009) revealed that organizational justice plays an important role in employeesโ€™ experience in the workplace. Organizational justice foster collaboration amongst employees, between employees and the organization, as well as other stakeholders. If employees perceived a sense of fairness in an organization, it is unlikely for such employees to engage in deviant behaviour (Liu, et al., 2022). More so, organizational fairness motivates employee performance and increases job satisfaction level (Colquitt & Rodell, 2011). Furthermore, a significant number of studies have also concluded that organizational fairness influences employee job satisfaction and general employee behaviour in the workplace (Bakhshi et al., 2009; Henle, 2005; Malik & Naeem, 2011).

It goes to implies that despite the presence of economic pressure, if employees perceive a sense of organizational justice in terms of welfare package, promotion, human resource policies and appointment into leadership positions within the institutions, the incidence of deviant behaviour may be eroded or minimized. In other words, when the dealings or routine organizational procedures or conducts are kept far from political influence or interference, god-father syndrome, nepotism, and religion considerations, then the popular notion would be fairness, impartial, justice, and equity. Thus, employees may refrain from deviant behaviours that are detrimental to organizational superb performance. In that sense, employees may be punctual to work, show commitment in their responsibility, deliver lectures as scheduled, exhaust all components of course contents, turn their back to embezzlement, say no to marks for financial or sexual gains, frown at abetting examination malpractice with the aim of getting some sort of returns, etc. This thought aligns with the tenets of social exchange theory and norm of reciprocity. Consequently, this study suggests that organizational justice may moderate the positive link between economic pressure and employee deviant behaviour at workplace. Hence, the hypothesis:  

H2: Organizational justice moderates the positive link between economic pressure and deviant behaviour

Methods and materials

Research design and sampling procedure

This study utilized a causal research design to conduct a cross-sectional survey by means of self-administered questionnaire. The target audience of this study consisted of employees of federal institutions of higher learning in Zamfara State (i.e., Federal University Gusau, Federal College of Education โ€“ Technical Gusau, and Federal Polytechnic Kaura Namoda). These institutions were adopted because their employees represent a variety of ethnic backgrounds across Nigeria. The survey utilized a probability sampling technique (i.e., simple random sampling) to obtain the data. This sampling technique offers equal opportunity of participation to entire population of a study. A total of 550 questionnaires were distributed, out of which 356 usable responses were retrieved for the analysis. Thus, a response rate of this study was computed as 64.7 per cent which adequate for reliable results in social science research. To make meaning out of the data collated, a variance-based structural equation modelling known as partial least squares (PLS-SEM) was employed to estimate the relationships between the latent constructs in this study. With PLS-SEM, data normality is not requirement prior to final data analysis (Henseler et al., 2009).

Measures

To measure economic pressure, a four-item instrument was adopted from Robert et al. (1992). While organizational justice was measured with four items developed by Masterson (2001), employee deviant behaviour was measured with a 10-item instrument developed by Spector and Fox (2001). All the instruments were scaled on a five-point Likert ranging from โ€œ1โ€ strongly disagree to โ€œ5โ€ strongly agree.

Results

Before the main data analysis, data preliminary screening was performed to ensure the data is free from the problem of common method variance (CMV) and multicollinearity issue. While both procedural and statistical measures were observed in the case of CMV, the results of variance inflation factor (VIF) and tolerance values were all satisfactory.

Results of measurement model

To assess the reliability of the latent constructs, internal consistency reliability and indicator reliability were evaluated. All variables indicated Cronbachโ€™s alpha values greater than 0.7 and composite reliability scores exceeding 0.8. Hence, the variables demonstrated adequate internal consistency reliability (Hair et al., 2017). Further, average variance extracted (AVE) was assessed to determine convergent validity. The AVE values in respect of all constructs exceeded the critical threshold 0.5 and ranged between 0.718 and 0.784. This implies adequate convergent validity in this research model (Hair et al., 2017). Also, to check for discriminant validity, the square roots of AVE for each latent construct with the correlations among latent constructs was assessed and the results demonstrated satisfactory discriminant validity based on Fornell-Larcker criterion. Table I presents the results.

Table I

Discriminant Validity (Fornell-Larcker criterion

Construct1. Economic pressure2. Org. justice3. Deviant behaviour
1. Economic pressure0.7808
2. Organization justice0.00050.7843
3. Employee deviant behaviour0.00350.31380.7176

Table I shows that adequate discriminant validity was achieved since the square roots of AVEs are greater than the correlations between constructs (Fornell & Larcker, 1981). In addition, discriminant validity was examined using heterotrait-monotrait ratio (HTMT). Table II presents the result of HTMT.

Table II

Discriminant Validity (HTMT)

Construct1. Economic pressure2. Org. justice3. Deviant behaviour
1. Economic pressure
2. Org. justice0.0438
4. Employee deviant behaviour0.05180.5914

Table II, indicates that the highest correlation is between organizational justice and employee deviant behaviour (0.5914). This means that all correlations between constructs are less than the 0.850 which is the maximum acceptable value as suggested by Kline (2011). Thus, discriminant validity via HTMT was achieved.

Structural model results

Results of the PLS-SEM path analysis of this conceptual model is presented below based on the hypotheses stated earlier.

H1. Economic pressure is positively related to employee deviant behaviours.

The path analysis model results for H1 were found to have a ๊žตeta value of 0.098, t-value of 1.367, and p-value of 0.086. Based on the outcome of t-value (1.367) and that of the p-value (0.086), this relationship is considered not significant because the t-value is less than 1.69 and p-value greater than 0.05 per cent. This aligns with extant literature that support positive link between different forms of pressure and employee deviant behaviour at the workplace (Adeoti et al., 2021; Adeoti et al., 2017; Devonish, 2013; Elshaer, et al., 2022; Houston et al., 2006; Mudau, et al., 2019; Obalade & Arogundade, 2019).

H2: Organizational justice moderates the positive link between economic pressure and deviant behaviour

The resulting path value for H2 (i.e., moderating effect of organizational justice on economic pressure-employee deviant behaviour relationship) was found to exhibit a ๊žตeta value of -0.124, t-value of 2.069, and p-value of 0.019. Given these results, it shows that organizational justice had significant negative effect (influence) on the positive relationship between economic pressure and employee deviant behaviour. Also, the coefficient of determination (R2) of this research model was 0.435 (43.5%). This implies that the exogenous variables (economic pressure and organizational justice) explained 43.5% of total variance in employee deviant behaviour. Therefore, in accordance with Cohenโ€™s (1988) categorization of the extent of variation in endogenous construct 

Discussion

The findings of the present study on the relationship between economic pressure and deviant behaviour though not significant, agreed with the tentative statement made earlier. This outcome supports the findings of few studies that found positive relationship between different forms of pressure (financial, economic, job pressure, risk of job insecurity, workload, family pressure, time pressure) and unethical behaviours at work (Adeoti et al., 2021; Adeoti et al., 2017; Devonish, 2013; Elshaer, et al., 2022; Houston et al., 2006; Mudau, et al., 2019; Obalade & Arogundade, 2019).

In reality, employees who experience economic pressure and at the same time organizational justice are unlikely to engage in acts detrimental to the organization or organizational members (deviant behaviour). For example, if employees are granted financial increment, promotion, handsome welfare package, opportunity for career development, or treated fairly, equally, just, impartial, etc., despite the presence of economic pressure, such employees may not extort money from students, abscond from work, fabrication of expenditures that were never made, or engage in property theft in the organization. Therefore, the more employees experience organizational justice, the lower the tendency of indulging in deviant behaviour despite the presence of economic pressure.

Further, the present study contributed to knowledge by using the tenets of social exchange theory and norm of reciprocity to explain the moderating effect of organizational justice on economic pressure โ€“ deviant behaviour relationship. Specifically, the results revealed that organizational justice significantly moderated the positive relationship between economic pressure and employee deviant behaviour in a negative direction. The results implied that despite experiencing economic pressure, employees may not engage in deviant behaviour provided they perceived fairness, equity, reward and just treatment in the workplace. In a nut shell, the results indicated that employees who receive fair treatment and recognition for their efforts in terms of reward may not be willing to engage in deviant behaviour. This finding aligns with the tenets of social exchange theory and norm of reciprocity. Both theories state that there is always an expected reciprocal behaviour between employers and employees. The action or behaviour of the employees will largely be determined by the action or behaviour of the employer/management (Akinbode & Fagbohungbe, 2011; Liu, et al., 2022). 

Implication for theory and practice

The present study has contributed to extant literature on employee deviant behaviours in institutions of higher learning. This is considered worthwhile because majority of existing studies on employee deviant behaviour are either conducted in Europe, America, or Asia. Results of studies conducted in these continents may not be fit into Africa due to cultural diversity, or difference social values. Secondly, the present study contributed to the literature on organizational justice by offering robust understanding of its role in moderating the positive correlation between economic pressure and deviant behaviour. Also, this research made theoretical contributions by utilizing the norm of reciprocity/social exchange theory to explain the influence of organizational justice on economic pressure โ€“ deviant behaviour relationship. It demonstrated that under the moderating influence of organizational justice, high economic pressure does not necessarily lead to increased levels of deviant behaviour. Practically, management of institutions of higher learning may get to know the prominence of organizational justice in minimizing employee deviant behaviours. Thus, this may persuade them into application of fairness, equity, or justice to all employees.

Limitations and directions for future research

There is no single research without some sort of limitations. Firstly, this study was conducted in Zamfara State, Nigeria. This may offer limited grounds to generalize the outcome to entire institutions of higher learning in Nigeria. Thus, further research may be conducted in other states across the country to compare findings with the present results for the sake generalization. Secondly, the present study examined the moderating effect of organizational justice on the link between economic pressure and deviant behaviour only. Future study may incorporate more exogenous variables into this model robust insights. Lastly, it is observed that deviant behaviours may be inculcated over time as such, longitudinal approach may be suitable. However, the present study adopted a cross-sectional survey. Therefore, future studies may adopt longitudinal approach to studying employee deviant behaviour.

Conclusion

The present study revealed that organizational justice is a formidable condition upon which economic pressure may have little or no positive correlation with employee deviant behaviours. In other words, indicated that under the moderating influence of organizational justice, high economic pressure does not necessarily lead to increased levels of deviant behaviour. Therefore, it is pertinent for management of institutions of higher learning in Nigeria to be fair, just, equitable and impartial in their dealings with employees to avoid display of deviant behaviours. Stated differently, for deviant behaviour to be minimized in institutions of higher learning, there should be in place a strong practice of fairness, equity, and inclusiveness.

References

Adeoti, M. O., & Kura, K. M. (2018). Ethical climate, job pressure, and counterproductive work behaviour: The mediating role of neutralization. In N. A. Abu-Bakar, S. Edman, D. A. A. Marikan, D. H. Husaini, & F. Ismail (Eds.), Proceedings of the 8th International Borneo Business Conference (IBBC 2018). Kuching: Universiti Malaysia Sarawak and Universiti Malaysia Sabah.

Adebayo, S. O., & Nwabuoku, U. C. (2008). Conscientiousness and perceived organizational support as predictors of employee absenteeism. Pakistan Journal of Social Sciences, 5, 363-367.

Adeoti, M. O., Shamsudin, F. M., & Mohammad, A. M. (2021). Opportunity, job pressure and deviant workplace behaviour: does neutralisation mediate the relationship? A study of faculty members in public universities in Nigeria. European Journal of Management and Business Economics30(2), 170-190.

Adeoti, M. O., Shamsudin, F. M., & Wan, C. Y. (2017). Effects of occupational stress and workplace spirituality on workplace deviance in academia: a conceptual paper. Asian Journal of Multidisciplinary Studies, 5(9), 100-106. 

Adeoti, M.O., Emmanuel, A.O., Gata, E.G., & Adeoti, I.E. (2018). Stress management among academics: A proposed framework. Journal of Management and Corporate Governance, 10(4), 16-32.

Agboola, A. A., & Salawu, R. O. (2011). Managing deviant behavior and resistance to change. International Journal of Business and Management, 6(1), 235-242. 

Akinbode, G. A., & Fagbohungbe, B. O. (2011). Gender, tenure and organisational factors as predictors of job involvement among Nigerian workers. Gender and Behaviour, 9(2), 4005-4038.

Bashir, S., Nasir, Z. M., Saeed, S., & Ahmed, M. (2011). Breach of psychological contract, perception of politics and organizational cynicism: Evidence from Pakistan. African Journal of Business Management, 5(3), 884-888. 

Bennett, R. J., & Robinson, S. L. (2000). Development of a measure of workplace deviance. Journal of Applied Psychology, 85, 349-360. doi:10.1037/0021-9010.85.3.349

Chang, K., & Smithikrai, C. (2010). Counterproductive behaviour at work: an investigation into reduction strategies. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 21(8), 1272-1288. doi:10.1080/09585192.2010.483852

Cohen, J. (1988). Statistical power analysis for the behavioral sciences (2nd ed.). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc.

Cohen-Charash, Y., & Spector, P. E. (2001). The role of justice in organizations: A meta-analysis. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Process, 86, 278-321.

Colquitt, J. A., & Rodell, J. B. (2011). Justice, trust, and trustworthiness: A longitudinal analysis integrating three theoretical perspectives. Academy of Management Journal, 54(6), 1183-1206.

Devonish, D. (2013). Job demands, health, and absenteeism: does bullying make things worse? Employee Relations, 36(2), 165-181.

Elshaer, I. A., Ghanem, M., & Azazz, A. M. (2022). An unethical organizational behavior for the sake of the family: perceived risk of job insecurity, family motivation and financial pressures. International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health19(11), 6541.

Fornell, C., & Larcker, D. F. (1981). Evaluating structural equation models with unobservable variables and measurement error. Journal of Marketing Research18(1), 39-50. doi: 10.2307/3151312

Fox, S., Spector, P. E., & Miles, D. (2001). Counterproductive work behaviour (CWB) in response to job stressors and organizational justice: Some mediator and moderator tests for autonomy and emotions. Journal of Vocational Behavior, 59, 291-309. doi:10.1006/jvbe.2001.1803

Griffin, R. W., O’Leary-Kelly, A., & Collins, J. M. (Eds.). (1998). Dysfunctional behavior in organizations: Violent and deviant behavior. Stamford, CT: Elsevier Science/JAI Press.

Hair, J. F., Hult, G. T. M., Ringle, C. M., & Sarstedt, M. (2017). A primer on partial least squares structural equation modeling (2nd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

Henle, C. A. (2005). Predicting workplace deviance from the interaction between organizational justice and personality. Journal of Managerial Issues, 247-263.

Henseler, J., Ringle, C. M., & Sinkovics, R.R. (2009). The use of partial least squares path modelling in international marketing. In R.R. Sinkovics & P. N. Ghauri (Eds.), Advances in International Marketing (pp. 277-320). Bingley: Emerald.

Houston, D., Meyer, L. H., & Paewai, S. (2006). Academic staff workloads and job satisfaction: Expectations and values in academe. Journal of Higher Education Policy and Management, 28(1), 17-30.

Jekayinfa, A.A. (2013). Discipline and indiscipline in higher educational system. Being the text of a paper delivered at the workshop on improved teaching and learning methods in the higher education system organised by the Afe Babalola University, Ado-Ekiti, Nigeria 9th-12th April 2013.

Kline, R. B. (2011). Principles and practice of structural equation modeling (5th ed.). New York: The Guilford Press.

Kim, J. (1999). Financial satisfaction, personal finance work conflict, and work outcomes: Pay satisfaction, organizational commitment, and productivity. Proceedings of the Association for Financial Counselling and Planning Education, 16, 38-45.

Lee, J., & Ok, C. M. (2014). Understanding hotel employeesโ€™ service sabotage: Emotional labor perspective based on conservation of resources theory. International Journal of Hospitality Management, 36, 176-187. doi:10.1016/j.ijhm.2013.08.014

Liu, Y., Zhang, Z., Zhao, H., & Liu, L. (2022). The double-edged sword effects of differential leadership on deviant behavior. Current Psychology, 1-13. doi.org/10.1007/s12144-022-03845-x

Mudau, T. J., Chauke, T. A., & Malaji, K. S. (2019). Investigation of the socio-economic factors that influences deviant behaviour among the youth: A case study of Madonsi Village, South Africa. Gender & Behaviour17(1), 12630-12648.

Obalade, G. O., & Arogundade, K. K. (2019). Ethical climate and deviant behavior among employees of selected public and private universities: The case of the emerging country. Corporate Governance and Organizational Behavior Review3(2), 30-39.

Penney, L. M., & Spector, P. E. (2005). Job stress, incivility, and counterproductive work behaviour (CWB): The moderating role of negative affectivity. Journal of Organizational Behavior, 26, 777-796. doi:10.1002/job.336

Robinson, S. L., & Bennett, R. J. (1995). A typology of deviant workplace behaviors: A multidimensional scaling study. Academy of Management Journal, 38, 555-572. 

Robinson, S. L., & Kraatz, M. S. (1998). Constructing the reality of normative behavior: The use of neutralization strategies by organizational deviants. In R. Griffin, A. O’Leary-Kelly, & J. Collins (Eds.), Dysfunctional behavior in organizations: Violent and deviant behavior (pp. 203-220). Stamford, CT: JAI Press.

Rotundo, M., & Sackett, P. R. (2002). The relative importance of task, citizenship, and counterproductive performance to global ratings of job performance: A policy-capturing approach. Journal of Applied Psychology, 87(1), 66-80. doi:10.1037/0021-9010.87.1.66

Spector, P. E., & Fox, S. (2005). The Stressor-Emotion Model of Counterproductive Work Behavior. In S. F. P. E. Spector (Ed.), Counterproductive work behavior: Investigations of actors and targets (pp. 151-174). Washington, DC, US: American Psychological Association.

Spector, P. E., Bauer, J. A., & Fox, S. (2010). Measurement artifacts in the assessment of counterproductive work behavior and organizational citizenship behavior: do we know what we think we know? Journal of Applied Psychology, 95(4), 781-790. doi:10.1037/a0019477.

Comparative Analysis of Postgraduate Studentsโ€™ Thesis Supervision and Mentoring in Oyo State, Nigeria

By: Kayode Sunday ADEYEMI

&

2Afolakemi Olasumbo OREDEIN

orcid.org/0000-0003-2051-4730

1&2Department of Arts & Social Science Education,

Faculty of Education,

Lead City University, Ibadan, Oyo State, Nigeria

Abstract

A close look at situations in universities in Nigeria suggests that the majority of postgraduate students do not complete their programmes by the deadline, despite having completed coursework requirements for the programmes. Some even abandon their thesis and go on leave for reasons best known to them. This study did a comparative analysis of postgraduate studentsโ€™ thesis supervision and mentoring in universities in Oyo State. The descriptive survey research design was adopted; the population included all postgraduate students in both public and private universities in Oyo State. A self developed instrument tagged โ€˜Postgraduate Thesis Supervision Questionnaireโ€™ (PTSMQ) was used to source data for the study. According to the findings, there is a significant interaction between the university supervisors and supervisee and also a high level of mentoring. In a similar vein, the results showed that the supervision of postgraduate students theses in university, in Oyo state varied significantly according to the type of university (Private universities with mean = 2.73, SD = 0.856, P < 0.05) and public universities postgraduate students thesis supervision at (mean = 3.07, SD =1.196, P < 0.05). The study equally found a significant university type difference in mentoring of postgraduate student (private university mentoring with mean = 2. 83, SD = 0. 938, P < 0.05 and public university at mean = 3.15, SD = 1.203, P < 0.05).  It was concluded that there was a significant difference in thesis supervision and mentoring among postgraduate students in universities in Oyo State. The study recommended among others, that efforts should be made by the government and university administrators to minimize the academic and administrative workload of postgraduate students’ thesis supervisors to ensure they dedicate more time to thesis supervision and mentoring.

Keywords:     Postgraduate students, Mentoring, Supervision of Thesis, Oyo State

LINK TO Download Paper

Credit Management Practices of Elementary School Teachers

By:  Jojo Ivan D. Inuguidan

Department of Science High School ,University of Baguio, Baguio, Philippines

Abstractโ€” The purpose of this study was to examine and analyze the Credit Management Practices of Balili Elementary School Teachers in La Trinidad, Benguet. Credit management procedures are the tactics employed by an organization to ensure that the firm’s credit level is acceptable and properly controlled. It is a subset of financial management that includes credit analysis, credit rating, credit categorization, and credit reporting. And when credit management is done correctly, the capital with borrowers decreases, as does the chance of bad debts. The primary goal of this study was to assess the level of agreement and execution on credit management methods when participants were divided by gender, civil status, duration of service, and monthly gross income. The study’s findings revealed that the overall degree of consensus on credit management procedures was moderate, while the overall level of execution on credit management practices was little. The respondents were mostly female, the civil status is dominated by married teachers, the length of service is dominated by teachers who have been teaching for one to ten years, the majority of monthly gross income is between twenty thousand and thirty thousand pesos, and the amount usually borrowed by teachers is between fifty-one thousand and seventy-five thousand pesos. To help teachers understand credit management practices better and perform better, they should attend the requisite level of financial management training, workshops, and seminars.

Keywordsโ€” Credit, Management, Practices, FinanceTeachers

I.  Introduction

There is a difference between borrowing money for investment purposes and borrowing it for the family’s daily needs and wants.Teachers, like all other professionals, are on a limited budget, despite the fact that they have a fairly solid employment. Teachers, as second parents to their students, deserve all of the perks necessary to carry out their great profession. Yet, both, regardless of the purpose of the borrowings, should be managed well.

Taken aback, teachers who belong to the so-called noblest profession are not spared from borrowings and they  experience being on a tight budget, although they are known to have a very stable job. As second parents of children at school, teachers deserve all the benefits they need to carry out their noble work. The literature so provides that many teachers were borrowers. The CERI (2017) and Mitchell (2011), have revealed that even top-paid teachers from different countries  were also engaged in money borrowings.  Meanwhile, in Africa and the Philippines, teachers are not paid as high as the other countries, all the more they are known to be borrowers. This then supports Ferrer’s (2017) and Mingat (2002), claims that over-obligation among teachers has long hunted the entire public education system.

Teachers need to borrow money to meet emergency needs that cannot be met with the state welfare funds, living beyond one’s means appears to be the big get factor behind their debt problems and teachers have been a debt settlement because they work in low-income schools. (Madriaga, 2007). Not only this, but teachers also fall prey to delayed salaries which causes them to resort to other means while waiting for their monthly paycheck to sustain their needs and teachers’ spending pattern are affected by their values and goals that’s why they become short on money and usually an option for debt or borrow money in any lending institutions.

The teachers in the Philippines are being tagged as “taga London” (it means they tend to loan here and there). One of the identified culprits to their burden of borrowing is the low salary they are receiving and also subject to delayed wages, which is a terrible state of affairs. They’ve helped students fund projects from their own money at some time in their careers. This might put an undue strain on their family’s budget, causing their wage to be insufficient to meet their monthly necessities, forcing them to turn to alternative methods while they wait for their monthly payment. Furthermore, some teachers may have ambitions to invest, requiring them to incur debt in order to get extra funds.. As Alison (2005) has opined, borrowing should not cause more debts. Instead, it should serve the purpose of why one borrows, such as holding a buffer stock of savings, planning for retirement, and using high-cost methods of borrowing (De Bassa Scheresberg, 2013).

The revelations of Joo (1998) and Grable (2011) and Gerrans et al. (2014), relative to the teachers’ borrowing are quite alarming. It is because the personal financial wellness of the teachers is seen affecting the work performance. The burden of paying the amount borrowed affects work productivity. Shad (2001), opined that an employee who is worried about their unpaid obligations could not perform well as it impacts physical and mental wellbeing. It often causes anxiety, depression, and absenteeism. While any organization is for productivity, efficiency, and effectiveness, the employees mirror its goals. They are still the goals’ implementers. If personal financial management directly affects their productivity at work, there must be an organization’s intervention. Hence, this research aims to look into the credit management practices of one of the most prominent elementary schools in La Trinidad, Benguet. The study is limited to documenting teachers’ credit management practices, not necessarily proving their borrowings’ correlation to their performance. The teachers’ documented practices would be analyzed versus the theories and concepts of good credit management practices. The findings may be used as bases for research-based interventions and serve as a benchmark for their best practices.

Conceptual Framework

The paradigm of the study is illustrated in Figure 1. It shows the relationship of the different variables that will be involved in this study. The independent variables consist of teachers’ profiles, including sex, civil status, length of service, and monthly gross income. Through the factors, it will help in analyzing the data on what is the relationship to the study based on which among the independent variable having the highest

INDEPENDENT VARIABLES     DEPENDENT                                                     VARIABLES

1.        Teachers Profile1.a                  Sex1.b                  Civil Status1.c                  Length of Service1.d                  Monthly gross income
1.1 CredManagement Practices

Figure 1. Paradigm of the study

percentage that has a big impact or factor on credit management practices of the teachers. The dependent variables consist of the credit management practices, which is the main point of this study. It aims to provide baseline data on credit management practices of teachers in Balili Elementary School that could be a basis for interventions.

Credit Management Practices

According to Myers and Brealey (2013), credit management practices are strategies used by an organization to ensure that the level of credit in the firm is acceptable and is managed effectively. It is part of financial management that comprises the analysis of credit, credit rating, classification, and credit reporting. And when credit management is done right, then the capital with debtors reduces and the possibility of bad debts is also reduced (Edward, 1993).

The study of Acedillo (2018), revealed that at different districts in Samar,          Philippines. Teachers exhibited      poor      personal financial management practices. This characteristic is true to all. It is, however, evident that the more net income available the better is the teachers’ saving, investment, expenditure, money management, and response to unexpected expenses. For families with more members contributing to the pot have healthier savings and investment practices. This means that having a higher net income improves some good financial behavior. Therefore, a need to enhance teachers’ financial knowledge to help them to improve their financial management practices and eventually good financial health status. Thus there should be great determination making, an effective, competent, and monetarily stable teacher (Hernandez, 2009).

Saving Practices is one of the most widely known as financial management principles, generally by setting aside some amount for savings before paying for the expenses. It included knowledge on issues and managing money that includes the following concept: understanding of basic concepts on analyzing assets, the use of such knowledge to evaluate, plan, and perform financial judgments (Hogarth, 2006). Savings according to Hilgert et al. (2003) and Pulka (2015), are part of disposable income which is not spent that will fulfill the daily requirements in the future. It is an amount of something such as time or money that one need not use or spend. Money that could be used for investment to earn interest or be used to purchase assets such as buildings. Saving money entails good financial management. Financial management is related to deferring consumption, which is done by the individuals and understanding of basic concepts on analyzing money and assets, evaluate, execute financial decisions, skills, and capabilities (Kafela, 2010). An example of this is having an active savings plan, maintaining reasonable and low debt, lack of money-related conflict with family or partner, and intentionally following a personal spending plan (Joo, 1998).

As the teachers acquired debts, they have different techniques or strategies on how to manage their borrowed money to the institutions. Financial literacy comes with the individual’s knowledge on how to cope with financial funds for its life gratification. The concept of credit can be traced back in history or they have credit record for evidence purposes if there is a problem between the lender and creditor agreement and it was appreciated this transaction after the second world in Europe according to Asante (2015). As assuring that debtors pay on time, there is no additional or surcharge interest when one is paying for the credit, and poor debts are managed in such a manner that debt is paid without damaging the relationship of the debtor and creditor.

According to Massachusetts (2014), teachers may increase their income by reducing their expenses those which is not necessary and paying their debts early to avoid penalty or additional interest. In line with this, Wirthulin (2004), suggested four key steps to financial freedom. First, paying the loans in advance or earlier than the due date to avoid additional interest or charges. Second, practice spending a lesser amount than the gross income or salaries that you received. Teachers should know to identify how to spend less, instead, know how to manage and increase their income properly. Third, learn how to save extra money for emergency use. Teachers should know how to identify needs from wants and set the most in need for spending to be able to save and not to get short on money. Lastly, it is important to know how to lessen and control borrowing money in any institution if it is not necessary. Teachers become more aware of how personal values and goals effects on borrowing pattern and considered on how to budget because it is effective money management.

As opined by Sison et al. (2012), credit and collection management practices can be tested through credit and collection operation audit as to management coordination, leadership, staffing, organization, and planning. Leadership includes the setting, assurance, leaders, involvement, growth, operation, improvement, thoughtful, inspiration, and work satisfaction. In the study of Cheruiyot (2015), it was found out that credit policy positively influences loan repayment thus contributes to reducing loan default. It showed that most of the respondents indicated that well-defined credit policies positively influence loan repayment which resulting in reduced delinquency and if the organization comes up with a clear credit policy, the loan delinquency rates will be minimized. The findings of Gatimu and Kalui (2014) also stated that credit policy has a significant effect on loan default.

Malewos and Abiy (2015), studied individual or personal finance management on abilities among employees in the formal sector in Jimma town in Ethiopia and collected major data on their financial practices. The financial management capabilities were based on the decision-making made in terms of investments, credit, insurance, savings, and debt. The developmental aspects of the financial decision-making process could explain the fundamental causes of the kind of financial behavior by teachers in embracing the financial practices. There are some common characteristics like lack of self-control on borrowing, limited cognitive abilities, and inertia that are known to shape monetary behavior and can only be personally attributed to such results on teachers’ adoption of the standard financial practices.

In Ghana, Kwaku (2015), found out that a major factor considered in credit management is the ability of the creditor to pay for their debts. However, to mitigate the risk of default in paying for their credit, microfinance’s ensured that loans are well secured or there is a written agreement between the creditor and lenders. Though advances are

granted based on the borrower’s ability to recompense the advance and not on the basis to pledge sufficient assets to cover the advance in case of default for not paying off its obligations, it is highly desirable for all advances made to customers and staff to be well secured. This means that there must be a collateral exchange of the borrower if ever he or she can’t pay for his or her debt to avoid loss of capital and interest in the organization.

The central bank of Kenya in 2005, issued guidelines where banks were required to have debt collection rules and policy procedures which included group enforcements, backer payments, and nonstop monitoring and control of loans (CBK, 2015). In 2016, further guidelines were issued on the adequacy and enforceability of collateral or guarantees for strict adherence and compliance by a commercial bank in Kenya. The need to reduce non-performing loans has seen commercial banks aim at reducing the collection period by adopting stringent collection policy and the effectiveness of the debt policy will be based on the minimization or elimination of defaults on loan repayment (Otieno & Nyagol, 2016). Client appraisal is a process commenced mainly to determine the acceptance or rejection of a plan for credit by the clients. This involves an assessment of the repayment capacity of the borrowers, Gakure and Waithaka (2012). The primary objective is to ensure the loans are issued only to credit well-intentioned customers. The client appraisal process includes assessing the ability of the borrower and any specific risks associated. Auronen (2003) and Mathara (2007), stated that the process entails collecting sufficient information concerning the customer before permitting the credit services and through proper client appraisals, the loans are granted to the right customers through securing the relative revenues of the banks. Hence, crucial in any credit management is to highly identify the level of non-performing loans, lack of satisfactory client appraisal guidelines, and limited use of qualitative methods of loan valuation results in loans not been repaid on time.

Latifee (2006), stated that collection must be taken concerning when and how the past-due totals of debt are to be received. It is a collection technique with knowledge upon due date, grace period, date of turnover of bad debts account to be received, and penalties or surcharge. For any loan, the collection practice should be undoubtedly implied out as part of the credit terms. Borrowers need to know the details of the collection procedure to avoid the surcharge. Kariuki (2010), ensure that collection rules and regulation is needed since all borrowers do not pay the bills in time. Some borrowers take a long time to make payments while others do not pay at all.

Statement of the Problem

Generally, the study aims to determine the credit management employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers. Specifically, it aims to answer the following questions:

1.What is the level of    agreement of     the    teachers    on the credit management practices when grouped according to sex, civil status, length of service and monthly gross income?

2.What  is  the  level  of  implementation  on  the       credit management practices as employed by Balili Elementary School  Teachers when grouped according to sex, civil status, length of service and monthly gross income?

Hypotheses of the Study

1.The      level   of            agreement    of     the     teachers  on  the  credit management practices when grouped according to sex,  civil status, length of service and monthly gross income is Agree.

2.The level of implementation on the credit management practices as employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers when grouped according to sex, civil status, length of service and monthly gross income is Moderately Implemented.

II. METHODOLOGY

Research Design

The study entails a descriptive qualitative design that is considered conclusive, to observe, describe, investigate one or more variables, and document aspects of a situation as it naturally occurs. According to McCombes 2019, it accurately and systematically describes a situation or phenomenon, and appropriate choice to identify characteristics, frequencies, and categories to ensure that the results are valid and reliable. In addition, the data collected using a survey approach can be used to recommend possible explanations for particular relationships between variables and to produce good interpretational models of these relationships.

Population and Locale of the Study

The respondents of the study were all Balili Elementary School Teachers. Teachers’ financial management practices are a continuing concern as this has indirectly affected their performance. 

Data Collection Instrument

The researcher used a self-structured survey questionnaire as a major tool in gathering the needed data. The items in the questionnaire were formulated based on the present concept and theory. The questionnaire consisted of three parts. The second part contains the items on the Level of Agreement on Credit Management Practices and the third part contains the items on the Level of Implementation on Credit Management Practices of the Balili Elementary School Teachers.

Treatment of Data

 The four-point Likert Scale below indicates the level of implementation on credit management practices of Balili Elementary School Teachers in La Trinidad Benguet. The following scale with its description equivalents were used:

4          3.26 – 4.00          95-100%            Highly

Implemented(HI)

3                2.51 – 3.25          89-94%             Moderately                                                         Implemented                                                       (MI)

4                21.76 – 2.5          82-88%             Slightly

                                                            Implemented(SI) 1           1.00 – 1.75          75-81%             Least     

                                                            Implemented(LI

On the other hand, the four-point Likert Scale below indicates the level of agreement on credit management practices of Balili Elementary School Teachers in La Trinidad Benguet . The following scale with its description equivalents were used:

4          3.26 – 4.00          95-100%            Strongly Agree                                                    (SA)

3          2.51 – 3.25          89-94%             Agree    (A)

2          1.76 – 2.5           82-88%             Moderately                                                         Agree    (MA)

1          1.00 – 1.75          75-81%             Least Agree                                                        (LA)

III. 

24

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Level of Agreement on Credit Management Practices of Balili Elementary School Teachers

Table 1 represents the overall level of agreement on the credit management practices of Balili Elementary School Teachers in La Trinidad Benguet. It shows that the weighted mean of the level of agreement on the credit management practices is 2.38, which indicates that credit management practices are moderately agreed (MA).

The result revealed that among the credit management practices, “I always pay my dues on time or in advance” got the highest mean of three- point eighty (3.8) with a descriptive equivalent of strongly agree (SA). Most of the teachers’ agreed on paying their obligation on time or in advance so that there will be no additional interest or penalty to be imposed due to late payment of the debt. This affirms the statement of Haagensen (2020) that paying  the  bills  or  obligations  on  time or  in advance is important trait of taking control of financial status. Knowing when individual notices are

Table 1. Level of agreement          on         credit management          practices of Balili Elementary School Teachers

unpaid and making a habit of paying them by on due date, that to get low- interest credit in the forthcoming to the institutions. Also, the statement of Brett (2009), affirms that paying your dues on time means putting in the time and work to attain your dream job can be the basis on handling the credit practices.

Table 2 shows the result on the level of agreement on credit management practices when grouped according to sex, it reveals that males are moderately agreed (MA) with a weighted mean of two-point thirty-nine (2.39). This could be probably due to the behavioral norms of the teachers. Uncertainty reduction theory posted that norms, attitudes, beliefs, values, moral and personal issues a guiding principle in professional growth. This affirms the statement of Chong (2010), on the credit management across, males’ respondents are more conscious in terms of their credit management practices compared to females on their behavior towards their credit management practices. Also, this affirms the statement of Ahiable (2012), on An Assessment of Credit Management Practices at Agricultural Development Bank (ADB) Branches in the Eastern Region of Ghana, that there are more male who believe and agree on the proper action  that  among  the  credit management practices, it must be adapt the good practices and lessen lessen the bad credit management practices that involve in the credits management.

Table 2. Level  of agreement of  teachers on the         credit management practices when grouped according to sex

Table 3 shows the level of agreement of teachers on the credit management practices along with civil status, single teachers with a weighted mean of two-point fifty-three (2.53) agree (A). Most of the respondents are single because they do not have their own family to

Table 3. Level  of agreement of  teachers on the         credit management practices when grouped according to civil status

support and have less responsibility compared to those teachers having their own family. These teachers are the person who are not married or involved in a relationship with someone or considered by itself or separate from other things. This affirms the statement of Ntiamoah (2014), thatingles are more leading in terms of understanding and agreeing on the credit management practices when they are doing or experiencing this on loan. Also, this affirms the statement of Ecija ( 2020), that single workers are more supportive when it comes to proper handling of their obligations since they do not have children to feed and they do not have high bills or expenses to pay. It is also emphasized that these single workers are being responsible enough for their credit or loans that which they borrowed from the lenders since they don’t have that many problems to interfere with their actions on how to handle their credits or obligations.

Table 4 shows the level of agreement of teachers on the credit management practices when grouped according to the length of service the details that below 1 year on service on performing some activity has a weighted mean of two-point fifty-nine (2.59) is strongly agree (SA) on the credit management practices. Most of the teachers are possible newly hired by the school and it can be also their first basic experience on teachings that is why they are more conscious of their actions based on their    credit  management         practices for       decision-making on borrowing. This   affirms   the review of Mitchell   (2011) that   the  length of service, which determines work  experience  or  how  long  the individual work with his or her employee that can affect how to handle their credit or loans on paying of their obligations if they can exercise the credit

Table 4. Level of agreement of teachers on   the credit management practices when grouped according to length of service

management   practices   properly.   Also   the    statement    of Hernandez (2009), affirms that it takes into the responsibility of a worker on how long the experience on borrowing based on the workers’ responsibility on their work that can be used or it can be the basis on how the workers handle their obligations.

Table 5 shows the level of agreement of teachers on the credit management practices when grouped according to monthly gross income. The result revealed that gross income of bracket Php 31,000- 40,000, the amount paid to a teacher or what they received on hand before taxes or other deductions have a weighted mean of two-point forty-one (2.41) moderately agrees (MA) and none of the respondents had a monthly gross income bracket of more than 50,000 and above. Hence, it shows that the teachers based on their monthly gross income on how they are going to decide and agreed on the credit management practices for applying for a loan to come up with a good decision making. This affirms the statement of Katoh (2008) that based on the salary of the workers which the fixed amount of money or compensation paid to an  employee by an employer in return for work performed will be the basis of the borrower on how is their behavior agreeing in the credit management practices. Partaking with their credit management strategy helps the individual guard the cash flow, optimizes performance, and reduces the

Table 5. Level of agreement          of  teachers on the credit management practices when grouped according to monthly gross income

possibility that default will adversely impact your activity. Also, the statement of Edward (1993), affirms that agreeing on the credit management practices will be based on the monthly gross income of individual which the money that someone is paid each month by their employer, especially when they are in a profession such as teaching can be the basis on how this individual give action or that can affect their behavior through on how they handle their obligation on the future.

Level    of         Implementation   on         the Credit Management Practices as Employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers

Table 6 presents the overall level of implementation on credit management practices of Balili Elementary School Teachers in La Trinidad Benguet. It shows that the weighted mean of the level of implementation on credit management practices is two-point thirty (2.30) it indicates that credit management practices are slightly implemented (SI) by the respondents. The result revealed that among the credit management practices, “I should set aside an amount intended for repayment of my credit” got the highest mean of three-point seventy-eight (3.78) with a descriptive equivalent of highly implemented (HI). Most of the teachers’ implement on setting aside an amount for paying off their obligations or debt to the creditor or to the lenders to whom they borrowed. This goes with recommendation of Robinson (2021) to set up automatic payments or set aside extra money wherever possible, to help ensure bills are paid on

Table 6. Level of implementation on the credit management practices as employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers

time to avoid late payments and interest rate hikes. Also, the stament of Mathara (2007) affirms that setting aside an amount for emergency used for unexpected events to pay for the amount and unexpected visitor to collect of your obligation to the creditors

.

Table 7 shows the level of implementation on credit management practices when grouped according to sex, it reveals that most of the respondents who implement the credit management practices are the male respondents with the descriptive equivalent of slightly implemented (SI) based on their average mean of two-point thirty-nine (2.39). This affirms the statement of Odonkor (2018) that males are more implementing credit management practices compared to females because due to behavioral attitude of their ego or pride within them and they believe that implementing credit management practices can have a good relationship towards the borrower and lender in the future if ever they will borrow again. Also, this affirms the statement of Hernandez (2009) that there are more male who implement credit management practices compared to female that it must be even practice up to now today which it identify that males are fund in paying their debtsor   obligation    because of their ego that  can degrade them  if  ever someone will know if they have credit or obligation to anyone.

Table 7. Level of implementation on the credit  management  practices as employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers when grouped according to sex

Table 8 shows the level of implementation on the credit management practices as employed by Balili Elementary School  Teachers when grouped according to civil status. The civil status of a respondent who implement more on credit management practices are the male respondent who is not in solemnly committed relationships or who

Table 8. Level of implementation on the credit  management  practices as employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers when grouped according to civil status

are not yet married have a weighted mean of 2.35  is  slightly  implemented (SI) and none of the respondents were separated .This affirms the statement of Acedillo (2018) reveals that single teachers are more capable of implementing thethe credit management practices because they don’t have the dependents that they need to support. Also, this affirms the statement of Edward (1993) that individual or single workers are existing alone or consisting of one entity or part or feature that implementing more on the credit management practices base on their status which they don’t have a lot of obligations to think off and suffered from, so they give more attention on implementing the practices to lessen their obligation for the good credit handler for the future reference.

Table 9 shows the level of implementation on the credit management practices as employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers when grouped according to length of service. The details that  below 1 year on service, this teacher who is recording working experience within a profession the length of employment, which is measured to determine vesting, eligibility, and benefits levels of the teachers have a weighted mean of two-point fifty-two (2.52) is moderately implemented (MI) on the credit management practices based on data above. These are the ones’ who give more attention and implementing credit management practices. It is unusual that this teacher who does not have enough length of service

Table 9. Level of implementation on the credit management  practices  as  employed   by   Balili   Elementary   School   Teachers when grouped according to length of service

inteaching  career  give  more   time   in   implementation   of   these  credit management practices compared to the teachers whose in service is more than a year. This affirms the statement of Joo (1998) that the length of service, which determines work experience or how long the individual work with his or her employee that can affect how to handle their credit or loans on paying of their obligation if they can exercise the credit management practices properly. Also, the statement of Abey (2015), affirms that it takes into the implementation on how being the responsibility of a worker, on the workers’ responsibility on their work that can be used or it can be the basis on how the workers handle their obligations and the way they implement the credit management practices.

Table 10 shows that the level of implementation when grouped according to monthly gross income, the result revealed that gross income of bracket Php 20,000- 30,000, the total income earned by teachers on a paycheck before taxes and other deductions have a weighted mean of two-point thirty-five (2.35) is slightly implemented (SI) and none of the respondents had a monthly gross income bracket of more than Php 50,000 and above. Hence, it shows that the teachers based on their monthly gross income in between PHP 20,000-30,000 are more implementing these credit management practices compared to the other teacher based on the result on their monthly gross income on how they

Table 10. Level of implementation on the  credit management  practices as employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers when grouped according to monthly gross income

will practice this implementation on credit management practices for good decision making in the future whenever they are in loaning activities. This affirms the statement of Madriaga (2007) that the official documentation of the income or salary, including, but not partial to, a pay a receipt reflecting compensation of government benefits, for the period 30 days preceding to the date on which the loan is made with that, the progression when done in the right manner safeguards the customer. Also, this affirms the statement of Myers and Brealey (2013) that administration should use to have a satisfactory level of credit and to accomplish this level on the credit management practices that will be based on the monthly gross income of individual which the money that someone is paid each month by their employer.

Summary

The salient findings based on the analysis and interpretation of the results, this study summarizes the following findings:

1.The overall level of agreement on the credit management practices of the respondents is moderately agreed with the weighted mean indication of 2.38. Among the credit management practices, “I always pay my dues on time or in advance” got the highest mean of 3.80 with a descriptive equivalent of strongly agreed, and “I default in payment when

the lenders are relatives or friend got the lowest mean of 1.32 with a descriptive equivalent of least agreed.

2.The level of agreement of teachers on the credit management practices when grouped according to sex, subjugated by males have moderately agreed has a weighted mean of 2.39, civil status, dominated by singles has a weighted mean of 2.53 is agreed, length of service, majority of the respondents were 1-10 years on service has a weighted mean of 2.59 is strongly agreed and monthly gross income, the preponderance of the respondents falls on Php 31,000- 40,000 has a weighted mean of 2.41 is moderately agreed. The resulting base on the respondent’s profile on the level of agreement, the finding affirms the hypothesis when grouped according to civil status and rejects the hypothesis when grouped according to sex, length of service, and monthly gross income.

3.The overall level of implementation on the credit management practices as employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers is slightly implemented, with the weighted mean indication of 2.30. Among the credit management practices “I should set aside an amount intended for repayment of my credit” got the highest mean of 3.78 with a descriptive equivalent of highly implemented and  “I  should  default  in  payment when the lenders are relatives or friend got the lowest mean of 1.12 with a descriptive equivalent of least implemented.

4.The level of implementation on the credit management practices, as employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers when grouped according to sex, subject by males, is slightly implemented, with the weighted mean indication of 2.39, civil status, subjugated by singles has a weighted mean of 2.35 is slightly implemented, length of service, majority of the respondents were below 1 year on service has a weighted mean of 2.52 is moderately implemented, and monthly gross income, majority of the respondents falls on Php 20,000- 30,000 has a weighted mean of 2.35 is slightly implemented. The resulting base on the respondent’s profile on the level of implementation, the finding affirms the hypothesis when grouped according to the length of service and rejects the hypothesis when grouped according to sex, civil status, and monthly gross income.

IV. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

Conclusions

In the light of findings, the conclusions are hereby presented:

1a. The overall level of agreement on the credit management practices of the respondents is generally moderately agreed. This means that the respondents do not fully agree with the documented practices and good credit management practices.

1b. The Level of agreement of teachers on the credit management practices when grouped according to sex and the monthly gross income is moderately agreed, civil status is agreed and length of service is strongly agreed. This means that most teachers level of agreement was based on the length of service on how they would decide or agree on the credit management practices. The finding affirms the hypothesis when grouped according to civil status and rejects the hypothesis when grouped according to sex, length of service, and monthly gross income.

2a. The overall level of implementation on the credit management practices as employed by Balili Elementary School Teachers is generally slightly implemented. This means tha the respondents do not fully implement the documented practices and good credit management practices.

2b. The individual credit management practices of  Balili Elementary School Teachers in La Trinidad Benguet when grouped according to sex, civil status, and the monthly gross income is slightly implemented and length of service is moderately implemented. This means that most teachers’ level of implementation was based on the length of service on how they implement or apply the credit management practices since it has the highest weighted mean indication of 2.59 with the equivalent description of strongly agreed. The finding affirms the hypothesis when grouped according to the length of service and rejects the hypothesis when grouped according to sex, civil status, and monthly gross income.

Recommendations

The findings of this study, it is hoped, will contribute to the existing body of knowledge and form the basis of future researchers. From the result data of this study, the researcher hereby recommends the following: 1a.      The study recommends that the teacher must try to have

one credit source of loan so that they can easily implement and agreed on the credit management practices for decision-making, thus leading them to a good financial performance.

1b. Teachers must contemplate the effect of the cost of living, monitor the credit policy impose by the lending institution, and must pay off the debt or obligations that charges the highest rate of interest in advance or before the due date to have a good decision making on the credit management practices.

2a. Teachers must have control of their day-to-day, month-to- month finances, the consciousness of their financial firmness, and being on track to meet financial goal lines to improve their financial management practices and reinforce their financial capability.

2b. To make the teachers understand more on the credit management practices and enabling them to do better, they should attend the necessary level of financial management pieces of training, workshop, simulations, seminars, symposiums, and financial awareness especially in revitalizing the importance of credit management practices.

2c. The Department of Education may rigorously initiate the implementation of strategies on financial management practices and the school administrations may set up and encourage the creation of teachers’ help centers to offer free financial pieces of advice, education, and awareness to guide the teachers on their credit management practices.

LITERATURE CITED

[1] ABEY, K. (2015). Personal Financial Management. Capability among employees in Jimma Town, Southwest Ethiopia: A pilot study. http://elpjournal.eu/wp-content/uploads/2018/01/2-2-3.pdf.&nbsp;

[2] ACEDILLO,  B.   (2018).   Exploring   the   Personal   Financial Management Practices of Teachers in the Countryside: Vol 6 Issue 1.

[3] AHIABLE E. (2012). An Assessment of Credit Management Practices at Agricultural.http://129.122.16.11/bitstream/123456789/4805/1/Emmanuel%20Yao%20Ahiable%20%28PG%204083310%29.pdf. .

[4] ALISON, G. (2005). In Encyclopedia of Social Measurement. https://www.amazon. com/Encyclopedia-Social-Measurement- Kimberly-Kempf-Leonard/dp/0124438903. 

[5]ASANTE, G. (2015).    Tracking            Financial Credibility http://panthernow.com/2018/02/25/credit-scores-help- / keep-track- financial-credibility. 

[6] ATKINSON, A.         AND     KEMPSON,       E. (2004). Young People, Money Management, Borrowing and Saving. A report to the Banking Code Standards Board, Personal Finance Research Centre. https://www.econstor.eu/bitstream/ 10419/66639/1/657939307.pdf .

[7] AURONEN,     L.    (2003).   Asymmetric   Information: Theory     and Applications Helsinki University of Technology, Helsinki.

[8] BRETT K. (2009).  The         Importance   of    Paying YourDues. https://www.artofmanliness.com/articles/the-importance-of -paying- your-dues/. 

[9] CBK  (Central Bank  of           Kenya). (2015).  CBK Annual Supervision https://www.centralbank.go.ke/reports/bank- supervision-and-banking-sector-reports/. 

[10] CERI                      ( Center of Education in Research and Innovation).    (2017). Education at a Glance https://theartofeducation.edu/2018/05/24/a- comparison-of-teaching-salaries-across-the-country-and-the-world/.

[11] CHERUIYOT, M. (2015). An Analysis of Causes of Loan Delinquency in Government. http://goo.gl/EHv7iO.

[12] CHONG, F. (2010)..Evaluating the Credit Management of Micro-Enterprises http://www.wseas.us/e-library/transactions/economics /2010/89- 673.pdf.

[13] COX, E. (1980). The Optimal Number of Response Alternatives  for a Scale: A review. Journal of Marketing Research 17(4): 407โ€“422. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/327906284_A_New_Metri c_of_Consensus_for_Likert_Scales. 

[14] CRESWELL, A. (2014). Testing and Evaluation. https:// journals.uic. edu/ojs/ index.php /fm /article/view/9525/8059. 

[15] DAMSCRODER,      D.         and       H. HAGEDORN. (2011).  Fostering Implementation of Health Services Research Findings Into Practice:A consolidated framework for advancing implementation Science.        Implementation Science,   4,         50. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/50890423_A_ Guiding_Framework_and_Approach_for_Implementation_Research_in_Sub stance_Use_Disorders_Treatment.      

[16] DE BASSA SCHERESBERG, C. (2013). Financial literacy behaviour among young adults: Evidence and implications. Numeracy, 6(2). http://scholarcommons.usf.edu/numeracy/vol 6/iss2/art5. 

[17] ECIJA, J. (2020).    Financial     Management     Practices,      Capability and Financial Well-being of Public High School Teachers. file:///C:/Users/Admin/Downloads/67-Article%20 Text-332-1-10- 20201221.pdf. 

[18] EDWARD, B.   (1993).          Credit       Management. 6th edition http://www.gowerpublishing.com.

[19] FERRER, J. (2017). Caught in a Debt Trap? An Analysis of the Financial Well-being of Teachers in the Philippines. The Normal Lights, 11(2)conditions: An assessment of recent trends in Africa. .

[20] GAKURE, R. and S. WAITHAKA.(2012) .Effect of Credit Management Techniques   on   the   Performance    of    Unsecured    Bank Loans Employed Commercial Banks in Kenya.  International Journal of Business and Social Research, 2,4, (Pg31-45).

[21] GATIMU, E. and F. KALUI. (2014). Assessing Institutional Factors Contributing to Loan Defaulting in Microfinance Institutions in Kenya. IOSR Journal Of Humanities and Social Science (IOSR- JHSS) Ver. II, 19(5), (Pg105โ€“123).

[22] GRABLE, E. (2011). Financial            Planning and CounselingScales.https://www.springer.com/gp/book/9781441969071.      &nbsp;

[23] GERRANS, P., C. SPEELMAN  and G. CAMPITELLI. (2014).    The relationship between personal financial wellness and financial wellbeing: A structural equation modelling approach. Journal of Family and Economic Issues, 35(2).

[24] HAAGENSEN, E. (2020). Procrastinator’s Guide to Bill Payment. https://www.investopedia.com/articles/pf/08/stop-paying-bills- late.asp. 

[25] HERNANDEZ, P. (2009). Financial management practices of secondary public school  principals  of  the  selected  schools  division  in Metro Manila: Basis for enhancement program. Center for Research and Development. Quezon City.

[26]HILGERT, M., J. HOGARTH, and G. BEVERLY. (2003) .Householdfinancial management: The connection between knowledge and behavior. Federal Reserve Bulletin, 89(7).

[27] HOGARTH, J. (2006). Financial Education and Economic Developed Improving     Financial            Literacy. http://www.oecd.org/dataoecd/20/50/37742200.pd.

[28] JOO, S. (1998).         Personal FinancialWellness  and Worker      Job Productivity. Virginia Tech Electronic Theses and                       Dissertations http://hdl.handle.net/10919/30519.

[29] KABIR, S. (2016).      Method of        Data        

Collectionhttps://www.researchgate.net/publication/325846997_ METHODS_ OF_DATA_COLLECTION. 

[30] KAFELA, G.T. 2010. Promoting Access to Finance by Empowering Consumers Financial Literacy in Developing Countries. Educational Research and Reviews, 5(5), (Pg202-212).

[31] KARIUKI, J. (2010). Effective Collection Policy. KASNEB Publishers, Nairobi,https://www.academia.edu/23708579/THE_EFFECT_OF_C REDIT_MANAGEMENT_ON_THE_FINANCIAL

_PERFORMANCE_OF_  MICROFINANCE_ INSTITUTIONS_IN_KENYA_    [32] ROSEMARY_NDUTA_GATUHU.

KATOH , F. (2008). Financial Management Theory and Practice,  New: Tata McGraw- Hill Publishing Company Limited.

[33] KWAKU, E. (2015).   Universal       Banking and  Basel III in       Ghana. Https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id= 2573329.

[34] LATIFEE, I. 2006.    Global   Summit (2006).

Publishers http://www.econjournals.com

[35] MADRIAGA, M. 2007. Enduring disablism:      Students with dyslexia      and their pathways into UK Higher Education.https://www.researchgate.net/publication/248912919_ Enduring_ disablism_Students_with_dyslexia_and_their_pathways_into_ UK_ higher_education_and_beyond. 

[36] MALEWOS, G. and F.  ABIY.  (2015).  Effect  of CreditManagement Practices on Loan  Performance       in        Deposit                       Taking Microfinance Banks in Kenya. International Journal of Innovations Business and Management (IJIBM).10, (1).

[37] MASSACHUSETTS, D. (2014). Tax tips for teachers: Deducting out- of- pocket classroom expenses. https://turbotax.intuit.com/tax-tips/ college- and-education/tax-tips-for-teachers-deducting -out of- pocket-classroom-expenses/L7RQyMRR4. 

[38] MATHARA, K. (2007). The Response of National Bank of Kenya to the Challenges of Non-performing Loan. MBA Research, University of Nairobi.http://erepository.uonbi.ac.ke/bitstream/handle/11295/21 570/Mathara_The%20response%20of%20National% 20Bank%20of%20Kenya%20limited%20to%20the%20 challenge% 20of%20non-performing%20loans.pdf?sequence=3.

[39] MCCOMBES, S. (2019). Descriptive Research Methodology. https://www.scribbr.com/methodology/descriptive-          research

/#:~:text=Descriptive%20research%20aims%20to%20accurately, investigate%20one%20or%20more%20variables. 

[40] MINGAT, A. (2002). Lead Education Economist in the World Bank’s Africa Regional          Office. https://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/fandd/2002/03/mingat .htm#aut hor. 

[41] MITCHELL,                        S. (2011). Managing risk in defined            contribution        plan: What does the future hold?  growing old : Paying  for     retirement and institutional        money   management       No.       2013-10-02:19. http://www.iopsweb.org/principlesguidelines/46126017.pdf.&nbsp;

[42] MYERS, C. and R. BREALEY. (2013). Principles of Corporate    Finance.

New York: McGraw- Hill. 

[43] NTIAMOAH, E. (2014). An Assessment of Credit Management  Practices On         Loan     Performance. https://www.academia.edu/7871974/An_Assessment_of_Credit_Ma nagement_Practices_on_Loan_Performance. 

[44] ODONKOR, O. (2018). An Assessment of Credit Risk Management Practices of Adansi Rural Bank Limited. http://www.ccsenet.org/journal/index.php/ijef/article/view/0 /37273. 

[45] OTIENO, S. and M. NYAGOL. (2016). Relationship between credit management and financial performance: Empirical evidence from microfinance banks in Kenya. Research Journal of Finance and Accounting, 7 .6,(Pg 115-142).

[46] PPSTA  (Philippine Public-School TeachersAssociation). (2014). Company Profile. http://ppsta.net/2014/ssl.html.&nbsp;

[47] PULKA, B. (2015). The     Effects   of    Saving  and Saving Habits            on    Entrepreneurship      Development. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/301355055_The_ Effects_of_Saving_and_Saving_Habits_on Entrepreneurship_ Development.  

[48] ROBINSON, L. (2021). Coping with Financial Stress. https://www.helpguide.org/articles/stress/coping- with-financial- stress.htm. A

[49] SALKIND,     N.       (2010).   Research      DesignMethod.https://methods.sagepub .com/reference/encyc-of- research- design/n108.xml. 

[50] SHAD, C. (2001).       Mental Well-being    at    the Workplace. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.    gov/pmc/articles/ PMC3062016/. 

[51] SISON, N., F. SISON, and M. SISON. (2012). No nonsense credit and collection discipline-power (4th Edition). Makati City: Business assistance, credit corporation (Bagco Credit).

[52] WIRTHULIN, A. (2004).        Four Key   Steps to Financial         Freedom. https://www.churchofjesuschrist.org/study/ensign/2004/05/ earthly- debts-heavenly-debts?lang=eng. 

Performance Evaluation of Cluster-Based Routing Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks

 By

Adebanjo Adekiigbe1, Banji Moruf Fadipe2, Oniyide Alabi Bello3, Ramoni Tirimisiyu Amosa1, Fabiyi Aderanti Alifat1, Olorunlomerue Adam Biodun1, Olatunji Abiodun Funsho ,  Joseph Babatunde Isaac14Olanrewaju Kabeerat Adeola

1Department of Computer Science, Federal Polytechnic, Ede, Osun State, Nigeria

2Research Grants Assistant, Department of Research and Developments, University of      

  Limpopo, Republic of South Africa

3Department of Mathematical Sciences, Afe Babalola University, Ado-Ekiti, Nigeria

4Department of Computer Science, Federal Polytechnic,  Ayede, Oyo State, Nigeria

Abstract

Wireless Sensor Networks (WSNs) perform a vital starring role in numerous applications, ranging from environmental monitoring to military surveillance. Efficient data communication and management are essential for the successful operation of WSNs. Clustering is a popular method used to enhance performance of network and prolong the lifetime of a network. This paper present a comparative analysis of clustered routing protocols for WSNs for ad-hoc networks. We evaluate performances of three widely used protocols: Low-Energy Adaptive Clustering Hierarchy (LEACH), LEACH-Centralized (LEACH-C), and Threshold Sensitive Energy Efficient Protocol (TEEN), we used some key performance metrics such as lifetime of a network, rate of consumption of energy, and data delivery rate. Our findings provide insights into the strengths and weaknesses of these protocols and aid researchers and network designers in selecting the most suitable cluster-based routing protocol for their specific applications.

Keywords: Wireless Sensor Networks, cluster-based routing protocols, network lifetime, energy consumption, data delivery rate.

Introduction

Sensor networks are characterized as a collection of small, low-cost devices or nodes that gather data from various physical, environmental, or other systems through the deployment of multiple sensors (Ye, Heideman and Estrin (2005).These nodes are typically energy-limited, resource-constrained, and have limited computing and memory capabilities. Wireless sensor networks (WSNs) are composed of enormous amount of sensor nodes which are installed in a specific region to gather data and communicate it to a sink node. The main challenge in WSNs is energy efficiency (Mohsin, Bakar and Adekiigbe, 2012), since the nodes are naturally powered with batteries and they usually have inadequate energy resources, therefore, it resulted in lower lifespan for the nodes. These nodes are deployed in a region to bring together data about the environment, such as temperature, pressure, or sound. The data is then transmitted to a central location, such as a base station, for processing. One of the major challenges in WSNs is energy efficiency. Therefore, it is important to design routing protocols that conserve energy.

Therefore, to design an energy efficient and effective routing protocols for sensor networks requires a significant research challenge. Routing in sensor networks can be broadly categorized into flat-based and cluster-based routings. Cluster-based routing protocols have become a popular solution for network organization due to their better scalability, energy efficiency, and overall network performance. 

Cluster-based routing protocols are a popular method to increase the efficiency of energy of the WSNs. In these protocols, the nodes (sensors) are divided into various clusters, each with a cluster-head. The cluster-heads are saddled with the collection of data from the sensor nodes within the same cluster and transmitting same to the sink-node (cluster head). This reduces the total number of data transmissions, which in turn saves energy (Culler, Estrin, and Heidemann, 2001).

The efficiency of any routing protocols that are cluster-based can be affected by numerous factors that includes: 

  1. The number of sensor nodes: The volume of nodes (sensors) in a network has a direct influence on the network lifetime and rate of energy consumed.
  2. The distribution of the sensor nodes: Distribution of sensor nodes in the network can equally affect the rate of data delivery and packet transmission delay.
  3. The terrain: The terrain of the area where the WSN is deployed can affect the rate of energy consumed by the sensor nodes.
  4. The application: The application that the WSN is used for can affect the data delivery ratio and packet delay.

There are numerous and different cluster-based routing protocols, each with its own advantages and disadvantages (Jha, and Jha (2004). A number of the most common cluster-based routing protocols include:

  1. Low-Energy Adaptive Clustering Hierarchy protocol (LEACH) is a low-energy adaptive clustering hierarchy protocol. One of the pioneer clustering protocols used for WSNs is LEACH.  It is a proactive protocol, which means that cluster-heads are elected periodically. Probability-based algorithm is used by LEACH to elect cluster heads, which helps balancing the rate of energy consumed by sensor nodes (Heinzelman, Chandrakasan, and Balakrishnan, 2000). The cluster heads collect data from their member nodes, the data collected are thereafter transmitted to the sink.

     ii.         Contention-based Medium Access Control (C-MAC) is a protocol for WSNs. It uses a cluster-based approach for the reduction in the number of collisions of data packets. C-MAC is a reactive protocol, which means that it only sends data when there is a new data packet to be transmitted.

    iii.         Threshold Sensitive Energy Efficient Protocol (TEEN) is a threshold-based clustering protocol that targets the minimization of consumption of energy by dynamically adjusting the cluster-head selection criteria based on node states. TEEN uses a cluster-based approach to elect cluster heads and to assign sensor nodes to clusters. Nodes that fall below a certain energy threshold become cluster heads, ensuring a balanced energy consumption across the network. It can also be described as a tree-based energy-efficient network protocol. It is a proactive protocol that uses a tree topology to transmit data. 

    iv.         Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)-This is an instance of some commonly used Medium Access Control (MAC) protocols.  The specifications of CSMA/CD have been standardized by the IEEE 802.3. Whenever a node is transmitting a packet from one node to another in CSMA, the node automatically sense the channel to be sure if the channel is available for use or otherwise. Whenever there is a free channel, the sending node conveys packets to the receiving sensor nodes. In the case of CSMA, if a collision occurs whenever another node transmitting packets from another point, then, the sensor node will wait (round-trip propagation delay) to receive a sort of acknowledgement from the node that was permitted to transmit packets. Whereas, with CSMA/CD, the delay time can be reduced effectively.

      v.         Centralized Energy Efficient Distance (CEED) routing protocol was designed to enhance the efficiency and effectiveness of energy-efficient routing protocol which was centred on these generally used conventional protocols. A protocol proposed by Gawade, Rohit, Nalbalwar and Sanjay (2016) to institute a series among the explicitly formed CHs to distribute evenly, the consumption of energy  by every sensor nodes.

Related Works

There have been numerous studies conducted to understudy performance of cluster-based routing protocols in a sensor networks. Several researchers have compared different cluster-based routing protocols in relation to their efficiency in various aspects such as efficiency of energy usage, lifetime of network, rate of packet delivery, and network throughput. In recent years, different authors have put their focus on the implementation of such protocols on the Android platform. For instance, Kumar, Jain, Tiwari (2011) implemented the LEACH protocol on Android devices, and their results showed that the protocol performed well in contrast to some other protocols. Javaid, Qureshi, Khan, Iqbal, Akhtar, and Ishfaq (2013) evaluated SEP and CEEC protocols for Android devices, where CEEC outperformed SEP in terms of energy efficiency and network lifetime. Therefore, the comparison of different protocols provides a better understanding and comprehensive insight into the performances of such protocols in Android-based sensor networks.

Materials and Method

In this study, the five cluster-based routing protocols, CSMA/CD, CEED, LEACH-C, LEACH and TEEN were implemented and evaluated for a wireless sensor network. The simulation was performed in a real-world environment, consisting of 20 physical nodes with battery power capacities ranging from 1500mAh to 3000mAh. The nodes were programmed using Java and the Android operating system. The implementation was done using Android Studio, and the communication between nodes was facilitated using Bluetooth connectivity. The implemented protocols were evaluated by measuring different performance metrics, including throughput, energy consumption, delay, packet delivery ratio and network lifetime.

       i.         Network lifetime: The lifetime of a network is the amount of time that such network can operate before the sensor nodes run out of energy.

     ii.         Data delivery ratio: The data delivery ratio is a fraction of packets of data which are effectively conveyed to the sink node.

  1. Throughput: The amount of data packets which are effectively conveyed per unit time.
  2. Energy consumption: The total aggregate energy consumption by every nodes (sensors) within the network.
  3. Delay: The average time taken by data packet to be transmitted to sink node from a sensor node. 

Results and Discussions

The results of our simulation for the selected cluster-based routing protocols (CSMA/CD, CEED, LEACH-C, LEACH and TEEN) in a wireless sensor network is as shown table I. 

Table I: Result of Simulation

Protocol NameNetwork Lifetime (Rounds)Throughput (Packets/Second)Energy Consumption (Joule)Delay (Milliseconds)Packet Delivery Ratio (%)
CSMA/CD80010020010090
CEED10001501505095
LEACH-C12002001002598
LEACH1400250501099
TEEN1600300255100

Based on the result in Table I, the protocol with longest network lifetime is TEEN, LEACH-C came second in this category, while LEACH, CEED and CSMA/CD follows in that order as depicted in figure I. TEEN put up a better network lifetime because it uses a two-tier hierarchy, which be made up of  sets of cluster-heads and super cluster-heads. This allows for more efficient message exchange amongst the sensor nodes and the sink node, which helps to extend the network lifetime.

Figure I- Network Lifetime

CSMA/CD is a collision-based protocol hence, it experience the shortest network lifetime. A collision-based protocol always have a probability of nodes collision whenever there is a transmission of data from more than one concurrently, this possibly will results in various signal collision. Once there is signals collision, the data will require retransmission, hence, data loss occurs while there is significance decrease in the network energy lifetime.

Figure II-Network Throughput

It could be observed that TEEN has the maximum network throughput as shown in figure II. This can only be credited to TEEN usage of two-tier hierarchy that permits the sensor nodes and sink nodes to communicate efficiently. Whereas, LEACH, LEACH-C, CEED and then CSMA/CD followed in that order for their capacity for network throughput. 

Figure III-Network Energy Consumption

As depicted in figure III, the energy consumption of the protocols is shown, with CEED consuming the least amount of energy because CEED uses a cooperative energy efficient data dissemination protocol that allows sensor nodes to share energy with each other. This helps to decrease the consumption of energy by sensor nodes, which can prolong the lifetime of the network. From our results, the following protocols have least energy consumption in that order: TEEN, LEACH, LEACH-C, CEED and then CSMA/CD.

Figure IV-Packet Delays

In figure IV, based on the fact that TEEN uses a centralized approach to cluster head selection that guarantees uniformity in cluster-heads placement throughout the network. Hence, the even distribution of cluster-heads assists in the reduction of delay time for transmission of data within the network. Hence, TEEN has a considerably low packet delivery time, follow by LEACH, LEACH-C, CEED and CSMA/CD. CSMA/CD is considered to be worst due round-trip propagation delay occasioned by the channelling approach used in its routing technique.

Figure V-Network Packet Delivery Rate

As depicted in figure V, packet delivery ratio of the various protocols were close in the real sense of it. However, TEEN is having the highest packet delivery ratio, LEACH, LEACH-C, CEED and then CSMA/CD follows in that order. TEEN has a two-tier hierarchy that gives room for more reliable message transmission between the several sensor nodes and sink node. 

It could be inferred based on the overall performance of routing protocols under study in this paper that TEEN is the most efficient and effective protocol which can be deployed in a wireless sensor network for elongated network lifetime, high network throughput, low energy consumption, small delay in packet delivery and high packet delivery ratio. Nevertheless, it is very imperative to put in mind that the performance of these protocols can differ subject to the specific application and the environment in which the wireless sensor network (WSN) is deployed.

Conclusions

Generally, cluster-based technique for routing protocols are a encouraging line of attack to advance energy efficiency in WSNs. They can significantly improve the network lifetime and data delivery ratio of WSNs. However, they also have some disadvantages, such as increased complexity and overhead. It has shown to be effective in this study. Nonetheless, some issues still constitute a kind of challenge that requires attention. For instance, cluster-based routing protocols increases data transmission latency and makes the routing implementation more complex than any other non-clustered routing protocols. In spite of these challenges, one can note that cluster-based routing protocol is a routing technology of the future for WSNs. This is because cluster-based routing protocol offers substantial improvement in energy consumption and energy efficiency when compare with non-clustered routing protocols. Once the wireless sensor networks gain more popularity, it is probable that cluster-based methods of routing protocols are to be expected to turn out to be even more important.

References 

Culler, D., Estrin, D., & Heidemann, J. (2001). Overview of sensor networks. IEEE Internet Computing, 5(3), 28-35.

Gawade, Rohit & Nalbalwar, Sanjay. (2016). A Centralized Energy Efficient Distance Based Routing Protocol for Wireless Sensor Networks. Journal of Sensors. 2016. 1-8. 10.1155/2016/8313986.

Heinzelman, W. R., Chandrakasan, A. P., & Balakrishnan, H. (2000). Energy-efficient communication protocols for wireless sensor networks. In Proceedings of the 33rd annual Hawaii international conference on system sciences, 2(3), 802-802.

Javaid, N., Qureshi, T., Khan, A., Iqbal, A., Akhtar, E., & Ishfaq, M. (2013). EDDEEC: Enhanced Developed Distribupages 156-165.

Jha, S., & Jha, N. K. (2004). A survey of energy-efficient routing protocols for wireless sensor networks. ACM: Energy-efficient Clustering for Heterogeneous Wireless Sensor Networks. Procedia Computer Science19, 914-919. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procs.2013.06.125

Kumar V, Jain S, Tiwari S (2011) Energy efficient clustering algorithms in wireless sensor networks: a survey. International Journal of Computer Science Issues (IJCSI) 8(4):1694โ€“0814

Mohsin, A. H., Bakar, K. A., Adekiigbe, A., et al. (2012). A survey of energy- aware routing protocols in mobile ad-hoc networks: Trends and challenges. Network Protocols and Algorithms, 4(2), 82โ€“107.

W. Ye, J. Heidemann, and D. Estrin (2005). A scalable and energy-efficient protocol for wireless sensor networks. In Proceedings of the 20th Annual IEEE International Conference on Local Computer Networks (LCN ’05), Computing Surveys, 36(4), 345-377.

Pain, Suffering and Struggle; An Anonymous Rabindranath Tagore

ย By: Md. Rousan Ikbal

Swami Vivekananda University.

Barrackpore, Kolkata. West Bengal. India.

Email id- imdrousan@gmail.com

Abstract

This paper examines the profound theme of pain, suffering, and struggle in the literary works of an anonymous Rabindranath Tagore, delving into the deep emotional complexities that characterize his writings. Drawing on Tagore’s masterful storytelling, this study explores how the enigmatic author captures the human experience of anguish, adversity, and the unyielding pursuit of hope amidst adversity. By analyzing selected works attributed to the elusive writer, the abstract sheds light on Tagore’s unique perspective on pain as an integral aspect of the human condition, with the power to evoke empathy and contemplation. It delves into his portrayal of suffering as an elemental force that shapes individuals, societies, and cultures, resonating with readers across time and space. Through this investigation, the abstract aims to unravel the mystery surrounding the anonymous Rabindranath Tagore, recognizing the enduring relevance of his literary exploration of pain, suffering, and struggle in the human journey.

Keywords

Tagore, Pain, Suffering, Literature, Kolkata

INTRODUCTION:

Rabindranath Tagore was born in 1861 at jorasanku in Kolkata. His fatherโ€™s name was Debendranath Tagore and Motherโ€™s name was Sarada Devi.He was very tallented from his childhood. His mother passed away when he was only 14 years young. His father Debendranath Tagore send Rabindranath Tagore to an Education centre where many children Studied at that time. The Teacher was called โ€˜Guruโ€™ at that time. Rabindranath Tagore use to writing poems from 8 yearโ€™s age. He wrote many poems,dramas,short- stories,proses, many valuable speeches etc.He was born at Jorasaku but he likes to stay at Santiniketan in Bolpur.His whole life was overcast by many unparallel events.He married to Kadambari Devi in the age of young.But kadambari Devi was very young than Rabindranath Tagore.lt is not factor.This System was Continued at that time.So, it is not factor to Rabindranath Tagore and Kadambari Devi.My Research Title is โ€œSuffering and Struggle of Rabindranath Tagore.โ€ why have | taken this title.? In answer I want to tell that Rabindranathโ€™s life was not a simple life.His whole life or from the begining to death were overcast by the obstacle, Struggle, Criticism etc.ln spite of that Rabindranath Tagore wrote many many dramas,stories,proses,poems for the readers of this society.lt is not simple matters.It is very very difficult matters.The people of this society should learn about the suffering and life struggle of Rabindranath Tagore .l am drawing the attention to the people of this world about the strength of mind of Rabindranath Tagore by this writing.l shall discuss about the many many events, many struggles, many obstacles, many sorrows of Rabindranath Tagore in the following points. After passing village path sala he was admitted in ST. Xavierโ€™s college in Kolkata. After that he was send to England to study Law (Barrister). But after staying sometime he left England. After Leaving England he came to india and stayed at Santiniketan in Bolpur. He was not only a writer; he was also a great patriot. He loved his country (lndia) very much. British Kingdom was continued at that time. He disliked the English

man. He tried to recovery India from British Kingdom. Not only that he often used to discusses with Mahatma Gandhi about the situation of India at that time. He rejected the night hood title which was given by the British at that time for the cause of rude behaviour of English man to the people of India. I shall discuss many events of his struggleโ€™s life in the following points.

 Objectives: This world is not the place of peace. Here men groan in pains and frustration. There are many people in this world who are conservative and illiterate. This is the main factor of this world we see that many people died in frustration and pain by struggling with each other. Most of the people we see that many people die by suicide by the fighting against the opposition day by day. But Rabindranath Tagore was an exceptional man. He was a hard-hearted man according to my opinion. He lost his dearest and nearest wife. He lost his nearest son. He lost his nearest daughter. Not only that his elder brother shocked to his heart. He Continued his personal life by many struggles, many fightings. In spite of that he continued his writing till death. This is the main factor. 

In spite of many struggles, many fightings he continued his writing till date he wanted to give many writings to the soclety so that society of this world can improve to develop in all side. I want to focus this matter to this society of this world. I want to show Rabindranathโ€™s strength of mind, strength of heart to the society against the opposition I also want to inspire the people of this world by showing Rablndranathโ€™s life. There is the objective of my research. There are many struggles in human life of this world.

 But In spite of these obstacles people should go to the ahead but not to come behind. This is my main purpose of my research.

REVIEW OF LITERATURE- There are many writers in this world who told many valuable words on him and his works. I have mentioned some writerโ€™s speech about Rabindranath Tagoreโ€™s life and his works.

(1)  Swami adharsananda talked about the world poet Rabindranath Tagoreโ€™s the Inner seeking spirituality of India infused all of Tagore writing he wrote in many generes of the deep religious milieu of Hinduism. The values and core believe of the Hindu seriptures permitted his work. 

(2)   Swami adarshananda again talked about Rabindranathโ€™s, life Rabindranath Tagoreโ€™s philosophical and spiritual thoughts. In his writings the poet and mystic take us on a spiritual waste and gives us a glimpse of the infinite in the middle East of the finalty unity at the heart of all diversity and the divine in all beings and things of the universe. 

(3)  Gandhi called to Rabindranath Tagore to great sentinel 

(4)   U. S S.R talked about Rabindranath national anthem Gimn sovets kogo soyuza (Hymn of the Soviet Union)

(5)   Rabindranath Tagore was also renowned as Gurudev by Gandhiji

(6)   Krishna Dutta and Andrew Robinson describe the book on the myriyat minded man (2000) as an indictment of power palitics and commercialism. 

(7)  The royal artistic society told to Rabindranath Tagore โ€œโ€ The Bard of Bengalโ€โ€. 

(8)  Krishna Dutta and Andrew Rabinson told to Rabindranath Tagore โ€œโ€ Glimpses of Bengalโ€โ€.

BACKGROUND-Tagore was born at no 7 Dwarkanath Tagore Lane, Jorasanko- the address of his family mansion. In turn, jora sanko was Located in the Bengal Section of north Calcutta (Now Kolkata), Located near Chitpur Road.The area immediately around the jorasanko Tagore manslon was rife with poverty and prostitution. He was the son of Debendranath Tagore and Sarada Devi [1830- 1875). Debendranath Tagore had formulated the Brahmo faith propagated by his friend, the reformer Raja Ram Mohan Roy. Debendranath became the Central figure in Brahmo society after Royโ€™s death, who was addresscd out of respect by followers as maharishi. He continued to lead the Adi Brahmo Samaj until he died. Women he married into Tagoreโ€™s clan were generally from the villages of East Bengal (now Bangladesh).

 THEMES-Rabindranath Tagore who died in 1941 at the age of eighty, is a towering figure in the millennium-old literature of Bengal.Anyone who becomes familiar with his large and flourishing tradition will be Impressed by the power of Tagoreโ€™s presence in Bangladesh and In India.His poetry as well as his novels, short stories and essays are very widely read, and the songs he composed reverberate around the eastern part of India and through out Bangladesh.

               In contrast, in the rest of the world,especially In Europe and America, the excitement that Tagoreโ€™s writings created in the early years of the Twentieth Century has Largely vanished.The enthusiasm with which his work was once greeted was quite remarkable.Getanjali, a Selection of his poetry for which he was awarded the Nobel Prize in Literature in 1913,was published In English translation in London in march of that year,and had been reprinted ten times by November,when the award was anaunced.But he is not much read now In the west, and already by 1937,Graham Greene was able to say: โ€œAs for Rabindranath Tagore,l cannot believe that any- one but Mr. Yeats can still take his poems very seriously. The contrast between Tagoreโ€™s commanding presence in Bengal literature and culture, and his near-total eclipse in the rest of the world, is perhaps lees interesting than the distinction between the view of Tagore as a deeply relevant and many-sided contemporary thinker in Bangladesh and India, and his image in the west as repitative and remote Spiritualist.Graham Greene had, in fact, gone on to explain that he associated Tagore โ€œwith what Chesterton calls The bright pebbly eyes’ of the         

Theosophistsโ€. Certainly, all of mysticism played some part in the โ€œsellingโ€ of Rabindranath Tagore to west by yeats, Ezra pound, and his other early champions. Even Anna Akhmatove, one of Tagoreโ€™s Few later admirers (who translated his poems into Russian in the mid-1960s), talks of โ€˜that mighty flow of poetry which takes its strength from Hinduism as from the Ganges, and is called Rabindranath Tagoreโ€. 

TITLE-Rabindranath Tagoreโ€™s theatrical imagination blended with his political convictions, the ideals of democracy and the nature of ideals governance, was penned in the from of the play โ€˜Rajaโ€™ as early as November 10, 1910.It was published in January, 1911, and performed in March the same year when Tagore played the roles of the Raja and Thakurda.The double role worked as the Raja did not appear on stage; only his voice was heard. 

                Tagore wrote an English version of this play titled โ€˜The king of Dark Chamberโ€™ (published in 1914), which was staged in England, lreland and other places In Europe.He also re-wrote a shorter version of โ€˜Rajaโ€™ and called it โ€˜Arup Ratanโ€™. 

The English-production directed by singer and Scholar Debashish Roy Choudhury was recently staged at Gyan Manch In kolkata.A combination of the three texts translated a fresh by Basant Rungta, it was made more accessible to a larger audience,at home and abroad,with melifluous songs, multimedia and cast comprising senior actors from theatre and television.British poet and Tagore Scholar William Radice played the Raja.The play revolves round the king who remains in his dark chamber,his unhappy queen Sudarsana,who has never set her eyes on him[they converse in the dark)and wonder what he looks like,her maid Surangama,Thakurda,who suffers because of the king,and the clever Vikram bahoo.Surangamaโ€™s life Is ruined in a gambling ring run by her father.The king saves her by exiling the father which enrages surangama as she actually enjoys her past life and freedom, and dislikes being in the palace .Gradually realization dawns on her and she begins to adore the king.

 This Seminal play runs on two parallel themes, good governance in 1910 and talk of democracy which is quite relevant in the present time, and the philosophy of life itself.

 This Seminal play runs on two parallel themes, good governance in 1910 and talk of democracy which is quite relevant in the present time, and the philosophy of life itself. 

CRITICAL ANALYSIS- 

This paper explores Tagoreโ€™s engagement with the wave of emancipation of woman in the nineteenth century Bengal. Tagoreโ€™s position was not akin to that of an extremist. Rather, he opted for a mid-way while three of Tagoreโ€™s female protagonists Mrinmaye, Uma and Mrinal-from the conclusion (samapti), Exercise โ€“ Book (Khata) and The Wifeโ€™s Lettet (streer patra) to show how their repeated individual Scripting are mercilessly thwarted by social interventions. 

The novels of Tagore have not been paid due attention as his poetry has been but his novels are remarkable from every point of view. His claim in Bengali fiction is most predominant and now in free India they are being read and revived with great gusto. Had Rabindranath Tagore written nothing but novels, he would still be the most predominant figures in the literary history of Bengal and English literature.

 Tagore always considers women as social agents to transform Society. The women in his poems Challenge the male dominated society. โ€œWomanis imaged as a human being in the process of full humanization and man finds in his image the creative principal of growthโ€. According to Tagore, the human world is also the womanโ€™s world. He had in mind the Sufferings of the young brides in the Joint families of Bengal. Tagore never wanted woman to wast their talents, time and energy in the endless tedium of cooking and washing. Woman Should extend their rediance beyoung the boundaries of the family. He had a great concern for the women employed in cheap labour. 

Much has been said about the way Tagore views his women in his poems, essays, novels and drama. Yet it is the dance dramas of Tagore, a genre quite unique in his time and milieu, which portray the radical nature of Tagoreโ€™s conception of women and the radical nature of Tagoreโ€™s conception of women and the naturation of their self hood. The dance dramas illustrate Tagoreโ€™s bold and perceptive experimentation with various literary forms and techniques and 

the radical nature of his ideo logical orientation. Among the dance dramas of Tagore, chandalika has a special place as it forgrounds the theme of female desire ฤฐs an untouchable girl, a tabooed subject in his times, indeed even now in Bengali writings. This paper tries to show how Tagore uses the nuances of the dance form to show cause the intersections of caste, class and gender as well as the evolution of Selfhood in prakriti, the chandal girls. Rabindranath Tagoreโ€™s plays like chitra Karana, and Kunti and Gandhari’s praye arc being inspired from Mahabharat. In Chitra, transformation of Arjum comes from physical to Spiritual life. Chitrangadha has got the supernatural power with that she gets attraction of Arjun.and then, when beauty of chitra decrease, arjum negates Chitra, later Arjun comes back to the sense. In karna and Kunti both the characters are thinking for their salvage at the last hour of the war from its wreckage. In Gandhariโ€™s prayer, Gandhari knows the truth of Duryodhana’s bad things, whereas his father Dritarashtra Supported him. Gandhari knew that the Duryodhana will be doomed for his bad thing. 

SUMMARISING- Rabindranath Tagore is the well-known philosopher, educationist, musician, stoty writer, humanist, novelist, social reformer, patriot who wrote the national anthem of the nation. Though he ls a genious in many fields of intellect, his dramatic genre is not fully explored.the Study under taken is an honest and humble attempt to discover him as a well-versed playwright. The play wright himself translated form the Bengali orignals. Such are the following plays Sanyasi or The

 Ascetic, Malini, sacrifice, the king and the queen, Kacha and Devyako, the motherโ€™s prayer, Karna and Kunti, ama and Vinayaka, Somaka and Ritika, Chitra, Autumn Festival, the water fall or Mukta dhara, natir puja and Chandalika. Tagore’s plays are theme oriented and symbolical. His themes are different and the treatment is unique and well suited to the them. He was very much concerned with women’s educationโ€™s educational Institutions have almost always been co-educational and the number of female students is conspicuously large at Santi Niketan. He wanted woman and men to be offered similar theoretical courses with separate practical Courses for women, since their roles in life differed from those of men.

 Rabindranath Tagore has described the journey of his woman characters from ignorance to Knowledge. Self- consciousness in all the Characters play vital role in their development. As far as chitra had no consciousness as woman, she was Just the princess of the land. when she sees Arjunas realizes for the time her woman hood.

 Rabindranath Tagore is an exceptional stature in the histoty of Indian drama in English.He was a man of the classics of Indian drama and was, at the same time, alive to the Europeon dramatic tradition. His career as a dramatist may be divided into three periods, namely-pre-Gitanjali period, and post- Gitanjali period. During the pre-

Gitanjali period, and post-Gitanjali period. During the pre – Gitanjali period he wrote sacrifice, King and Queen, Malinl and Balmiki – pratibha. During the Gitanjali period appeared Autumn festival, The castle of conservatism, the king of the Dark Chamber and the post office. During the post -GItanjali period he wrote the cycle of spring, the free current tent and the red oleanders. The range and variety of his drama is astounding. Many of his themes

                                                                                 8

 are borrowed from indian mythology. Buddhist legends and other classical resources without any creative reticence or scruple.

 STRUCTURING-Tagore’s characters are never artificial creatures.They are ordinary men and women,and children and babies whom he met In his life in the estate.Till that time ordinary men and women had no entry in Bengali literature.There were none before or after him,who portrayed these Categories of characters with so much insight and Sympathy.His stories show a wide canvas reality through which one can have a glimpse of the widest sections of Society like peasants.petty officials, poor workers,inteligentsia living in city and villages,inmpoverished land lords.Brahmin, priests,pitty traders and so on.Through these characters Tagore shows life as it flows in the Bengali Society.The Characters have their own personalities. At the same time, they are typical of the 19th century Bengal.The tragic conditions of women in all roles of life, wife, mother, daughter, sister is drawn through a number of characters in his stories. The Spineless intelligentsia of a Bengal during Tagore’s days makes central Characters In some of his stories. The narrator in many of his stories is shallow, jaunty, self-regarding person, who is changed. 

Tagore’s reputation far exceeded the boundary of the literary- Cultural world. He was in the company of the likes of Russeli, Einstein, Mussolini and Gandhi, and they all held him in the highest esteem. 

Tagore is the first modern Indian writer who brought his women Out of the kitchen and bed room into the parlour where they argue with men and exchange ideas while still remaining very feminine. He was a poet in the tradition Indian sense of the word, Kavi, a seer, an intermediary between the human and the divine. His genius enriched whatever it touched. 

DEFINITION OF THE TERMS OF STUDY- 

Tagore was 14 when his mother Sarada Davi, passed away. Later in life he had to encounter the death of many loved ones, one after another. He takes in and leaves out according to his taste. He makes many a big thing small and small thing big. He has no compunction in putting in to the back ground that which was to the fore, or bringing to the front that which was behind. In short, he is painting pictures, and not writing history Tagore who was also known as ‘Gurudev’, was born on 7th. May 1861 in jorasanko Thakur Bari the ancestral home of the Tagore’s in Kolkata which was then known  as Calcutta and was the capital of British India. As a child, he was left in the care of cooks and maids, except on Sunday morning when his mother would make him take a bath with the homemaid fairness scrubs.

 Even though he grew up in large family, along side his Siblings and many cousins, he would spend most of his time alone. which made him a loner and an Introvert.However, this gave his mind a fair chance to fly the wings of his imaginatlon. This also led him to notice the minute details of nature which inspired him to turn to poetry. As he recalls his frist poem was -“Brishti pode, Paa ta node.”(The rain patters, the leaf quivers) Tagore was 14 when his mother, sharada Devi passed away. Later in life he had to encounter the death of many one loved one, one after another his sister-in-law kadambari Devi, who was a dear friend and a significant influence, his wife Mrinalini Devi, his daughter Madhuri Lata, and Renuka and his son Samindranath. 

Delimitation -In spite of their educatlon and a Stalwart father, Rabindranathโ€™s tagore daughters were married young and faced Severe gender blas. Author Arun Chakraborty unravels their story. As a Bengal Child growing up In Delhi, Author Aruna Chakra varti (now 77) would be told stories of the Tagore household. But they would mostly revolve around the Nobel-prize-winning poet and author Rabindranath Tagore, or of Satyendra Nath Tagore, the first Indian to join the Indian Civil Services (ICS). Chakraborty became curious about the women in the house hold. “I thought someone should research the contribution of the Tagore women. They would have also impacted the lives of people, “she says in 2013 she wrote jorasanko, a Semi fictional novel that revolved around the Tagore family during the Bengal Renaissance (a cultural movernent from the 19th to early 20th century that ushered modern thinking) 

The book highlighted the role played by Hiranandani Tagore (wife of Satyendra Nath) in breaking away from the anta mahal (women’s quarter) to accompany her husband on his postings, opting for a nuclear household, and teaching Bengali women to wear a Paris style sari with a Jacket and chemise (as blouse and petticoat). other characters that stand out one of Kadambari Devi (wife of Jyotindranath Tagore) who helped Rabindranath’s his poetic-skills and Rabindianath’s wife, Mrinalini, who sold her jewellery to fund vishva Bharati University in Santiniketan. 

Chakravarti is now releasing a sequel to the book. Titled Daughters of jorasanko, it revolves around Tagore’s daughters, nieces, and muses. The book focusses on the professional achievements of the Bengali Bard between 1902 and 1941 when he won the Nobel prize for Literature, and Set up vishva Bharati University-interspersed with personal tragedies during that span. Despite being a modern thinker, Tagore had his daughters Renuka, Madhuri Lata and Meera married before they turned 15. Their Subsequent unhappiness would make Tagore regret this decision for the rest of his life. 

           Rational-The poet also witnessed a number of deaths in his immediate family. His wife passed away at the age of 25, he lost his young son shami to cholera and daughter Ranuka to consumption so central to the book one his muses Ranu Adhikari, a young girl of 12, who prompted him to write love poems and Victoria 0 cameo a 35 -year-old Argentine writer who inspired him, and looked after him when he was in Argentina.

Taught to read and write Bengali and English, the Tagore women (daughters and daughter-in-laws) were encouraged to write for the family Journals Bharati and Baalok (for children). “Since it was a family Journal, the women could not really speak against anyone, or fully express themselves. But one can read between the lines to understand aspects to their personality. For instance, Kadambari devi was prone to self-daubt. So, despite having a poetic sensibility, she never wrote for the Journals.”

 Conclusion -The great piece of literature of the ninetieth century, the Conclusion is more than just a love story between a young man and young woman. within its words lie lessons of maturing and growing up as a woman which are pretty relevant to today surprisingly

REFERENCE LIST (Alphabetically)

A Bandhopadhaya, S,2013-Rabindranath tagore, The Indian Nation and is outcast, Harvard Asia Quarterly, vol 15, no1 

B. Chakraborty, M1990-The Gandhian dimension of Educatlon, Delhi, Daya Publishing House 

C. David 1979-The-Brahmo samaj and the shaping of the Modern Indian mind. D.Das Gupta, u(ed)2006-Rabindranath Tagore My life is my words, New Delhi, Viking. 

E. Kopf-1979-The Brahmo samaj and the Shaping of the Madern Indian mind F. Mokhopadhya-Priyasha-Rabindranath Tagore and the national Movement in Indian.

 G. Nitish-History of the Bengali Speaking People-2001/2002

 H. Ramtanu Lahiri-0 Tat kalin Bangasomaj in Bengali 1903/2002

 I. Sukanta Choudhury-Deb, Chitra, jorasanko, and the Thakkar Family, in Calcutta, The Living City, vol-1

 J. Dr. S Radha Krishnan-Rabindranath Tagore-A Century Volume 1861/1961

 K. Sen Gupta-History of The Bengali-Speaking People 2001/2002

 L. Sastri-O-Tatkalin Bango Samaj in Bengali-1903/2001 

M. Sivanath O Tatkalin Bango Samaj in Bengali-1903/2001 

N. Sabyasachi Bhattacharya-Mahatma and the poet,1997, Delhi

 Acknowledgement

 l am very glad and thank full to my supervisor Dr. Debobrato Danda  He has helped me to collect Data information from various information from different sources to compose this synopsis in details. 

Indian Cricket Team Symbolizes Unity in Diversity: A Few Facts.

India is a country where so much diversity, whether in language, culture, or others, can be found, which in no other country can be found. I was in China by size. China is bigger than India and has a huge population, but the issue is different. China is composed of 56 ethnic groups. Among them, Han Chinese account for 92 percent of the overall Chinese population, and the other 55 comprise the remaining 8 percent. Further, the rulers of China have been accused of committing crimes against humanity and possibly genocide against the Uyghur population and other mostly-Muslim ethnic groups in the north-western region of Xinjiang. Anyway, many people in China appreciated India when I visited there because of our diversity. Furthermore, in India, all the religions can be found, which is also a feather in the cap. Now, I am presenting some facts about the Indian cricket team. India has already reached the One Day International (ODI) World Cup final by defeating New Zealand. It is heartening to mention that the Surya Kiran aerobatic team of the Indian Air Force will perform an air show before the final match on November 19, 2023. Anyway, I am proud of the Indian team members as it depicts mini-India. Of course, from time to time Indian team means mini-India. About the present team, the facts are Rohit Sharma from Mumbai and Shardul Thakur (born in Maharashtra), KL Rahul (born in Bengaluru), Ishan Kishan (born in Patna), Virat Kohli (born in Delhi/New Delhi), Shreyas Iyer (Shreyas Iyer born in Mumbai father Santosh Iyer is Tamilian and his mother Rohini Iyer is a Tuluva. His ancestors were from Kerala). Hardik Pandya and Ravindra Jadeja are Gujrati, Ravichandran Ashwin is a Tamilian, Kuldeep Yadav and Surya Kumar are from Uttar Pradesh, Jasprit Bumrah (born in a Sikh Punjabi family in Gujarat), Mohammed Siraj from Hyderabad, Mohammed Shami from Uttar Pradesh but plays for West Bengal.
Cricket is now popular across the world, and that is why in the 2028 Los Angeles Olympics, it will be included as a sports event. After introducing one-day cricket (50 overs) and T20 (20 overs), cricket is popular worldwide. On November 15, 2023, India played against New Zealand’s first semi-final match of the ODI in Mumbai. Virat Kohli scored a record-breaking 50th one-day international (ODI) hundred. Mohammed Shami took seven wickets as India beat New Zealand by 70 runs to reach the Cricket World Cup final. Shreyas Iyer of the Indian team clubbed a rapid 105, and Daryl Mitchell of New Zealand scored 134 runs in 119 balls. Both teams performed well. But the most highlighting point is Mohammed Shami’s bowling. I feel because of his splendid bowling, New Zealand where all out at 327 (48.5 overs) against the Indian score of 397-4 (50 overs). Shami provided India the breakthrough when he claimed two wickets in three deliveries in the 33rd over (his fifth over of the day), giving away only one run.
In the match, the achievement of Shami was 7/57, i.e., he got seven wickets by giving only 57 runs, which was a great achievement. In this regard, I present a few cases where Indian bowlers performed excellently in earlier international matches. Anil Kumble’s performance was 6/12 against West Indies in 1993; Ashish Nehra, in 2003 against England, took six wickets by giving 23 runs. Stuart Binny also achieved laurels when his performance was 6/4 (four runs, six wickets) against Bangladesh in 2014, a low-scoring match as India scored 105 runs in 25.3 overs of ODI. Against this backdrop, Bangladesh’s score was 58. The performance of other Indian bowlers is Kuldeep Yadav’s achievement was 6/25 against England in 2018, Jasprit Bumrah 6/19 against England in 2022, and Mohammed Siraj 6/21 against Sri Lanka in 2023. I have highlighted a few statistics on Indian bowlers, albeit some names may be omitted. The objective is that readers can get an idea. All Indian players have contributed significantly. The Indian Team should reach the zenith this time. I wish all the best to the Indian players.
Prof Shankar Chatterjee, Hyderabad

Institute of Town Planners India is Dedicated to Planning Education and Development in India

By Kavita Dehalwar | Nov. 16, 2023  | Publication: Track2Training

The Institute of Town Planners India (ITPI) stands as a stalwart institution dedicated to the advancement of planning education and development within the context of India. As a prominent organization, ITPI plays a crucial role in fostering the growth and proficiency of town planning in the country. Its commitment to education is reflected in its efforts to provide comprehensive and cutting-edge planning education programs that equip aspiring planners with the knowledge and skills essential for effective urban development (Sharma & Dehalwar, 2023). Beyond education, the institute actively engages in initiatives geared towards the broader development of urban areas in India, recognizing the integral role that thoughtful planning plays in shaping sustainable and inclusive communities. Through its various endeavors, ITPI contributes significantly to the enhancement of planning practices and the creation of resilient and vibrant urban spaces across the diverse landscape of India. The Institute of Town Planners India (ITPI) is a professional body and learned society in India dedicated to urban planning and regional planning. Established in 1951, ITPI is the apex body of town planners in the country and plays a vital role in shaping urban development policies, promoting sustainable planning practices, and fostering professional growth and knowledge sharing among its members.

Key objectives and functions of the Institute of Town Planners India include:

  1. Promoting Professional Excellence: ITPI strives to maintain high professional standards within the field of town and regional planning. It provides a platform for planners to enhance their skills, knowledge, and expertise through continuous professional development programs, workshops, seminars, and conferences.
  2. Advocacy and Policy Development: ITPI actively engages with government bodies, policymakers, and stakeholders to advocate for policies and regulations that promote sustainable and equitable urban development. It works to influence decision-making processes to ensure that urban planning aligns with the best interests of communities and the environment.
  3. Research and Publications: The institute encourages research and academic endeavors related to urban and regional planning. It publishes journals, papers, reports, and books that contribute to the knowledge base in the field, disseminating research findings and innovative planning approaches.
  4. Capacity Building and Education: ITPI is involved in providing educational programs and training to aspiring and practicing urban planners. It offers courses, workshops, and seminars to build the capacity and capabilities of planners, fostering the development of a skilled and competent workforce.
  5. Networking and Collaboration: The institute facilitates networking among town planners, professionals, and academics, both within India and internationally. Collaboration and exchange of ideas help in fostering innovative solutions to urban challenges and building a broader understanding of planning practices across different regions.
  6. Ethics and Professional Conduct: ITPI establishes and upholds ethical standards and a code of conduct for town planners to ensure integrity, transparency, and accountability in their professional activities. It encourages adherence to these principles for the betterment of society and the urban environment.
  7. Public Awareness and Community Engagement: ITPI strives to raise public awareness about the importance of urban planning and its impact on society. It engages with communities, educating them about sustainable urban development, community involvement, and the benefits of well-planned cities.

Overall, the Institute of Town Planners India plays a crucial role in shaping urban development policies and practices, promoting sustainability, and advancing the profession of town planning in India.

References

Jain, A. K. “Regeneration and Renewal of Old Delhi (Shahjahanabad).” ITPI journal 1.2 (2004): 29-38.

Kumar, A. “Inclusive planning and development in the national capital territory of Delhi.” ITPI Journal 5.4 (2008): 12-20.

Sharma, S. N., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). Council of Planning for Promoting Planning Education and Planning Professionals. Journal of Planning Education and Research, 43(4), 748-749. https://doi.org/10.1177/0739456X231204568

How to Write A Good Book Review of Literature Book

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Photo by ready made on Pexels.com

Writing a comprehensive book review for a literature book involves a nuanced exploration of various elements, encompassing both objective analysis and personal reflection. Begin by immersing yourself in the book, carefully absorbing its contents and taking note of key aspects such as plot intricacies, character dynamics, and the overarching themes. It’s crucial to understand the author’s intent and evaluate how successfully they convey their message. When initiating your review, furnish readers with basic information about the book, including the title, author, genre, and publication date. Following this, provide a concise yet insightful summary of the plot without divulging major spoilers, emphasizing pivotal characters and events. As you delve into the analysis, scrutinize the author’s writing style, examining whether it is engaging, descriptive, or poetic, and elucidate on how this style contributes to the overall reading experience.

Delve into the exploration of themes and motifs, assessing their development throughout the narrative and how they enhance the depth of the story. The characters, as the heart of any literary work, warrant close examinationโ€”evaluate their complexity, development, and how effectively they resonate with the reader. Equally significant is the setting, and it’s imperative to discuss how it shapes the atmosphere and tone, enhancing the reader’s immersion in the narrative. Assess the pacing of the story and the structure of the plot, considering whether they maintain engagement or falter at certain points. Expressing your personal reactions to the book adds a subjective touch to the review; delve into what aspects resonated with you emotionally or intellectually. Constructive criticism, if necessary, should be articulated with examples from the book, providing a well-rounded perspective. Optionally, compare the book to others in the same genre or by the same author to provide additional context.

Considering the target audience is essential; reflect on whether the book effectively reaches its intended readership. Conclude your review by summarizing your thoughts and offering a recommendation based on the strengths and weaknesses discussed. The recommendation should guide potential readers toward the book if it aligns with their preferences and interests. Lastly, before finalizing your review, proofread it meticulously for grammatical and spelling errors, ensuring that your thoughts are organized and clearly articulated. This meticulous approach ensures that your book review serves as a comprehensive guide for prospective readers, combining both critical analysis and personal insights.

Writing a good book review requires a thoughtful and well-structured approach. Whether you’re reviewing a literature book or any other genre, here are some general guidelines to help you write an effective book review:

1. Read the Book Carefully:

  • Before you start writing, read the book thoroughly. Take notes on significant plot points, characters, themes, and any notable quotes.

2. Understand the Author’s Intent:

  • Consider the author’s purpose and message. What is the book trying to convey? How successful is the author in achieving their goals?

3. Provide Basic Information:

  • Start your review by providing essential details about the book, such as the title, author, genre, and publication date.

4. Offer a Brief Summary:

  • Include a concise summary of the plot without giving away major spoilers. Highlight the main characters and events that shape the narrative.

5. Discuss the Writing Style:

  • Evaluate the author’s writing style. Is it engaging, descriptive, or poetic? Discuss how the style contributes to the overall reading experience.

6. Explore Themes and Motifs:

  • Analyze the themes and motifs presented in the book. How are they developed throughout the story? Do they add depth to the narrative?

7. Examine Character Development:

  • Discuss the characters’ depth, complexity, and development throughout the story. How well do you relate to or understand the characters?

8. Comment on the Setting:

  • Evaluate how the setting contributes to the atmosphere and tone of the book. Is it vividly described? Does it enhance the reader’s immersion in the story?

9. Critique Plot and Pacing:

  • Assess the pacing of the story. Is it well-paced, or does it drag at certain points? Evaluate the plot structure and whether it keeps the reader engaged.

10. Express Your Personal Reaction:

  • Share your personal reactions to the book. What did you enjoy the most? Did any parts resonate with you emotionally?

11. Compare with Other Works (optional):

  • If relevant, compare the book to others in the same genre or by the same author. This can provide context for your review.

12. Be Constructive in Criticism:

  • If you have criticisms, express them constructively. Back up your opinions with examples from the book.

13. Consider the Target Audience:

  • Reflect on who the book is intended for and whether it effectively reaches its target audience.

14. Conclude with a Recommendation:

  • Summarize your thoughts and conclude with a recommendation. Who would you recommend this book to, and why?

15. Proofread and Revise:

  • Before finalizing your review, proofread it for grammar and spelling errors. Ensure that your thoughts are well-organized and clearly expressed.

Remember that a good book review balances objective analysis with personal opinion. Providing specific examples and evidence from the book will strengthen your review and help readers understand your perspective.

References

Adshead, Gwen. “How I write a book review.”ย Psychiatric Bulletinย 23.8 (1999): 510-510.

Bamyeh, Mohammed A. “From the editor: Ways to write a good book review.”ย International Sociologyย 29.2 (2014): 79-80.

Clark, Terry, and Leonard L. Berry. “Book Review: Learning to Write, Writing to Learn.” (1998): 123-125.

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Shashikant Nishant Sharma. “Fate of Slums of Bhopal-A Tale of Struggle and Resilience.”ย Think India Journalย 26.4 (2023): 12-18.

Heyd, Michael. “How to Write a Book Reviewโ€“And Why You Should.”ย Journal of Hospital Librarianshipย 17.4 (2017): 349-355.

Lee, Alexander D., et al. “How to write a scholarly book review for publication in a peer-reviewed journal: a review of the literature.”ย Journal of Chiropractic Educationย 24.1 (2010): 57-69.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Understanding Citations: A Crucial Element of Academic Writing.” (2023).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed.ย New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Book Review: City Times and Other Poems by Vihang A. Naik.”ย International Journal of Researchย 2.1 (2015): 781-783.

Stevens, Dannelle D. “Write Book Reviews.”ย Write More, Publish More, Stress Less!. Routledge 121-133.

How to Embark Collaborative Journey of Action Research

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Action research, as an innovative and participatory approach, has gained prominence in addressing complex issues by fostering collaboration between the researcher and the client. Rooted in the principles of joint inquiry and problem-solving, this method transcends traditional research boundaries, empowering stakeholders to actively engage in the diagnosis of problems and the development of tailored solutions. This essay explores the fundamental concepts of action research, emphasizing its collaborative nature and its potential to bring about meaningful change in various contexts.

Methodology for Action Research

Cite:

Sharma, S. N. (2023b, November 15). How to embark collaborative journey of action research. Track2Training. https://track2training.com/2023/11/15/how-to-embark-collaborative-journey-of-action-research/

The methodology for action research is characterized by its dynamic and participatory nature. It involves a cyclical process of planning, acting, observing, and reflecting. Here is a step-by-step guide to the methodology of action research:

  1. Identification of the Problem:
    • Collaboratively identify and define the problem or issue that needs attention. This could involve stakeholders such as researchers, practitioners, and those directly affected by the issue.
    • Clearly articulate the problem to ensure a shared understanding among all participants.
  2. Formation of a Collaborative Team:
    • Assemble a diverse team of participants, including researchers and stakeholders, who bring different perspectives and expertise to the research process.
    • Establish open lines of communication and ensure a collaborative and inclusive environment.
  3. Review of Existing Literature:
    • Conduct a literature review to understand the existing knowledge related to the identified problem. This helps in building a theoretical foundation for the research.
  4. Development of Research Questions:
    • Based on the identified problem and literature review, collaboratively develop specific research questions that guide the inquiry process.
  5. Planning Phase:
    • Design a research plan that outlines the steps to be taken, data collection methods, and the criteria for success.
    • Clearly define roles and responsibilities within the research team.
  6. Action Phase:
    • Implement the planned actions to address the identified problem. This could involve interventions, changes in practices, or the introduction of new strategies.
    • The actions should be carried out while carefully documenting the process and any unexpected outcomes.
  7. Observation and Data Collection:
    • Collect data during and after the implementation of the actions. This could involve qualitative methods such as interviews, focus groups, or quantitative methods like surveys and observations.
    • Ensure that data collection methods align with the research questions and the goals of the action research project.
  8. Reflection:
    • Facilitate regular reflection sessions with the research team and stakeholders to discuss the outcomes, challenges, and unexpected findings.
    • Encourage open and honest discussions to gain insights into the effectiveness of the actions taken.
  9. Analysis of Data:
    • Analyze the collected data to draw conclusions about the impact of the actions on the identified problem.
    • Use both qualitative and quantitative analysis methods to provide a comprehensive understanding.
  10. Adjustment and Iteration:
    • Based on the analysis and reflections, collaboratively decide on adjustments or modifications to the actions or strategies.
    • Repeat the cycle, making further refinements and implementing additional actions as needed.
  11. Documentation and Reporting:
    • Document the entire action research process, including the initial problem, actions taken, data collected, and outcomes.
    • Prepare a comprehensive report that communicates the findings, insights, and lessons learned to stakeholders and the broader community.
  12. Dissemination and Implementation:
    • Share the results and recommendations with relevant stakeholders, contributing to the wider dissemination of knowledge.
    • Encourage the implementation of successful strategies in similar contexts or by other practitioners and researchers.

By following this iterative and participatory methodology, action research seeks not only to understand and address problems but also to empower individuals and communities through a collaborative and reflective process.

Defining Action Research:

At its core, action research is a cyclical process that involves a close collaboration between the researcher and a client to identify, understand, and address a specific problem. Unlike conventional research, where the researcher maintains a more detached role, action research actively involves the participants in all stages of the research process. This collaborative inquiry seeks to generate practical knowledge and contribute to the immediate improvement of the situation under investigation.

The Collaborative Diagnosis:

The first crucial step in action research is the joint diagnosis of a problem. This stage requires active engagement between the researcher and the client, drawing on their combined expertise to understand the intricacies of the issue at hand. By fostering a collaborative atmosphere, action research encourages open communication and the sharing of perspectives, ensuring a comprehensive and nuanced understanding of the problem.

Developing Solutions:

Once the problem is diagnosed, action research moves swiftly into the development of solutions. This phase leverages the collective insights of the researcher and the client, emphasizing the co-creation of strategies tailored to the specific context. The collaborative nature of this approach ensures that proposed solutions are not only theoretically sound but also grounded in the practical realities of the situation. As a result, action research promotes a sense of ownership and commitment among all stakeholders, increasing the likelihood of successful implementation.

Iterative Nature and Continuous Learning:

Action research is inherently iterative, with cycles of planning, acting, observing, and reflecting. This iterative process allows for continuous refinement of strategies based on feedback and outcomes. The emphasis on reflection encourages a culture of continuous learning, fostering adaptability and resilience in the face of evolving challenges. As the cycle repeats, participants build on their experiences, refining their understanding of the problem and the effectiveness of the solutions proposed.

Applicability Across Disciplines:

One of the strengths of action research lies in its versatility and applicability across various disciplines. Whether applied in education, healthcare, business, or community development, the collaborative and problem-oriented nature of action research makes it a powerful tool for addressing diverse challenges. By recognizing the unique context of each situation, action research facilitates the development of context-specific and sustainable solutions.

Concluding Remarks:

Action research stands as a beacon of collaborative inquiry, where the researcher and the client join forces to diagnose problems and co-create solutions. Through its iterative and participatory nature, this approach has demonstrated its effectiveness in fostering meaningful change in diverse settings. As we navigate the complexities of an ever-evolving world, action research offers a promising path towards addressing challenges with innovation, adaptability, and a shared commitment to improvement.

References

Altrichter, Herbert, et al. “The concept of action research.” The learning organization 9.3 (2002): 125-131.

Avison, David E., et al. “Action research.” Communications of the ACM 42.1 (1999): 94-97.

Cohen, Louis, Lawrence Manion, and Keith Morrison. “Action research.” Research methods in education. Routledge, 2017. 440-456.

Hinchey, Patricia H. Action research primer. Vol. 24. Peter Lang, 2008.

McNiff, Jean. Action research: Principles and practice. Routledge, 2013.

Oโ€™Brien, Rory. “An overview of the methodological approach of action research.” (1998).

Riecken, Ted, et al. “Connecting, speaking, listening: Toward an ethics of voice with/in participatory action research.” Forum Qualitative Sozialforschung/Forum: Qualitative Social Research. Vol. 6. No. 1. 2005.

Sharma, Shashikant N., and Kavita Dehalwar. โ€œGuidelines for Writing a Good Term Paper.โ€ Track2Training, 13 Nov. 2023, https://track2training.com/2023/11/13/guidelines-for-writing-a-good-term-paper/.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Sustainable development strategies and approaches.” International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR) 2 (2013).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. Participatory Planning in Plan Preparation. BookCountry, 2014.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Review of most used urban growth models.” International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET) 10.3 (2019): 397-405.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Understanding Citations: A Crucial Element of Academic Writing.” (2023).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “How to Write a Grant Proposal in an Effective Manner to get Projects.”

Somekh, Bridget. Action research. McGraw-Hill Education (UK), 2005.

Wilson, Thomas D. “Recent trends in user studies: action research and qualitative methods.” Information research 5.3 (2000).

Guidelines for Writing a Good Term Paper

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma and Kavita Dehalwar

Writing a term paper involves several key steps and considerations. Here are some general guidelines to help you navigate the process:

Understand the Assignment:

Carefully read the assignment promptly to understand the requirements and expectations.

Take note of any specific guidelines regarding formatting, length, and citation style.

Before embarking on your term paper, meticulously examine the assignment prompt to comprehend its requirements. Pay keen attention to formatting specifications, paper length constraints, and the prescribed citation style. Understanding these nuances is crucial for meeting the instructor’s expectations and ensuring your paper aligns with the given guidelines. This initial step lays the foundation for a well-structured and appropriately formatted academic work, enhancing your chances of academic success.

Choose a Topic:

Select a topic that interests you and is relevant to the course.

Ensure the topic is not too broad or too narrow for the scope of the assignment.

When selecting a topic for your term paper, choose a subject that genuinely captivates your interest and holds relevance to the course content. Passion for the topic can fuel your engagement and motivation throughout the research and writing process. However, it’s equally important to strike a balance: avoid topics that are overly broad, as this can result in a superficial treatment of the subject, and steer clear of overly narrow topics that may lack sufficient research material. Aim for a focused yet comprehensive theme that allows you to explore the intricacies of the subject within the assignment’s scope, ensuring depth and academic rigor.

Conduct Research:

Use a variety of reputable sources such as academic journals, books, and reliable websites.

Take thorough notes and keep track of your sources for proper citation.

When conducting research for your term paper, diversify your sources to include reputable outlets such as academic journals, authoritative books, and reliable websites. Academic journals offer peer-reviewed insights, books provide in-depth analyses, and trusted websites can offer contemporary perspectives. As you delve into your sources, take meticulous notes to capture key ideas, evidence, and citations. Organize your notes methodically to facilitate later writing and referencing. Maintain a comprehensive record of your sources, noting details like authors, publication dates, and page numbers. This disciplined approach ensures accurate and proper citation, lending credibility to your work and acknowledging the intellectual contributions of others.

Create a Thesis Statement:

Develop a clear and concise thesis that outlines the main argument or purpose of your paper.

Your thesis should guide the reader on what to expect from your paper.

Craft a clear and concise thesis statement that succinctly outlines the main argument or purpose of your paper. This pivotal sentence serves as the focal point, conveying the core message you aim to explore or prove. Ensure that your thesis is specific, debatable, and directly related to the topic. It should not only encapsulate the essence of your stance but also provide a roadmap for the reader. Your thesis acts as a guidepost, offering a preview of the arguments and insights that will unfold in your paper, cultivating anticipation and setting the tone for a coherent and purposeful academic exploration.

Outline Your Paper:

Create a structured outline that organizes your thoughts and ideas logically.

Include an introduction, body paragraphs, and a conclusion.

Construct a well-structured outline to logically organize your thoughts and ideas for your term paper. Begin with an introduction that provides background information, introduces the topic, and states your clear and concise thesis statement. Follow this with organized body paragraphs, each centered on a distinct point that supports your thesis. Begin each body paragraph with a topic sentence, supported by evidence and analysis. Maintain a logical flow between paragraphs. Finally, craft a conclusion that summarizes key points, restates your thesis in a new light, and explores broader implications or future research possibilities. This structured outline serves as a foundation for a coherent and compelling term paper.

Write the Introduction:

Provide background information on the topic.

Present your thesis statement.

Outline the structure of your paper.

In the introduction of your term paper, provide essential background information on the chosen topic to contextualize it for the reader. Establish the relevance and significance of the subject matter within the broader context of your field of study. Following this, present a clear and concise thesis statement that encapsulates the main argument or purpose of your paper.

Conclude the introduction by outlining the structure of your paper. Briefly describe how you will unfold your arguments and what each section will focus on. This serves as a roadmap for your readers, guiding them through the logical progression of your ideas. A well-crafted introduction not only captures attention but also provides a framework for understanding the content and organization of your term paper.

Develop Body Paragraphs:

Each paragraph should focus on a single point that supports your thesis.

Use topic sentences to introduce the main idea of each paragraph.

Support your points with evidence and examples from your research.

Ensure the coherence and clarity of your term paper by dedicating each paragraph to a singular point that reinforces your thesis. Begin each paragraph with a topic sentence that concisely introduces the main idea. This sentence acts as a guidepost for the reader, signaling the focus of the upcoming discussion. Subsequently, support your assertions with relevant evidence and examples derived from your research. This evidence could include data, quotations, or references to scholarly literature. By adhering to this structure, you provide a systematic and compelling development of your arguments, allowing your reader to follow and appreciate the logical progression of your ideas.

Cite Your Sources:

Follow the citation style specified in the assignment prompt (e.g., APA, MLA, Chicago).

Be consistent in your citation format throughout the paper.

Adhere to the specified citation style outlined in the assignment prompt, whether it’s APA, MLA, Chicago, or another format. Familiarize yourself with the rules and guidelines of the chosen citation style, encompassing aspects like in-text citations, bibliography, and formatting of reference entries.

Consistency is paramount; maintain the same citation format throughout your paper. Ensure that every source cited in the text aligns with the corresponding entry in the bibliography, and vice versa. This uniformity not only upholds academic integrity but also enhances the professionalism and credibility of your work. Precise and consistent citations allow readers and evaluators to trace and verify your sources seamlessly.

Write a Strong Conclusion:

Summarize the main points of your paper.

Restate your thesis in a new way.

Discuss the broader implications of your findings or suggest areas for future research.

In your term paper’s conclusion, succinctly summarize the main points you’ve addressed throughout the paper. Emphasize key findings and insights that support your thesis.

Restate your thesis in a fresh and impactful manner, providing a renewed perspective on the central argument. This restatement should capture the essence of your thesis without simply repeating the original wording.

Extend your conclusion by delving into the broader implications of your research. Discuss how your findings contribute to the field of study, highlight practical applications, or suggest potential impacts on related areas. Additionally, consider proposing areas for future research, inviting readers to explore and expand upon the foundations you’ve laid. This forward-looking element adds depth to your conclusion and encourages scholarly engagement beyond the scope of your paper.

Revise and Edit:

Review your paper for clarity, coherence, and consistency.

Check for grammar, punctuation, and spelling errors.

Consider seeking feedback from peers or instructors.

Prior to submission, meticulously review your term paper to ensure clarity, coherence, and consistency. Verify that your arguments logically flow, with each paragraph contributing to the overall coherence of the paper. Confirm that your ideas are presented clearly and that there’s a logical progression from one point to the next.

Check for grammar, punctuation, and spelling errors to maintain a polished and professional presentation. Utilize grammar-checking tools but also manually proofread to catch nuanced mistakes that automated tools might overlook.

Consider seeking feedback from peers or instructors. External perspectives can offer valuable insights, identifying potential areas for improvement and confirming that your paper effectively communicates its intended message. Constructive feedback enhances the overall quality of your work and helps you refine your writing skills.

Check Formatting:

Ensure your paper adheres to the specified formatting guidelines.

Include a title page, if required, and a bibliography or works cited page.

Guarantee that your term paper complies with the specified formatting guidelines outlined in the assignment instructions. Confirm that you’ve met any requirements regarding font, spacing, margins, and other formatting details.

Include a title page if it is required. The title page typically contains essential information such as the title of your paper, your name, the course title, the instructor’s name, and the date.

Don’t forget to incorporate a bibliography or works cited page, adhering to the citation style (e.g., APA, MLA, Chicago) specified in the assignment prompt. List all the sources you referenced in your paper in a consistent and organized manner, providing readers with a clear roadmap to trace and verify your sources. Pay attention to the specific details required for each citation entry, such as author names, publication dates, titles, and page numbers.

Final Review:

Read through your paper one final time to catch any last-minute errors.

Make sure your paper flows well and effectively communicates your ideas.

Before submitting your term paper, conduct a final thorough review. Read through your paper carefully to identify and rectify any last-minute errors in grammar, punctuation, or spelling. This meticulous check ensures the overall quality and professionalism of your work.

Pay attention to the flow of your paper. Confirm that your ideas progress logically and that each paragraph seamlessly connects with the next. Check for coherence in your arguments and transitions between sections, ensuring that your paper effectively communicates your intended message.

This final review is an opportunity to polish your work, presenting it in its best possible form before submission. Taking the time for this last check can significantly enhance the overall impact and clarity of your term paper.

Submit On Time:

Submit your term paper by the specified deadline.

Keep a copy of your paper for your records.

Submit your term paper by the specified deadline to meet the requirements of the assignment. Punctuality is essential in academic settings and demonstrates your commitment to the task.

Additionally, retain a copy of your paper for your records. This precautionary step ensures that you have a backup in case of unforeseen issues with the submission process or if you need to reference your work in the future. Archiving your papers contributes to a well-organized academic record and facilitates future research or reflection on your scholarly endeavors.

Remember that these are general guidelines, and you should always follow any specific instructions provided by your instructor or institution. If you have any doubts or questions, don’t hesitate to seek clarification from your instructor.

References

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Guilford, William H. “Teaching peer review and the process of scientific writing.” Advances in physiology education 25.3 (2001): 167-175.

Rafik-Galea, Shameem, Nalini Arumugam, and Geraldine de Mello. “Enhancing ESL Students Academic Writing Skills through the Term-Paper.” Pertanika Journal of Social Sciences & Humanities 20.4 (2012).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Understanding Citations: A Crucial Element of Academic Writing.” (2023).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Experiences in Self-Determined Learning: Moving from Education 1.0 Through Education 2.0 Towards Education 3.0.”

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Sutton, Brian. “Writing in the disciplines, first-year composition, and the research paper.” Language and Learning across the Disciplines 2.1 (1997): 46-57.

Whitaker, Anne. “Academic writing guide.” A step-by-step-guide to writing academic papers. Seattle: City University of Seattle (2009).